PagePlus 6.0 Help Contents


Help on Help
Help on Help: A quick overview

The PagePlus online help system is designed to work for you.  For suggestions based on your specific needs, see the Where do I begin...? section below. Whatever your background, you'll find it easy to navigate through online help:

•	To begin learning about PagePlus tools and menus, just move the mouse pointer around the screen. Watch the HintLine window at the lower right for capsule descriptions of each feature. Event Tips pop up as you try new tools and actions.

•	Right-click any item in a dialog box for a popup What's This? explanation.

•	Choose Contents to display the main help menu screen, including links to the Welcome and Support pages.

•	Choose Index to pop up the alphabetical list of help topics.

•	Choose QuickTours ("View a QuickTour" from startup or the Help menu) to see a menu of 17 illustrated tutorials on PagePlus fundamentals.

•	Choose Visual Reference or How To to peruse help information using either a graphical or step-by-step approach—whichever you prefer. Each section displays its own table of contents in the main window, while help topics appear in a second window. Extensive cross-references make sure all the information is interlinked.

Note: Both the Visual Reference and HowTo sections display their tables of contents in the main window, while help topics appear in a second window.

•	To make more room on-screen while you are reading help topics, click the main window's [image] Minimize button.

•	To restore the main window, click the PagePlus 6 Help button on the Windows Taskbar.

Where do I begin...?

...If you've worked with one or more word processing programs but are new to Desktop Publishing, we suggest you begin with the PagePlus QuickTours. These are a series of informative, illustrated screens that will introduce you to basic DTP terms and concepts, as well as key PagePlus features and procedures. You'll learn a lot! From there, try the Project Sequence in the PagePlus Companion—a series of hands-on exercises culminating in a useful Desktop Publishing QuickRef document you can print out and keep handy.

...If you're the sort who likes to dive in and try things, chances are you've already used the Page Wizards and created a publication or two. By now, you probably know about all the context-sensitive help that's available in PagePlus: Tool Tips and the HintLine, as well as What's This? help in dialogs. But since we've got your attention—may we suggest the Visual Reference(again in online help). There you'll find more detailed information on every aspect of the interface, with cross-references to procedural (How To) help. For folks who like to learn by doing, it's a great place to learn by browsing. And the Companion project sequence should be right up your alley, too.

...If you're upgrading from a previous edition of PagePlus, or have worked with another high-level DTP program, you may be more interested in knowing "What's a shortcut to adjust kerning?" or "What advantages does HTML 4.0 offer in Web Publishing mode?" If so, go directly to the Index or the How To section. For help on new features, click the links from the special section on What's New in PagePlus 6 in the next topic.


Welcome to PagePlus 6
Welcome to PagePlus 6!

  Welcome to PagePlus 6.0 from Serif: the latest in the best-selling, award-winning PagePlus line, and the easiest way ever to get professional desktop publishing results. For a quick survey of what's in store for you, be sure to check out the Introducing PagePlus 6 QuickTour.

If you've used PagePlus in the past, you know that PagePlus does it all—from glossy corporate marketing materials (including full-color printing from color separations) to "fun stuff" like party invites, ads, brochures, business stationery, cards, letterheads, compliments slips, invoices, flyers, forms, newsletters, notices, handouts, event programs, posters, price lists, reports, announcements, greeting cards, and much more. With your PC, printer, and PagePlus, you can save time and money—no experience required!

And now, PagePlus does even more! If you're new to the product, we hope you'll find it's got everything you need. And if you've upgraded, we hope you enjoy the new features—the ones most requested by PagePlus 5 users!

As always, if you have comments or suggestions—or samples of the work you create with PagePlus—we'd like to hear from you. For complete contact information, see the Support topic.

And don't forget to register your new copy, using the Serif Registration Wizard. That way, we can keep you apprised of new developments and future upgrades.

What's New in PagePlus 6...

•	Integrated Wizard Technology for "Smart Documents"
Easier, more powerful publication startup interface! Preview multiple Page Wizard categories and document choices—revisit your color scheme and text selections at any time as you continue to work with a publication.

•	Multiple Document Interface
You asked for it... Now you can open more than one publication at a time —even tile your publications and drag-and-drop objects between them.

•	More Versatile Setup with Auto-Imposition
New functionality for greeting cards, business cards, folded brochures, and more. You see your publications the right way up on-screen—and let PagePlus take care of orienting and ordering the printed output for correctly assembled masters!

•	Intelligent Color Schemes
Choose from dozens of preset color schemes to change the overall appearance of your Page Wizard publications with a single click. You can customize the scheme colors, create brand new schemes, and apply any scheme to a "from-scratch" publication.

•	Drag-and-Drop Gallery Objects
Now PagePlus comes with built-in mastheads, logos, and other page elements that you can simply drag onto your page, then customize to suit your needs!

•	Professional Print Wizard
Always been confused by how to get PostScript files to a bureau?  Let the Wizard lead the way!

•	On-screen Studio Combines Convenience with Functionality
The Studio's panels provide rapid visual access to commonly-used controls such as fonts, line settings, and the color table...plus the Portfolio, Color Schemes, and Gallery...all on one compact toolbar.

•	New Graphic and Text Frame Shapes
Break out of the boring box! We've added 27 new graphic shape tools —including stars, triangles, arrows, polygons, and callouts—to add new fun and meaning to your pages. And the Shaped Frame tool provides 18 additional molds for casting your text.

•	Improved Web Publishing Mode
PagePlus now supports HTML 4.0 for better WYSIWYG Web page design. More efficient HTML output eliminates duplicated graphics—and you can use PagePlus to add sound and video, as well as Java and HTML code, to your Web pages. As a bonus, you get hundreds of new GIF animations!

•	Instant Connection to VisualCities™
...Your one-stop Web source for clipart, photos, community chat, FREE Web space, FREE E-mail accounts, and tips on using visual communications products.

•	The PagePlus 6.0 Design CD
This optional add-on is jam-packed with Page Wizard content so you'll never run out of ideas!

•	And Oh, By the Way...
PagePlus now also has a higher level of zoom... Prints larger page sizes... Includes revamped menus for improved ease-of-use... Stores basic User Details for automatic reuse in Page Wizards... Lets you set page margin guides instantly based on your printer's printable area... Supports variable transparent background colors... Can add shaded background boxes behind text... the list goes on!

...plus all the powerful PagePlus features you've come to expect!

DTP revolutionized the graphics arts industry, and PagePlus revolutionized the DTP market—with high-impact design available to everyone. Features such as...

•	Web Publishing Mode
Create your own Web site using Web Page Wizards (using the Design CD-ROM). Choose from professionally-designed site schemes, then customize to suit your needs. Or convert an existing PagePlus publication to a Web site! The Layout Checker helps you fine-tune your design for most efficient Web use. Even add animated GIFs and marquee effects to spice up your pages! Preview your site in a Web browser and publish it to a local folder or a remote server.

•	Professional Layout Tools
Intelligent text fitting. Movable rulers and guides. Precision placement, rotation, and text wrap. Flip, crop, watermark, and recolor graphics. Text formatting with bullets, lists, slanting, kerning, hyphenation, drop caps, smart quotes, and named styles. Master pages, facing pages display, and much more!

•	Total Ease-of-Use
A collection of illustrated QuickTours to smooth the learning curve. Hideable toolbars for extra workspace area. Right-click menus. Plus, Tool Hints, HintLine, Wizards, and context-sensitive cursors to make PagePlus as friendly as a puppy!

•	Page Wizards for Instant Publications
With the Design CD, now choose from over 1200 Page Wizards (up from 300)! Just pick the type of publication you want to produce and answer a few simple questions. PagePlus does the rest.

•	Word Processing Tools
PagePlus features WritePlus for integrated word processing with word count, search and replace, spell-checking, thesaurus, and proof reader. And you get over 400 TrueType fonts that let you express yourself with style and impact!

•	Integrated Text Effects and Table Editor
LogoPlus is built in to make it easy for you to create attention-grabbing headlines and powerful logos with text along a curve or fitted to a shape. Use TablePlus to create colorful, sophisticated cell-based publication elements. Include formatted text and spreadsheet formulas; vary color and table style with a few mouse clicks!

•	Photo Optimizer
If your publication includes color or grayscale photographs, use the Photo Optimizer to get the best results for each photo on your particular printer. Pick the best result from the thumbnail sheet—and PagePlus remembers the optimum settings for that image!

•	Index, Table of Contents, and Calendar Wizards
Compile a professional index complete with headings, subheadings and page references... especially useful for longer publications! Automatically collect newsletter headlines (or any styled text you specify) into a table of contents list! Choose from a wide variety of sizes and design options, then just click and drag to fit your calendar to a column or a whole page!

•	Universal Portfolio
A place to store your favorite designs for use in any publication! Just drag and drop designs in and out of the hideable Portfolio window. It's always available when you need it.

•	Versatile Printing and Mail Merge
Impressive results on your dot-matrix, ink-jet, or laser printer in black and white or full color. Print your current publication multiple times, merging data from any character-delimited address list file.

•	Professional Output
Use the high-end features of PagePlus to achieve the highest possible quality. Features the PANTONE® color library, color mapping of vector images, and full spot and process color separation with saveable printer schemes.


QuickTours

QuickTours are short, easy-to-follow introductions to essential PagePlus topics. You can view QuickTours in any order, but the list below shows the suggested sequence. To view a QuickTour, click its name in the list. To continue learning about PagePlus, follow the See Also links.

To access this QuickTour menu directly:

•	In the Startup Wizard, select the View a QuickTour option.

•	From the Help menu, choose View a QuickTour....

Suggested Sequence:	See also these Help topics:
1 Introducing PagePlus 6	How to Start, Save, and Close Publications
2 Finishing Your Publication	Customizing Page Wizard text  How to Set Up Pages and Backgrounds
3 Setting Up Publications	How to Set Up Pages and Backgrounds   How to View and Turn Pages
4 Linking Text Frames	How to Work with Text
5 Using WritePlus	Editing text with WritePlus
6 Text Styles	How to Format Characters and Paragraphs
7 Wrapping Text	Wrapping text around objects  Cropping an object
8 Mail Merge	Using mail merge
9 Using LogoPlus	Using LogoPlus to insert a layered graphic
10 Using TablePlus	Using TablePlus to insert a table
11 Grouping Objects	How to Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects  Creating groups
12 Layering Objects	Layering Objects
13 Positioning Objects	Moving objects  Visual Reference: Layout Tools
14 Rotating and Flipping Objects	Rotating an object  Flipping a picture
15 Precision Layout	Aligning objects  Snapping  ChangeBar
16 Colors and Color Schemes	How to  Work with Color and Transparency
17 Creating a Web Site	Getting started in Web mode


Credits

•	Clipart samples from Serif ArtPacks © Serif, Inc. & Paul Harris

•	Portions clipart and graphic content © 1999 Nova Development Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.

•	TrueType font samples from Serif FontPacks © Serif, Inc.

•	Portions graphics import/export technology ©  AccuSoft Corp. & Eastman Kodak Company & INSO Corporation & LEAD Technologies, Inc.

•	ImageStream® Graphics and Presentation Filters, Copyright © 1991-1999 INSO Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

•	International ProofReader™ English text proofing system © 1994 by INSO Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction or disassembly of embodied computer programs or algorithms prohibited.

•	Enhanced Roget's US and UK Electronic Thesaurus  © 1994 by INSO Corporation. Adapted from the Oxford Thesaurus © 1991 by Oxford University Press and from Roget's II: The New Thesaurus © 1980 by Houghton Mifflin Company. All rights reserved. Reproduction or disassembly of embodied computer programs or algorithms prohibited.

•	International Hyphenator © 1994 by INSO Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction or disassembly of embodied computer programs or algorithms prohibited.

•	"PANTONE Color Computer Graphics" © Pantone, Inc. 1986, 1988.

•	Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of PANTONE Color Computer Graphics and Software which are licensed to Serif, Inc. to distribute for use only in combination with PagePlus. PANTONE Color Computer Graphics and Software shall not be copied onto another diskette or into memory unless as part of the execution of PagePlus.

•	PANTONE®* Computer Video simulations used in this product may not match PANTONE-identified solid color standards. Use current PANTONE Color Reference Manuals for accurate color.

*Pantone, Inc.'s check-standard trademark for color.

All Serif product names are trademarks of Serif, Inc. Microsoft, Windows 95 and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks acknowledged.

Serif PagePlus 6.0 © 1999 Serif, Inc.

Many thanks to our million PagePlus users for supporting us… We couldn't do it without you.


Visual Reference

MENUBAR - Click a menu name for details:

TOOLBARS - Click a toolbar for details.	EDITORS

LAYOUT TOOLS - Click a layout tool for details.

WRITE PLUS TEXT EDITOR - Click an element for details.

See also the How To topic Editing text with WritePlus.

LOGO PLUS GRAPHIC EDITOR - Click an element for details.

For an illustrated introduction to LogoPlus, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Using LogoPlus.

To view LogoPlus topics in sequence, see the How To topic Using LogoPlus to insert a layered graphic.

TABLE PLUS TABLE EDITOR - Click an element for details.

For an illustrated introduction to TablePlus, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Using TablePlus.

To view TablePlus topics in sequence, see the How To topic Using TablePlus to insert a table .


File Menu
Commands for opening, saving, and printing publications.
Shortcut: Alt+F

New
Displays the Startup Wizard, which gives you five options: (1) design a new publication using a Page Wizard; (2) start a new publication from scratch; (3) open a saved publication; (4) view a QuickTour; or (5) access online resources. (See the How To topic Starting a new publication.)
Tip: You can also use the New button on the Standard toolbar.

Open...
Displays a standard Windows dialog which allows you to open an existing PagePlus publication (*.PPP) or template (*.PPX) file. (See the How To topic Opening an existing publication.)
Tip: You can also use the Open button on the Standard toolbar.

Revert
Restores the saved version of the current publication, abandoning any unsaved changes.

Close
Closes the current publication. If it's still unsaved ("Untitled") or there are unsaved changes, you'll be prompted to save changes.

Save
Saves the current publication under its current name. If it's still unsaved ("Untitled"), the Save As... dialog automatically appears. (See the How To topic Saving your publication.)
Tip: You can also use the Save button on the Standard toolbar.

Save As...
Displays a dialog prompting you to enter a directory and file name for the publication, then saves it under that name.

Export as Picture…
Creates (or exports) a graphic file version of either your whole page or the currently selected objects, using the format you specify. Useful for generating logos and pictures to be placed in another application. (See the How To topic Exporting as a picture.)

Web Site Properties...
(Web Publishing mode only) Displays a dialog that lets you view and edit various properties of your Web site. Click the Site tab to set the HTML version (the default is HTML 4.0) and enter optional search engine descriptors and keywords. Click the Colors tab to set text, hyperlink, and background colors. Click the Page tab to define a Web page file name and (optional) title and/or background sound.

Preview Site in Browser...
(Web Publishing mode only) Exports your entire publication as a temporary, local Web site, without saving it to disk, then opens the site for preview in your World Wide Web browser. (See the How To topic Previewing your Web site in a browser.)
Note: To save the site to disk, use Publish to Disk Folder....

Publish Site>
(Web Publishing mode only) Displays a submenu with the following choices:

• to Disk Folder...
Displays a dialog that lets you save your entire publication, or selected pages, to disk while exporting it as a Web site. You'll then have the option of previewing it in your browser. (See the How To topic Publishing a Web site to a local folder.)

• to Web...
Displays a dialog that lets you export your entire publication, or selected pages, as a site on the World Wide Web. (See the How To topic Publishing to the World Wide Web.)

Properties...
Displays a dialog that lets you enter publication summary information (such as author and keywords) and view statistics (such as revision date and number of pages).

Page Setup...
Displays a dialog for modifying the publication dimensions. Check Delete Ruler Guides to clear all ruler guides on the current page.
(See the Visual Reference topic Setting publication dimensions.)
Shortcut: Double-click a blank part of the page.
Note: To set page margins and columns, choose Page Margins & Columns.... To set page numbering, choose Page Number Format... from the Format menu.

Page Margins & Columns...
(Paper Publishing mode only) Displays a dialog that lets you change the page margin and column guide settings. (See the How To topic Setting page margins and columns.)
Shortcut: Right-click on a blank part of the page and choose Page Margins & Columns....

Print...
Displays a dialog box providing options for selecting which part of the publication file to print and how to print it. The Properties button displays a standard Windows printer setup dialog. The Options button lets you control scaling, tiling, color separations, and other useful features. (See the How To topic Basic printing.)
Tip: You can also use the Print button on the Standard toolbar.

Print Preview
Changes the screen view to display the layout without frames, guides, rulers, and other screen items. (Special options such as tiled output or crop marks are not displayed.)
Tip: You can also use the Print Preview button on the HintLine toolbar.

Professional Print Wizard
(Paper Publishing mode only) Starts a Wizard that guides you through the process of generating PostScript files for a commercial service bureau. The Wizard helps you match your PostScript output to the bureau's specific requirements.

Switch to Web Publishing...
(Paper Publishing mode only) Opens the current publication in Web Publishing mode. You'll be prompted to save an unsaved publication, and to run the Layout Checker.

Switch to Paper Publishing...
(Web Publishing mode only) Opens the current publication in Paper Publishing mode. You'll be prompted to save an unsaved publication.

Recent Files List
Lists the names of the four most recently saved PagePlus files. Click a file name to open that file.

Exit
Closes PagePlus. You'll be prompted to save changes made since the last save.

Note: Menu items with (...) bring up dialog boxes with context-sensitive help. Simply right-click on a dialog box item for information about the item. Many commands are also available by right-clicking objects, toolbars, and page regions.


Edit Menu
Commands for Clipboard (cut & paste) and OLE.
Shortcut: Alt+E

Undo <action>
Undoes the most recent change to the current publication. Undo is grayed out when not available. To set the number of levels of Undo, pull down the Tools menu and choose Options/General.
Tip: You can also use the Undo button on the Standard toolbar, or press Ctrl+Z.

Cut
Deletes the selected object(s) from the page or pasteboard AND places a copy on the Windows Clipboard.
Tip: You can also use the Cut button on the Standard toolbar, or right-click on the object, or press Ctrl+X.

Copy
Copies the selected object(s) to the Windows Clipboard.
Tip: You can also use the Copy button on the Standard toolbar or right-click on the object, or press Ctrl+C. To duplicate the object, press the Ctrl key after selecting it, then drag the copy to a new position.

Paste
Inserts the contents of the Windows Clipboard at the insertion point. Defaults to the PagePlus object format, if available. To paste as a particular format, use Paste Special.
Tip: You can also use the Paste button on the Standard toolbar, or right-click on the object, or press Ctrl+V.

Paste Special...
Displays a dialog box that lets you choose one of several formats (e.g. Picture, Bitmap, OLE) to be used when pasting. Then inserts the contents of the Windows Clipboard at the insertion point, using the selected format.

Paste Format
Applies the properties of the PagePlus object currently on the Windows Clipboard to the currently selected object. To make two objects look similar: Select one and copy it to the Clipboard, then select the other and choose Paste Format.

Clear
Deletes the selected object(s) without placing a copy on the Windows Clipboard.
Tip: If you accidentally delete a selection, immediately choose Undo from the Edit menu.

Select All
Creates a multiple selection, including all the objects on both the current page and the pasteboard. To select only objects of the same type as a selected object, hold down the Shift key when you choose Select All.

Delete Page...
Displays the Page Manager dialog, preset to delete one or more pages. You can also add pages or go to a specific page in the publication.
Shortcut: Double-click the Current Pages box on the HintLine toolbar.

Find and Replace...
Displays a dialog that lets you search text for words or parts of words. You can search all stories, or just the story containing the currently selected text frame, block, or region. When the target text is found, WritePlus displays it and the Replace options become available.

Object
Allows editing of an OLE object. This is the standard OLE Object menu command; it changes according to the type of object selected.

Links...
Opens linked documents or changes links.

Note: Menu items with (...) bring up dialog boxes with context-sensitive help. Simply right-click on a dialog box item for information about the item. Many commands are also available by right-clicking objects, toolbars, and page regions.


View Menu
Commands for setting display options.
Shortcut: Alt+V

See Also:

•	The QuickTours, Positioning Objects and Precision Layout

•	The Layout Tools section of the Visual Reference.

Rulers
When checked, rulers are visible at the top and left of the document window. Uncheck to hide rulers. (See the Visual Reference topic Rulers.)

Scrollbars
When checked, scrollbars are visible at the right and bottom of the document window. Uncheck to hide scrollbars.

Guide Lines
When checked, ruler guides and page margin/column guides are visible. Uncheck to hide guides. (See the Visual Reference topic Page margins and columns.)

Frames
When checked, the borders and margins of text frames are visible. Uncheck to hide frames. (See the Visual Reference topic Frame margins and columns.)

Dot Grid
When checked, the dot grid is visible. Uncheck to hide the dot grid. (See the Visual Reference topic Dot grid.)

Toolbars...
Displays the Toolbars tab of the Options dialog. Check or uncheck an individual toolbar item to show or hide the toolbar.
Tip: You can also right-click on any toolbar region.

Zoom>
Displays a submenu that lets you select the zoom percentage at which your page is displayed. Options include Page (fit the whole page in the window), Page Width (fit the page width to the window width), and various scaling percentages.
Tip: You can also use the Fit Page and Actual Size buttons, along with other Zoom and Pan buttons, on the HintLine toolbar.
Shortcut: Right-click any object and choose Zoom In or Zoom Out.

Facing Pages
(Paper Publishing mode only) Check to turn on facing page view (two pages, side by side). Uncheck for single page view (one page at a time). Choose the setting appropriate for your publication. Neither setting affects the zoom percentage.
Tip: You can also use the Facing Pages button on the HintLine toolbar.

Go to / Leave Master Page
Switches the screen view between page (foreground) and master page (background) levels. Choose Go to Master Page when you wish to edit master page objects.
Tip: You can also click on the Current Page box (at left on the HintLine toolbar) to switch between levels.

Master Page Objects
When checked, master page objects are visible on the current page. Uncheck to hide master page objects on the current page. For example, you may not want a page number on a "new chapter" page.

Note: Menu items with (...) bring up dialog boxes with context-sensitive help. Simply right-click on a dialog box item for information about the item. Many commands are also available by right-clicking objects, toolbars, and page regions.


Insert Menu
Commands for inserting content and layout elements into your publication.
Shortcut: Alt+I

Page...
Displays the Page Manager dialog, preset to add one or more pages. You can also delete pages or go to a specific page in the publication.
Shortcut: Double-click the Current Pages box on the HintLine toolbar.

Picture...
Displays the Import Picture Wizard, which allows easy import of pictures from a number of different sources, such as PhotoCD, Scanner, and so on. If the Wizard is turned off, the command displays a file selection dialog. (See the How to topic Importing paint- and draw-type graphics.)
Tip: You can also use the Import Picture button on the Tools toolbar, or press Ctrl+G.

Text File…
Displays a file selection dialog that lets you import a word processor file into your publication. You can set your preferred text format using the General tab of the Tools/Options... dialog. (See the How To topic Importing text from a file.)

Object...
Displays the standard Windows Insert Object dialog for inserting an OLE object.

PageHint...
Displays a dialog that lets you type the text of a PageHint (reminder or comment) and insert it into your publication. Click a PageHint icon on the publication page to view, edit, or delete it. (See the How To topic Using PageHints.)

Web Object>
(Web Publishing mode only) Displays a submenu with the following choices:

• Sound...
Displays a dialog that lets you select a sound file to add to a Web page. (See the How To topic Adding sound and video.)

• Video...
Displays a dialog that lets you select a video file to add to a Web page. (See the How To topic Adding sound and video.)

• Animated Marquee...
Starts a Wizard that lets you add scrolling motion to a headline or catch phrase for a Web page.

• Animated GIF...
Starts a Wizard that lets you preview a variety of small, animated graphics to use in your Web site.

• Java Applet...
Displays a dialog that lets you select a Java applet and supporting files to add to a Web page. (See the How To topic Adding Java applets.)

• HTML...
Displays a dialog that lets you enter an HTML code fragment to add to a Web page. (See the How To topic .Adding HTML.)

Hyperlink...
(Web Publishing mode only) Displays a dialog that lets you define a hypertext jump for the selected object. You can link to a specific Internet address (URL), a specific page in your publication, an Internet e-mail address (for example, if you want your readers to be able to send you e-mail), or a file (such as sound or video) on your hard disk. If you link to a file, the file will be published to the Web as part of your site.

Headers & Footers...
(Paper Publishing mode only) Starts a Wizard that helps you create or edit header and footer text that repeats on every page.

Table of Contents...
(Paper Publishing mode only) Starts a Wizard that helps you create a table of contents. You can designate which text styles in your publication will be used to compile first- and second-level headings. (See the How To topic Creating a table of contents.)

Index...
(Paper Publishing mode only) Starts a Wizard that helps you create an index. Use WritePlus to mark index entries before running the Index Wizard. (See the How To topic Creating an index.)

Hyphenation Point
(Paper Publishing mode only) Inserts/removes a hyphenation point to mark a character as suitable for creating a line-end using a hyphen. (See the How To topic Using Hyphenation.)
Tip: It's more convenient to use the keyboard shortcut, Ctrl+'-'.

New Line
Inserts a "soft return" at the text cursor position. This breaks the text so it wraps to a new line, but keeps the whole paragraph intact.

Page Number
(Paper Publishing mode only) Inserts a page number field at the text cursor position. If page numbering changes, the field updates automatically.

Symbol>
Displays a submenu to let you insert standard symbols not found on the keyboard. The selected symbol is inserted at the text cursor position. Choose Other to display Windows' Character Map applet.

Information>
Displays a submenu with the following choices (grayed out unless there is a blinking cursor in text):

• Date or Time...
Displays a dialog letting you select a date/time format, then inserts a date/time field at the text cursor position. Uncheck Update Automatically to keep the original date/time in place indefinitely. (See the How To topic Inserting date/time.)

• Document Info...
Displays a dialog letting you select a document property such as title or file name, then inserts it at the text cursor position. (See the How To topic Viewing and changing document information.)

• User Details
Displays a dialog letting you select a defined User Detail field (such as name or address), then inserts it the text cursor position. To define User Details, choose Set User Details... from the Tools menu. (See the How To topic Inserting user details.)

Note: Menu items with (...) bring up dialog boxes with context-sensitive help. Simply right-click on a dialog box item for information about the item. Many commands are also available by right-clicking objects, toolbars, and page regions.


Format Menu
Commands for setting attributes of text, graphics, and frames.
Shortcut: Alt+M

See Also:

•	The sequence of How To topics on "How to Work with Text," starting with Importing text from a file.

Character...
Displays a dialog for setting properties of text characters, such as font, font style, case, size, width, color, etc.
Tip: You can also use the ChangeBar, as well as the Styles, Font, and PointSize list boxes and the Bold, Italic, and Underline buttons on the Standard toolbar. You can also right-click on a free text object.

Spacing...
Displays a dialog for setting properties of paragraph, line, and inter-letter text spacing.
Tip: You can also use the text alignment buttons on the Standard toolbar, or right-click on a free text object.

Tabs & Indents...
Displays a dialog for specifying first-line, left and right indents, and tab position, alignment and leader types. You can use the dynamic Tab ruler or enter values manually into the boxes.
Tip: You can also right-click on a free text object.

Bullets & Numbering...
Displays a dialog for setting properties of paragraph bullet and numbering. The Preview window shows the effect on selected text.
Tip: You can also right-click on a free text object.

Dropped Caps…
Displays a dialog for setting properties of dropped and raised initial capitals. The Preview window shows the effect on selected text.
Tip: You can also right-click on a free text object.

Text Background...
Displays a dialog that lets you attach ruled lines and/or shaded background boxes to text blocks. (See the How To topic Creating background boxes and rules.)
Tip: You can also right-click on a free text object.

Kern>
Displays a submenu to let you adjust spacing between a pair of characters. Before kerning, click between two characters for a selection point. Choose Positive to increase kerning, Negative to decrease, or Custom to enter a kern value specified as a percentage of the text size. Kern is grayed when there is no flashing text cursor.
Tip: It's more convenient to use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl+Alt+'+' to increase kerning, or Crl+Alt+'-' to decrease.

Line...
Displays a dialog combining all the line properties, such as weight (thickness), color, shading, line style, and corners. Weight: Select Custom to display the Line dialog. Select None for no line. Color: Select Clear for no border.
Tip: You can also right-click on a graphic object.

Fill...
Displays a dialog combining all the graphic fill properties, including color, pattern and shading. Color: Select Clear for an "empty" shape.
Tip: You can also right-click on a graphic object.

Picture>
Displays a submenu with the following choices (grayed out if no picture is selected):

• Properties...
Displays a dialog that lets you set a range of picture options, including shade (tint), border, color, transparency, scaling, and flpping.

• Color Mapper…
Displays a dialog that lets you change the colors used in vector-type images and LogoPlus objects, and add colors from these objects to your publication color palette. (See the How To topic Changing or copying image colors .)

• Photo Optimizer...
Helps you to improve the print quality of a selected bitmap picture on a specific printer. The Wizard lets you print test samples and choose the best settings, which are then applied when the publication is printed. (See the How To topic Optimizing pictures for printing .)

Update Text Style
Updates the current text style (shown in the Styles box on the standard toolbar) to match the properties of the selected text.
Caution: Whenever you update a style definition, all text blocks sharing that style will also change.

Text Style Palette...
Displays a dialog for editing and managing text styles in your publication.

Update Object Default
Updates the local default settings for the currently selected type of object, using the current object's properties. In other words, the next time you create an object of this type in this publication, it will have these properties. To save local defaults globally so they'll apply to new publications, use Tools/Save Defaults.... (See the How To topic Setting defaults.)
Tip: You can also right-click on the object.

Frame Setup...
Displays a dialog for editing the current frame margins and columns. (See the Visual Reference topic Frame margins and columns.)
Tip: You can also right-click on a frame.

Page Number Format...
(Paper Publishing mode only) Displays a dialog that lets you set the style of page numbers used in the publication, and the first page number. (See the How To topic Using page numbering.)

Note: Menu items with (...) bring up dialog boxes with context-sensitive help. Simply right-click on a dialog box item for information about the item. Many commands are also available by right-clicking objects, toolbars, and page regions.


Tools Menu
General program tools and options.
Shortcut: Alt+T

Layout Checker...
Starts a Wizard that searches your publication for common layout problems, such as objects off the page, unused text in a story, and empty frames; or (in Web Publishing mode) for overlapping objects, text problems, etc.

Spelling Checker...
Starts a Wizard that helps you check your publication for spelling mistakes. Click the Quick Spell button on the first screen to check the spelling of a single word. (See the How To topic Spell-checking.)

Proof Reader…
Starts a Wizard that helps you proof your publication text for grammar and readability errors. (See the How To topic Automatic proofreading.)

Thesaurus…
Displays the Thesaurus, which lets you find synonyms, definitions, and variations of words in your publication text. (See the How To topic Using the thesaurus.)

Color Manager...
Displays a dialog that lets you add, modify, or delete colors and color schemes. The Colors tab lists colors in the PagePlus color table; click New Color to bring up the Custom Color Selector. The Color Schemes tab displays current color schemes. (See the How To topics Creating your own colors and Using color schemes.)

Hyperlink Manager...
(Web Publishing mode only) Displays a dialog showing all hyperlinks used in the current publication, listed by page number. To go to a link, double-click it in the list. To delete a link, select it and click Remove. To modify a link (for example, designate a different target URL), select it and click Modify, which displays the HyperLinks dialog.

Web Picture Properties...
(Web Publishing mode only) Starts a Wizard that helps you set the properties of objects that will be converted to pictures when the publication is exported. For each object, you can choose GIF (best for small graphics) or JPEG (best for photos), or let PagePlus make an automatic selection (the default). In addition, you can enter an identifying tag for Web site visitors to read while the image is downloading.

Fonts & Resources Manager...
Displays a dialog that lists the fonts and resources (such as pictures, sounds, and video) used in your publication, and shows if the resources are linked or embedded. Useful when copying or moving publication files to another computer. (See the How To topic Checking fonts and resources used.)

Text Manager...
Displays a list of all the text stories used in your publication. (See the How To topic Checking stories with the Text Manager.)

Convert to Picture
Deletes the selected object(s), replacing them with a picture representation.
Caution: Convert to Picture is a one-way process. Converted objects are no longer individually editable.

Mail Merge
Displays a submenu with the following choices. (See also the QuickTour, Mail Merge and the How To topic Using mail merge.)

• New Address List...
Displays a dialog that lets you create a new PagePlus address list (*.SDB) file. Each record in an address list has 20 fields.

• Open Address List...
Displays a dialog that lets you locate a PagePlus address list file to open. You also can open character-delimited files (from a schedule or contact management program, for example) and use the built-in Address List Mapper to convert them to PagePlus address list (*SDB) files.

• Edit Address List...
Displays a dialog that lets you add or delete records, and edit field data, in the current address list.

• Merge and Print...
Displays a dialog that lets you print your current publication multiple times, using addresses from the current address list.

• Insert Address Field...
Displays a dialog that lets you select and insert a specific address field marker at the current cursor position.

Save Defaults...
Records the current publication's object defaults (for text, graphics, and frames), named styles, and color palette as global settings. To set local defaults for a particular object type, use Update Object Default from the Format or right-click menu. (See the How To topic Setting defaults.)

Set User Details...
Displays a dialog that lets you review and change User Details (such as name, address, etc.) you've supplied as "answer text" in Page Wizards or Gallery objects. By default, User Details are continually updated from Wizard entries. Uncheck "Update from Wizard entries" to leave the current details intact. (See the How To topics Creating a publication using a Page Wizard and Inserting user details.)

Options...
Displays a dialog that lets you customize a wide range of PagePlus settings, including picture and layout options, ease-of-use features, etc. (See the How To topic Setting PagePlus options.)
Shortcut: Double-click on the pasteboard area. For a shortcut to the Toolbars tab, right-click on any tool region.

Note: Menu items with (...) bring up dialog boxes with context-sensitive help. Simply right-click on a dialog box item for information about the item. Many commands are also available by right-clicking objects, toolbars, and page regions.


Arrange menu
Commands for adjusting the relative positions and properties of PagePlus objects.
Shortcut: Alt+A

Snapping
When checked, the snapping feature is on, and objects you move or resize will align to guide lines. These can include ruler guides, frame and column guides, and the dot grid. Uncheck to turn snapping off. (See the How To topic Snapping.)
Tip: You can also use the Snapping button on the HintLine toolbar.

Send to Back
Sends the selected object to the rearmost layer, behind other objects.
Tip: You can also use the Send to Back and Send to Front buttons on the Standard toolbar, or right-click on the object and use the Layer> submenu.

Bring to Front
Brings the selected object to the frontmost layer, on top of other objects. Tip: You can also use the Send to Back and Send to Front buttons on the Standard toolbar, or right-click on the object and use the Layer> submenu.

Back One
Shifts the selected object's position one layer toward the rear.
Tip: You can also right-click on the object and use the Layer submenu.

Forward One
Shifts the selected object's position one layer toward the front.
Tip: You can also right-click on the object and use the Layer submenu.

Align Objects...
Displays a dialog to let you align objects in a multiple selection in various ways. Check Include Page to make objects align with page edges. (If only one object is selected, page-edge alignment is automatic.)
Tip: You can also right-click on an object.

Group Objects
Turns a multiple selection (when two or more objects are selected) into a group object. (See the QuickTour, Grouping Objects.)
Tip: You can also click the Group Objects button on the multiple selection.

Wrap Settings...
Displays a dialog to let you control how text wraps around the selected object. (See the QuickTour, Wrapping Text and the How To topic Wrapping text around objects.)
Tip: You can also right-click on the object.

Lock Object
When checked, the selected object's position and size are fixed so the object cannot be moved or resized. Convenient in situations where many objects overlap, or to avoid accidental changes.
Tip: You can also right-click on the object.

Note: Menu items with (...) bring up dialog boxes with context-sensitive help. Simply right-click on a dialog box item for information about the item. Many commands are also available by right-clicking objects, toolbars, and page regions.


Window menu
Commands for arranging publication windows.
Shortcut: Alt+W

Cascade
Arranges the windows as overlapping tiles.

Tile Horizontally
Arranges the windows as horizontal, non-overlapping tiles. Useful for side-by-side comparisons.

Tile Vertically
Arranges the windows as vertical, non-overlapping tiles.

Arrange Icons
Arranges the minimized windows.

Window List
Shows the names of open publication windows, with the current window checked. Click a window name to work in that publication.

Note: Menu items with (...) bring up dialog boxes with context-sensitive help. Simply right-click on a dialog box item for information about the item. Many commands are also available by right-clicking objects, toolbars, and page regions.


Help Menu
Help, hints, tips, and options for learning PagePlus.
Shortcut: Alt+H

See Also:

•	The introductory topic Help on Help.

Contents
Displays the Help Contents page.

Index
Displays the index of Help topics.

Visit VisualCities™
Connects to the World Wide Web and displays the home page of VisualCities.com, the one-stop source for free Web space and E-mail, clipart, photos, and other visual communications resources.
Hint: You can also access VisualCities via the Startup Wizard's Online Resources option.

Visit the PagePlus Web Site
Connects to the World Wide Web and displays the PagePlus Web site section in your Web browser. (By default, this feature activates periodically. To change the defaults, choose Options from the Tools menu and use the General tab.)
Hint: You can also access the PagePlus Web site via the Startup Wizard's Online Resources option.

Visit the Serif Web Site
Connects to the World Wide Web and displays the Serif Home Page in your Web browser.
Hint: You can also access the Serif Web site via the Startup Wizard's Online Resources option.

View a QuickTour...
Displays the menu of QuickTours.

Registration Wizard...
Helps you to register your own personal copy of PagePlus.

About PagePlus...
Displays version and copyright information.

Note: Menu items with (...) bring up dialog boxes with context-sensitive help. Simply right-click on a dialog box item for information about the item. Many commands are also available by right-clicking objects, toolbars, and page regions.


 Standard toolbar
To hide/show toolbars: Right-click any tool region.

	New Click to display the Startup Wizard, which gives you five options: (1) design a new publication using a Page Wizard; (2) start a new publication from scratch; (3) open a saved publication; (4) view a QuickTour; or (5) access online resources. Same as menu command File/New.
	Open Click to display a standard Windows dialog which allows you to open an existing PagePlus publication (*.PPP) or template (*.PPX) file. Opening a file that is already open lets you revert to the saved version of the file. Same as menu command File/Open.
	Save Click to save the current publication under its current name. If it's still unsaved ("Untitled"), the Save As... dialog automatically appears. Same as menu command File/Save.
	Print Click to display a dialog providing options for selecting which part of the publication file to print and how to print it. The Options button lets you control scaling, tiling, color separations, and other useful features. The Setup button displays the standard Windows printer setup dialog. Same as menu command File/Print.
	Cut Click to delete the selected object(s) from the page or pasteboard AND place a copy on the Windows Clipboard. Same as menu command Edit/Cut.
	Copy Click to copy the selected object(s) to the Windows Clipboard. Same as menu command Edit/Copy.
	Paste Click to insert the contents of the Windows Clipboard at the selection point. Defaults to the PagePlus object format, if available. To paste as a particular format, use Paste Special. Same as menu command Edit/Paste.
	Undo Click to undo the most recent change to the current publication. Undo is grayed out when not available. To set the number of levels of Undo, pull down the Tools menu and choose Options (the General tab). Same as menu command Edit/Undo.
	Send to Back Click to shift the selected object's position to the bottom layer, behind all other objects. To shift just one layer back, choose Back One from the Arrange menu. (See the QuickTour, Layering Objects.)
	Bring to Front Click to shift the selected object's position to the top layer, in front of all other objects. To shift just one layer forward, choose Forward One from the Arrange menu.
	Square Wrap Click to set the object's text wrap outline outside the object's rectangular frame, so text wraps around the frame. For other wrap setting options, choose Wrap Settings... from the Arrange menu. (See the QuickTour, Wrapping Text and the How To topic Wrapping text around objects.)
	Irregular Wrap Click to fit the object's text wrap outline to the object's actual contours, so text wraps more closely around the object. For other wrap setting options, choose Wrap Settings... from the Arrange menu.
	Layout Checker Click to start a Wizard that searches your publication for common layout problems, such as objects off the page, unused text in a story, and empty frames; or (in Web Publishing mode) for overlapping objects, text problems, etc. Same as menu command Tools/Layout Checker.
	Spell Checker Click to start a Wizard that helps you check your publication for spelling mistakes. Click the Quick Spell button on the first screen to check the spelling of a single word. Same as menu command Tools/Spelling Checker. (See the How To topic Spell-checking.)
	Proof Reader Click to start a Wizard that helps you proof your publication text for grammar and readability errors. Same as menu command Tools/Proof Reader. (See the How To topic Automatic proofreading.)
	PageHint Click to display a dialog that lets you type the text of a PageHint (reminder or comment) and insert it into your publication. Click a PageHint icon on the publication page to view, edit, or delete it. Same as menu command Help/Insert PageHint. (See the How To topic Using PageHints.)
	Horizontal Flip Click to flip the picture left to right. Top and bottom stay the same. (See the How To topic Flipping a picture.)
	Vertical Flip Click to flip the picture top to bottom. Left and right stay the same.
	Styles Displays the named style of the current text block. To define a style based on the selected text's properties, type a style name into the box and press Enter. To apply a named style to a text block, click in the text, then select the style name in the drop-down list. (See the How To topic Text styles.)
	Font Displays the font of text at the cursor position. To change the font of selected text, click a new font name in the drop-down list. Tip: You can also use the Studio's Text panel. (See the How To topic How to Format Characters and Paragraphs.)
	Point Size Displays the point size of text at the cursor position. To change the text size of selected text, click a new point size in the drop-down list, or type in a value and press Enter.
	Font style buttons "Down" buttons indicate font style properties of text at the cursor position (Bold, Italic, Underline). To apply or remove a style, click the appropriate button.
	Alignment buttons The "down" button indicates the paragraph alignment of text at the cursor position (Left, Centered, Right, or Justified). To change the alignment of selected text, click a different button.
	Frame / Graphic Info Displays information about the selected frame sequence or graphic.  For a frame sequence, shows: the story title or file name of its source text, the number of the current frame, and the total number of linked frames in the sequence. If there is text in the overflow area, a plus sign (+) follows the file name. For a graphic, shows the original file name and graphic format. Hint: Use Tools/Fonts & Resources Manager... to view a list of all graphics in the publication.
	Columns Displays the number of columns in the selected text frame. To change the number of columns, click a different number in the drop-down list. (See the Visual Reference topic Frame margins and columns.)


 Tools toolbar
To hide/show toolbars: Right-click any tool region.

	Pointer Tool Click to use the Pointer tool to select, move, copy, and resize objects. • To select an object, click on it. Small "handles" appear defining the object's borders and corners. (See the How To topic Selecting an object.) • To move the selected object, drag it while holding down the left mouse button. (See the How To topic Moving objects.) • To copy the selected object, hold down the Ctrl key as you start dragging. (See the How To topic Copying objects.) • To resize the selected object, drag one of its handles. (See the How To topic Resizing objects.) • To add the selected object to a multiple selection, hold down the Shift key as you click on it. (See the How To topic Selecting multiple objects.) • To edit the selected object's wrap outline, click the outline to add a node, or click and drag a node to move it. (See the How To topic Wrapping text around objects.)
	Rotate Tool Click to use the Rotate tool to rotate an object around its top left handle. Select the object, then drag one of its handles. You can also use the Rotate tool to move and copy objects. • To constrain rotation in 45-degree steps, press the Shift key after you've begun rotation, and hold it down until after you release the mouse button.  • To unrotate (restore the original orientation), double-click the object. To restore the rotated position, double-click again. (See the How To topic Rotating an object.)
	Crop Tool Click to use the Crop tool to crop (or trim) objects. Select the object, then drag one of its handles inward. You can also use the Crop tool to move and copy objects. • To scroll the visible portion of a cropped object within the crop area, select the object and drag its center area.  • To uncrop (restore full visibility), double-click the object. To restore the cropped state, double-click again. (See the How To topic Cropping an object.)
	Text Tool Click to use the Text tool (which provides the standard I-beam cursor) to create new text or edit existing text.  • To create frame text in a blank text frame, click over the frame. Note: To create a blank text frame, use a Frame tool. • To create a new free text object at the cursor position, click over a blank area of the page or pasteboard; to specify the text width, drag out a text region. To create a new free text object and launch WritePlus, double-click over a blank area of the page or pasteboard. • To edit text on the page, click or drag over the text object. • To launch WritePlus for story editing, double-click the text object.  (See the How To topic Understanding frame text (flowing text), and following topics.)
	Standard Frame Click to create a standard rectangular (box) text frame—the basic container for text in story form. To define a new frame, drag on the page or pasteboard. By default, the Frame Wizard appears to help you set up the frame and begin entering text. (See the How To topic Understanding frame text (flowing text).)
	Shaped Frame Click to display a flyout menu (as shown) of various irregularly shaped text frames. The button's icon shows the most recently selected frame shape. Click the desired frame shape to select it, then drag on the page or pasteboard. By default, the Frame Wizard appears to help you set up the frame and begin entering text. (See the How To topic Understanding frame text (flowing text).)
	Import Picture Click to display the Picture Wizard, which allows easy import of pictures from a number of different sources, such as PhotoCD and TWAIN (live scanner) images. If the Wizard is turned off, Import Picture displays a file selection dialog. Same as menu command Insert/Picture.... You can also press Ctrl+G. (See the How To topic Importing paint- and draw-type graphics.)
	Insert Click to display a flyout menu (as shown) of object types you can insert, as detailed below:
	Insert Logo Click to create a shape, headline, or complex logo using the built-in LogoPlus module. Click again on your page (or drag out the desired size). LogoPlus launches with a dialog that lets you preview various logo templates.
	Insert Table Click to use the built-in TablePlus module to create a table. Click again on your page (or drag out the desired size). TablePlus launches with a dialog that lets you preview various table templates.
	Insert DrawPlus Object (Available if Serif DrawPlus installed) Click to create a draw graphic. Click again on your page (or drag out the desired size). DrawPlus launches with a selection of sample designs.
	Insert 3DPlus Object (Available if Serif 3DPlus installed) Click to create a photo object. Click again on your page (or drag out the desired size). 3DPlus launches with a blank scene window.
	Insert Calendar Click to create a colorful calendar. Click again on your page (or drag out the desired size). The built-in Calendar Wizard then helps you pick a design and define options for your calendar.
	Insert GraphicsPlus Object (Available if Serif GraphicsPlus installed) Click to create an "active" object. Click again on your page (or drag out the desired size). GraphicsPlus launches with a blank Edit Window.
	Line Click the button, then click and drag to draw a straight line on your page. • To constrain the angle of the line to 45-degree increments, hold down the Shift key as you drag.  Normally, the selected tool reverts to the Pointer after you draw a line. • To retain the Line tool after drawing a line, hold down the Shift key when you first click the button. Tip: To access Line properties, right-click on the object.  (See the How To topic Drawing a line.)
	Box Click the button, then click and drag to draw a box on your page. • To draw a square, hold down the Shift key as you drag.  Normally, the selected tool reverts to the Pointer after you draw a line. • To retain the Box tool after drawing a box, hold down the Shift key when you first click the button. Tip: To access Line and Fill properties, right-click on the object.  (See the How To topic Drawing a box.)
	Shape Click to display a flyout menu (as shown) of special shapes. Tooltips over each icon indicate the name of the shape. Click to select a shape, then click and drag to draw the shape on your page.
	• To draw a constrained shape (a circle, for example), hold down the Shift key as you drag.  Normally, the selected tool reverts to the Pointer after you draw a line. • To retain the Shape tool after drawing an shape, hold down the Shift key when you first click the button. Tip: To access an object's Line and Fill properties, right-click on the object.  (See the How To topic Drawing other shapes.)
	Hotspot (Web Publishing mode only) Click to define a transparent hyperlink region on a Web page. Hotspots on top of text and graphics act like "buttons" that respond when clicked in a Web browser. Click and drag with the tool to draw a rectangular hotspot region. The Hyperlinks dialog appears, prompting you to enter the URL or other target for the hotspot. • You can edit rectangular hotspots into freeform shapes. To create an extra node, click anywhere along the hotspot's edge. To change the shape of the edge, click and drag a node.  (See the How To topic Adding hotspots to a page.)


 HintLine toolbar
To hide/show toolbars: Right-click any tool region.

	Previous Page Click to view the previous page in your publication. Double-click to view the first page. Shortcut: Press the Page Up key.
	Current Page box Displays the current page number and the total number of pages in the publication. Click to switch between page and master page levels. Double-click to add or remove pages using the Pages dialog.
	Next Page  Click to view the next page in your publication. Double-click to view the last page. Shortcut: Press the Page Down key.
	Zoom Out Click to view more of the page in the window. Each click decreases the current zoom percentage by about two-thirds. Shortcut: Right-click an object and choose Zoom Out.
	Current Zoom box Displays the current zoom percentage, with 100% representing an actual-size page. Click to display a dialog that lets you type in any zoom percentage up to 800%.
	Zoom In  Click to view the page area more closely. Each click increases the current zoom percentage by about half. Shortcut: Right-click an object and choose Zoom In.
	Zoom Tool Click the button, then drag out a rectangular marquee on the page to define a region to zoom in to. The zoom percentage adjusts accordingly, fitting the designated region into the window. To zoom out, hold down the Shift key when dragging. Double-click the button to display the page at actual size (100%).
	Panning Click to enter Pan mode, indicated by a hand cursor. In Pan mode, you can click anywhere on the page and drag to reposition the page in the window... a convenient alternative to separate horizontal and vertical scroll buttons!
	Actual Size Click to display the page at a zoom percentage of 100%.
	Fit Page Click to adjust the zoom percentage so the entire page area is displayed in the window.
	Facing Pages (Paper Publishing mode only) Click to switch the window between single page view (one page at a time) and facing page view (two pages, side by side). This doesn’t affect the zoom percentage.
	Print Preview Click to change the screen view to display the layout without frames, guides, rulers, and other screen items. (Special options such as tiled output or crop marks are not displayed.) Same as menu command File/Print Preview.
	Snapping Click to turn the snapping feature on and off. When the button is down, snapping is on, and objects you move or resize will jump to align with the nearest visible grid dot or guide line. When the button is up, snapping is off. Double-click to display the Layout tab of the Tools/Options dialog, which lets you set the visible guide features. Same as menu command Arrange/Snapping.  (See the How To topic Snapping.)
	ChangeBar Click to hide/show the ChangeBar, which includes a variety of convenient controls for fine-tuning object position and orientation. When the button is down, the ChangeBar is shown; when it is up, the ChangeBar is hidden.
	Studio  Click to hide/show the Studio. When the button is down, the Studio is shown; when it is up, the Studio is hidden.
	HintLine Displays helpful, context-sensitive messages about PagePlus interface elements, as well as status information for selected operations.


 Studio
To hide/show toolbars: Right-click any tool region.

The Studio includes seven separate panels that provide a variety of elements for customizing your publication. In general, you can drag and drop items from the Studio into a publication (when no object is selected), or click a Studio item to apply it to the currently selected object. Procedures for each panel vary.

Click a panel button to jump to its subtopic below:

To hide or show the entire Studio:

•	Click the [image] Studio button on the HintLine toolbar.

To display a particular Studio panel:

•	Click its button on the right-hand Studio toolbar.

The [image]  panel lets you apply a color and/or shading to an object. To edit PagePlus colors, right-click any color cell and choose Color Manager.... For details, see How To topics in the section on "Working with Color and Transparency."

Scheme Colors
	The samples represent the five numbered colors (1-5) in the publication's color scheme (see the How To topic Using Color Schemes). As with paint-by-numbers, when you assign a color number to an object, the object takes on the corresponding color in the current scheme. For example, if the third color in the current scheme is blue, objects marked with "Scheme Color 3" will appear blue. To assign scheme color numbers to objects, click or drag samples just as described for Normal Colors (below).
	Normal Colors Displays the colors in the PagePlus palette (color table). The currently selected object's color is highlighted. Left-click any sample to apply that color to the selected object's line. Right-clicking a sample gives you a choice of applying to the selected object's line, fill, or both. Or drag from the sample to an unselected object. The first cell shows either [image] (Clear, for objects with line/fill properties), which gives the object a transparent interior; or [image] (Original, for pictures only) which resets the object to its original colors.
	Shades The shade is a tint of the current color between 100% (solid color) and 10% (faint). For example, if black is the current color, the samples shown are shades of gray.

The [image] panel displays a list of available color schemes (see the How To topic Using color schemes).

	The publication's current color scheme is highlighted. Left-click any scheme to apply it to the current layout. To add, modify, or delete a color scheme, right-click in the panel and choose Color Schemes... (or choose Color Manager... from the Tools menu and select the Color Schemes tab).

The [image] panel lets you change the style and font of existing text objects (see the How To topic Setting text properties). To change the default text to be used by new objects, select sample text and choose Update Object Default from the Format or right-click menu.

	Styles Displays available named styles. To change the style of the selected text object, click a new style name in the list. You can also drag and drop a style onto any text object.
	Fonts Displays available fonts. To change the font of the selected text object, click a new font name in the list. You can also drag and drop a font onto any text object.

The [image] panel lets you set the weight and type of lines and shapes (see the How To topic Drawing a line). To change the default properties to be used by new graphics, select a sample graphic and choose Update Object Default from the Format or right-click menu.

	Weights Displays the weight (thickness) of the selected object's line. To change the line weight, click a new sample in the list. You can also drag and drop a sample onto a line or shape.
	Types Displays the type of the selected object's line. To change the line type, click a new sample in the list. You can also drag and drop a sample onto a line or shape.

The [image] panel includes a wide variety of predesigned elements—graphics that you can customize and use as a starting point for your own designs. These include 3D Text, Adverts, Attention Grabbers, Backgrounds, Business Forms, Coupons, Logos, Mastheads, and more. (See the How To topic Using the Gallery.)

	Gallery Categories To choose a Gallery category, click its name in the drop-down list.
	Gallery Objects Displays the Gallery choices for the selected category. To use a Gallery object, drag it onto the page. Each object is a PagePlus group that you can move and/or resize. To edit its components, first click its Ungroup button. To edit the answer text of a Gallery object, use the Wizard panel (see below).

The [image] panel is a container for storing design objects (pictures, text blocks, and even unlinked text frames) you'd like to reuse in different publications. Once you've copied a design to your Portfolio, the design is available in any publication—simply open the Portfolio!

	The Portfolio has two parts: (1) an upper Categories group and  (2) a lower Designs group where you can drag items for storage. (To copy an item, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging.) Right-click to access functions for new categories, deleting designs, etc. For details, see the How To topic Portfolio.)

The [image] panel lets you revisit choices you made when creating a publication using a Page Wizard. You can customize the publication's answer text or its color scheme. (See the How To topic Customizing Page Wizard text.) The Wizard panel is also used for editing the answer text of Gallery objects (see above and Using the Gallery).

	Wizard Questions Lists the categories that you can customize, such as answer text and color schemes. To review or change a category, click its name. If the publication does not employ Page Wizard elements, you'll see [image].
	Edit Area This is where you make actual changes to the publication or gallery object. The "Color Scheme" selection list works just like the regular Color Schemes panel (see above). To change answer text, simply retype it and click somewhere else. Note: Normally, answer text you enter into question fields is instantly stored as User Details, so it will be available the next time you use a Page Wizard. For details, see the How To topic Inserting user details.


 ChangeBar
To hide/show toolbars: Right-click any tool region.

About the ChangeBar

The ChangeBar combines a host of controls for dynamically fine-tuning object placement and properties. It's a "floating" toolbar that sits on top of the work area and can be dragged to the most convenient location. To move the ChangeBar around, simply click and drag on its title bar.

To show the ChangeBar, click the [image] ChangeBar button on the HintLine toolbar, or right-click on any toolbar and choose ChangeBar. To hide the ChangeBar, click its [image] Close button or click the ChangeBar button again.

To collapse the ChangeBar, so it takes up less space but remains available, click its [image] Minimize button. Click the button again to restore full size.

To change an object property, select the object and alter the ChangeBar setting. There is no OK button—selected objects change "on the fly" as you adjust their properties.

To undo a change made with the ChangeBar, press Ctrl+Z or click the [image] Undo button on the Standard toolbar.

ChangeBar controls

The ChangeBar features three tabs: Size & Position, Sliders and Values. Click a tab to access its controls.

The [image] tab includes five controls.

To make adjustments, use any of these techniques:

•	Click the small up or down "nudge" buttons to adjust in increments; OR

•	Click in the text box, then press the up or down arrows on the keyboard to adjust values incrementally; OR

•	Type in an exact value and press the Enter key.

	Horizontal position Change the horizontal placement of the object's top left corner, with respect to the ruler's zero point. The higher the value, the further to the right.
	Vertical position  Change the vertical placement of the object's top left corner, with respect to the ruler's zero point. The higher the value, the lower on the page.
	Object width Move the object's right edge with respect to its left edge. The left edge stays the same.
	Object height  Move the object's bottom edge with respect to its top edge. The top edge stays the same.
	Object rotation Rotate the object's bottom right corner counter-clockwise around its top left corner.

The [image] and [image] tabs also include five controls. The two tabs give you different ways of controlling the same five properties.

On the Sliders tab, drag the slider bar from side to side to adjust values incrementally. Click a point on the slider to make the bar jump there.

On the Values tab, use any of these input techniques to specify exact values:

•	Click the down arrow on the combo-box to display a submenu, then click the property or value you want; OR

•	Click the small up or down "nudge" buttons to adjust values incrementally; OR

•	Click in the combo-box, then press the up or down arrows on the keyboard to adjust values incrementally; OR

•	Type in an exact value and press the Enter key.

When text or a text block is selected, you'll see these controls:

	PointSize Change the text point size.
	Width Change the text width.
	Letterspacing (tracking) Change the inter-letter spacing.
	Leading Change the leading, or distance from one text baseline to the next. The baseline is the line on which a line of text appears to sit.
	Advance Change the position of a character, or set of characters, in relation to their baseline. The change is measured in points and a negative value moves the selected text upwards.

When a text frame is selected, you'll see these controls:

	Columns  Change the number of columns in the frame.
	Previous Frame Click to display the previous frame in the story. Double-click to display the first frame.
	Next Frame  Click to display the next frame in the story. Double-click to display the last frame.
	AutoFit Click to scale the story's text size so it fits exactly into the available frames.
	Shrink Story Text Click to reduce the story's text size one increment. Double-click for a greater reduction.
	Enlarge Story Text Click to increase the story's text size one increment. Double-click for a bigger increase.

When a graphic is selected, you'll see these controls:

	Line Thickness Change the line weight or thickness.
	Line Type Change the line type.
	Corner Radii Define the radius (in points) of the corner arcs of a rectangle.
	Picture Color Change or recolor the picture.
	Picture Shade Change the shade (tint) of the picture.


Page and pasteboard

Most of the PagePlus display is taken up by a page or "artwork" area and a surrounding "pasteboard" area. This arrangement is an electronic equivalent of the system used by traditional graphic designers. They kept design tools and bits of text and graphics on a large pasteboard, and then carefully pasted final arrangements of text and graphics onto a page-sized "artwork" sheet pinned down in the middle of the board.

The page area is where you put page layout guides, and of course the text, graphics and pictures that you want to print. The pasteboard area is where you generally keep the ChangeBar, and any text, graphics or pictures that are being prepared or waiting to be positioned on the page area.

As the pasteboard is shared by all pages, it's useful for copying objects between pages. Simply drag an object onto the pasteboard, change pages, and drag it from the pasteboard onto the new page. An object must be entirely on the pasteboard—not overlapping the page—for it to be stored on the pasteboard rather than the current page.

The maximum page size that PagePlus can handle is 44" x 44". In reality, you're likely to be limited to a far smaller size due to the capabilities of your desktop printer.

When printing, anything which overlaps your page is printed, while anything entirely on the pasteboard is not. Objects which partially overlap the page, known as "bleeds," will be printed in entirety. Only if the size of the desktop printer's page is insufficient will they be cropped.


Rulers

The PagePlus rulers mimic the paste-up artist's T-square, and serve several purposes:

•	To act as a measuring tool

•	To create ruler guides for aligning and snapping

•	To define the dot grid, and (indirectly) the snap grid

Ruler units

To select the basic measurement unit used by the rulers, choose Options from the Tools menu and click the General tab. You can select independent measurement units for the horizontal and vertical rulers. In Paper Publishing mode, the default unit is inches; in Web Publishing mode, the default is pixels.

The actual interval size of the ruler marks depends on the current zoom percentage. In zoomed-out view, for example at 50%, there's more distance between ruler marks than when zoomed-in to 150%. To handle work where you want finer control or smaller snapping increments, click a zoom button to magnify the page.

Moving rulers

By default, the horizontal ruler lies along the top of the PagePlus window and the vertical ruler along the left edge. The default ruler intersection is the top left corner of the pasteboard area. The default zero point (marked as 0 on each ruler) is the top left corner of the page area.

To move either ruler to a different position, click and drag on the ruler intersection.

Double-click on the ruler intersection to make the rulers' zero point jump to the top left-hand corner of the currently selected object. This comes in handy for measuring page objects. If the rulers have already been moved, double-clicking on the intersection will send the rulers back to the default position.

To lock the rulers and prevent them from being moved, right-click a ruler and choose Lock Rulers. If the ruler intersection is grayed, the rulers are currently locked.

Normally, when you move the rulers their zero point changes too. To keep the zero point unchanged, hold down the Shift key when you drag. To reset the zero point to match the current ruler intersection, click on the intersection.

Rulers as a measuring tool

The most obvious role for Rulers is as a measuring tool. As you move the mouse pointer, small arrows along each ruler display the current horizontal and vertical cursor position. When you click to select an object, white ruler indents indicate the object's edges.

Creating ruler guides

PagePlus lets you to set up horizontal and vertical ruler guides—non-printing, red lines you can use to align headlines, pictures, and other layout elements.

To create a ruler guide, simply click on a ruler. The red ruler guide line appears.

To move a guide, click and drag it—it will follow the current cursor position.

To remove a guide, drag and drop it anywhere outside the page area.

To lock ruler guides, right-click a ruler and choose Lock Ruler Guides.

To delete all ruler guides at once, right-click a ruler and choose Delete Ruler Guides (or choose Page Margins & Columns... from the File menu and check the "Delete Ruler Guides" box).

Snapping

When the snapping feature is turned on, objects you create, move, or resize will jump to align with nearby, visible ruler guides. To prevent objects from snapping to ruler guides, hide the guides by unchecking Guide Lines on the View menu.

Note: Unchecking Guide Lines to hide the ruler guides also hides the page margin and column guides.

See Also:

•	QuickTour, Positioning Objects

•	QuickTour, Precision Layout

•	Aligning objects

•	Snapping


Dot grid

The dot grid is a matrix of dots, based on ruler increments, covering the page and pasteboard areas. It's especially useful as an alignment and snapping aid.

To turn the dot grid on and off:

•	Check (or uncheck) Dot Grid on the View menu.

OR

•	Double-click the [image] Snapping button (or choose Options... from the Tools menu and click the Layout tab). Check or uncheck Dot Grid.

The dots in the grid are spaced according to ruler marks, for example every 2 marks or every 4 marks. You can specify the interval.

To change the grid interval:

•	Double-click the Snapping button (or choose Options... from the Tools menu and click the Layout tab). Enter a value in the "Grid dots every <n> ruler marks" box.

Note: Keep in mind that the dot grid is not absolute, but relative to ruler marks. At higher zoom percentage (magnification), there's less distance between ruler marks, and hence between dots. So, for finer control, with a tighter grid, you can click a zoom button to magnify the page view.

Snapping

When the snapping feature is turned on, objects you create, move, or resize will jump to align with nearby, visible grid dots. To prevent objects from snapping to dots, hide the dot grid by unchecking Dot Grid on the View menu.

See Also:

•	QuickTour, Positioning Objects

•	QuickTour, Precision Layout


Page Columns and Margins
Page margins and columns (Paper Publishing mode only)

Page margins and page columns are visual guide lines that help you position layout elements. Page margin settings are fundamental to your layout, and usually are among the first choices you'll make after starting a Paper publication from scratch. (You won't see page margin guides in Web publications, which don't have margin settings.) The page margins are shown as a dark magenta box which is actually four guide lines—for top, bottom, left, and right—indicating the underlying page margin settings. If you like, you can set the margins to match your current printer settings.

In Paper Publishing mode, you also have the option of setting up page column guides as an underlying layout aid. PagePlus represents page columns on the page area with dashed dark magenta guide lines. If you want page columns of uneven width, simply drag on the column guides to reposition them as required.

To define page margins and columns:

•	Choose Page Margins & Columns... from the File menu.

OR

•	Right-click on a blank part of the page and choose Page Margins & Columns....

The dialog box lets you set page column width and the gap between columns. You can set the left, right, top, and bottom margins individually, or click the From Printer button to derive the page margin settings from the current printer settings. The dialog also provides options for balanced margins (left matching right, top matching bottom) or for two master pages with mirrored margins.

To show or hide page margin and column guides:

•	Check or uncheck Guide Lines on the View menu.

OR

•	Right-click on a blank part of the page and choose Display, then check or uncheck Guide Lines.

This setting also affects any ruler guides you've placed on the page area.

Note: Unlike frame margins and columns (see next topic), page margins and columns don't control where frame text flows. Rather, they serve as visual aids that help you match the frame layout to the desired column layout. Usually the frame column width is the same as the underlying page column, but sometimes (for example in six-column or seven-column grids) the frame column will take up two, or even three, of the page columns.

Snapping

When the snapping feature is turned on, objects you create, move, or resize will jump to align with nearby, visible page columns and margin guides. To prevent objects from snapping to page column and margin guides, hide the guides by unchecking Guide Lines on the View menu.

Note: Unchecking Guide Lines to hide the page guides also hides any ruler guides you've created.


Frame Columns and Margins
Frame margins and columns

Text frames always have at least one column. Usually, but not always, multiple columns have margins separating them from one another and from the edges of the frame itself. Unlike page margins and columns (see previous topic), which are merely visual guides, frame columns control the actual flow of text within the frame. To define frame column and margin settings after a frame has been created, choose Frame Setup... from the Format menu.

PagePlus represents frame margins and columns on the page area with blue guide lines when the frame is selected, and with gray guide lines when it's not selected.

Snapping

When the snapping feature is turned on, objects you create, move, or resize will jump to align with nearby, visible frame columns and margin guides. To prevent objects from snapping to frame column and margin guides, hide the guides by unchecking Frames on the View menu. Hiding the frame guides has no effect on the frames themselves, or on their text.


WritePlus: Basic File/Edit commands

	Cut Click to delete the selected text and place a copy on the Windows Clipboard.  Tip: You can also press Ctrl+X.
	Copy Click to copy the selected text to the Windows Clipboard.  Tip: You can also press Ctrl+C.
	Paste Click to paste text from the Windows Clipboard at the cursor position.  Tip: You can also press Ctrl+V.
	Select All Click to select all text in the Text Entry window.  Tip: You can also press Ctrl+A or double-click the Stylenames window.
	Undo Click to undo the most recent change.  Tip: You can also press Ctrl+Z.


WritePlus: Using proofing tools

	Find & Replace Click to display a dialog that lets you search text for words or parts of words. You can search all stories, or just the story containing the currently selected text frame, block, or region. When the target text is found, WritePlus displays it and the Replace options become available. Find & Replace continues until no more occurrences are found, or you click Close. Note: There is no Undo for Replace operations. Note: When using the All Stories option, changes to the current story are automatically saved when WritePlus continues to the next story.
	Spell Check Starts the Spelling Checker Wizard to check the spelling of a single word, selected text, a single story, or all stories in your publication. To check a specific region of text, first drag to select the text region. To check all text past a certain point, first click to insert a blinking cursor at that point. Then click the Spell Check button. (See the How To topic Spell-checking.
	AutoSpell Click to turn AutoSpell on or off. When AutoSpell is on, possible problem words in your story text are displayed in red. Use the Spell Check button (see above) or right-click on a word for alternative spellings.
	Proof Reader Runs The Proof Reader Wizard, which checks for grammar and readability errors in selected text, a single story, or all stories in your publication. To check a specific region of text, first drag to select the text region. To check all text past a certain point, first click to insert a blinking cursor at that point. Then click the Proof Reader button.
	Thesaurus Displays the Thesaurus, which lets you find synonyms, definitions, and variations of words in your publication text. To look up a specific word in a story, drag to highlight it before clicking the Thesaurus button. (See the How To topic Using the thesaurus.
	AutoCorrect Click to display the AutoCorrect dialog, which lets you build a list of letter combinations (often those easily mis-keyed, like "teh" for "the") and substitutions to be applied automatically as you type. You can add incorrect/correct pairs to the list by typing them in and clicking Add. To delete a pair, select it in the list and click Delete. Check/uncheck the box to turn AutoCorrect on and off.  AutoCorrect also lets you type shortcuts for recurring, longer expressions: for example, "myco" for "My Company's Full Name, Inc."
	Word Count Click to change the title of a story or view its word count and character count.
	Mark Index Click to display the Mark Index Entry dialog, to insert index entry marks. (See the How To topic Creating an index.


WritePlus: Entering text

WritePlus is not a substitute for a full-blown, WYSIWYG word processor, but it excels at handling story text. Even when a story is distributed over many linked frames on multiple pages, WritePlus lets you work with the story as a whole. It includes a variety of tools to promote effective editing of your publication's text (see the previous topic).

The WritePlus workspace consists of two windows: the Stylenames window on the left and the Text Entry window on the right. For the maximum text display area, click the WritePlus window's Maximize button and hide the Stylenames window by clicking the Hide Stylenames button.

The Text Entry window displays a story's component text blocks separately, with the named style of each block shown in red in the Stylenames window.

To select a single text block:

•	Click its style name in the Stylenames window.

To select the entire text of the story:

•	Double-click on the Stylenames window.

To create a new text block:

•	Click in the text and press Enter. This will allow a different named style to be applied to each block.

To insert a soft return (for a new line i.e. "paragraph"  within the same text block):

•	Click in the text and press Ctrl+Enter. (Note that this differs from editing on the page in PagePlus. See the How To topic Inserting a new line.)


WritePlus: Formatting text

WritePlus lets you change basic text properties and create and apply named styles. WritePlus opens in Draft Mode, which doesn't display formatting variations. You can quickly switch to Layout Mode to view text with formatting applied.

To switch between Draft Mode and Layout Mode:

•	Click the [image] Draft/Layout Mode button at the lower left.

Text properties

To review text properties, see the How To topic Setting text properties.

Use the basic controls on the Formatting toolbar to change the text font and size or apply a font style to selected text.

Note: Blue text between angled brackets is field text. <Company address>, for example, is probably an "answer text" field in a Page Wizard publication. Other examples might include date or time fields, or MailMerge fields. You can't alter the actual text of a field using WritePlus, but you can select a field and change its formatting or style properties as described here.

Named styles

To review named styles, see the How To topic Text styles.

WritePlus lets you apply a named text style to a paragraph, multiple paragraphs, or an entire story. Again, its main advantage over page-level editing in PagePlus is its ability to handle complete stories.

The Styles box displays the named style of the currently selected text block—in other words, the name shown next to the block in the Stylenames window.

To apply a named style from the Styles box to a text block:

1	Click in the text, or select the text block by clicking its name in the Stylenames window.

2	Click the down arrow on the Styles box and select the style name in the drop-down list.

Text in the text block takes on the properties of the named style.

To define a new style using the properties of the selected text (or text block):

•	Type a style name into the Styles box and press Enter.

The new style is defined with the properties of the selected text.

Note: PagePlus includes several style-control features that WritePlus lacks. For example, Update Text Style from the PagePlus Format menu lets you update a named style using the properties of a selected text block, and the Text Style Palette provides an overview of all the styles used in the publication.


WritePlus: Setting display options

	Show/Hide Stylenames Click to show or hide the Stylenames window (to the left of the Text Entry window). When visible, the Stylenames window shows you the named style of each text block. (Default: Shown) To select a text block: • Click its style name in the Stylenames window. To select the entire story: • Double-click the Stylenames window.
	Show/Hide special characters Click to show or hide special characters in the story text, such as spaces, tabs, paragraph marks, and index marks. (Default: Hidden)
	Draft/Layout mode Click to switch between the two modes. In Layout mode, the Text Entry window shows font and point size variations applied to the text. (Default: Draft mode)


WritePlus: Updating PagePlus

To exit WritePlus and update the story in PagePlus:

•	Click the [image] Accept button. This closes WritePlus and accepts changes.

If you close the WritePlus window using Alt+F4 or the window's Close button, you'll be prompted to update PagePlus.

To exit WritePlus without updating PagePlus:

•	Click the [image] Cancel button. This closes WritePlus and abandons changes.


LogoPlus: Entering and editing text

LogoPlus builds up a design using layers. When LogoPlus starts, it automatically creates a single text layer, ready for you to type into.

To create a new text layer:

Click the [image] Add Text button.

To enter or edit text in a layer:

1	Click the layer's tab to select the layer.

2	Type into the Text Entry window.

To undo text changes while the cursor is still in the Text Entry window:

•	Click the window's [image] Cancel button.

To accept changes to the text layer:

•	Click anywhere in the Preview window (just below the Text Entry window).

OR

•	Click the [image] Accept button.


LogoPlus: Previewing your design

The Preview window displays both individual layers and the composite (final) image.

The dotted, magenta rectangle shows the actual area which will be displayed when the object is put back into PagePlus. Anything outside this dotted box will get "clipped."

LogoPlus builds up a design using layers. Each item you create (using the buttons in the Create panel) occupies a single layer, and each layer has a corresponding tab to the left of the Preview window.

To work on a particular layer:

•	Click the layer's tab.

To zoom in on a specific area:

•	Drag out a region in the Preview window.

OR

•	Double-click the Preview window to display a dialog that lets you enter a specific value for the zoom view.

OR

•	To fit the design in the window, click the dialog's Auto button.

When you're working on a particular layer, other layers appear dimmed in the Preview window.

To de-select all layers and fully display the design:

•	Click the Preview window's [image] Update tab.

To accept changes to the text layer:

•	Click anywhere in the Preview window. The working text layer remains selected.


LogoPlus: Creating and manipulating layers

Click one of the Create panel's buttons to establish a new object on a new layer. At the same time, a new tab appears on the tab bar.

The original size of your design was specified by the area that you dragged out when starting LogoPlus. Click the [image] Size button to change the size of your design.

You can tell from the tab positions whether one layer is behind, or in front of, another. Each new layer is initially in front of the others.

To reorder layers:

•	Drag individual layer tabs up or down.

To delete a layer:

•	Click the layer's tab to select the layer, then press the Delete key.

To cut, copy, and paste a layer using the Clipboard:

•	Select the layer, then click the Cut, Copy, or Paste button.


LogoPlus: Modifying layers

The Modify panel is the heart of LogoPlus. Its appearance depends on what kind of object occupies the selected layer. Size/position/rotation controls are available for every kind of object. Special attribute controls are also available for text, polygons and starbursts. To switch between the two sets of controls, click the button at the upper left of the Modify panel.

To learn what individual buttons do, check their ToolTips and HintLine messages. (HintLine messages end with ">>" if double-clicking that button displays additional options.) So click, double-click, and have fun!

Size/position/rotation controls

The leftmost Rotation button turns rotation off. The rightmost button is a "custom" button that applies the value currently entered in the box next to it. All the other Rotation buttons apply preset values.

Text attribute controls

The Text Effect buttons mold the text into a wide variety of baseline, curve, and envelope styles. Click for a preset style; double-click any button to display the Edit Outline dialog, which lets you customize the style.

Starburst attribute controls

The rightmost button in each row is a "custom" button that applies the value currently entered in the box next to it. All the other buttons apply preset values.

Polygon attribute controls

The rightmost button applies the value currently entered in the box; all others apply preset values.


LogoPlus: Editing shadows and lines

The Edit panel lets you set the line thickness and shadow options for the selected item.

The leftmost button in each row turns the effect off.

The rightmost Line Thickness button applies the value currently entered in the box; all others apply preset values.

Double-click the Shadow buttons for Edit dialogs that let you customize the effect.


LogoPlus: Applying color

The three Color panels let you control the [image] line, [image] fill, and [image] shadow color of any object.

Double-click any color to display the Edit Color dialog, which lets you set patterns, shades, and custom colors.


LogoPlus: Updating PagePlus

To exit LogoPlus and insert the current design into PagePlus:

•	Click the [image] Accept button. This closes LogoPlus and accepts changes.

If you close the LogoPlus window using Alt+F4 or the window's Close button, you'll be prompted to update PagePlus.

To exit LogoPlus without updating PagePlus:

•	Click the [image] Cancel button. This closes LogoPlus and abandons changes.


TablePlus: Creating tables

To launch TablePlus and create a new table:

1	Click the [image] Insert Table button on the Tools toolbar.

2	Click again on your page, or drag out to indicate the desired size of the TablePlus object.
TablePlus launches with the Create New Table dialog (see below), which lets you preview various table templates.

3	Set options for your new table:
Table Format: A list of the QuickFormat styles. These let you create tables effortlessly, letting TablePlus do most of the layout work. (For a plain table, click OK without choosing any format—or choose the Default format.)
Sample: An example of how tables look with the current format.
Table Size: Lets you set the number of columns and rows in your new table.

To edit an existing table:

•	Double-click the table to launch TablePlus.


TablePlus: Entering text

To start entering text:

•	Click on a cell to select it.

OR

•	Click in the Text Entry window above the worksheet and type your text.

Anything you type will be entered immediately into the currently selected cell as new text. To undo text changes while the cursor is still in the Text Entry window, click the [image] Cancel button or press the Escape key.

To edit existing text:

•	Click in the Text Entry window.

OR

•	Press F2.

Normally, TablePlus wraps entered text to fit in the cell. If a word is too wide to fit in the cell, TablePlus displays the text as red asterisks (*). To display the text normally, make the cell wider (see "Resizing" in the next topic).

Types of text

TablePlus treats text in three ways: as numbers, formulas and ordinary text.

•	Numbers: TablePlus can format numbers in special ways. See the Visual Reference topic Formatting numbers .

•	Formulas: TablePlus will treat any text entry beginning with a hash (#) or equals symbol (=) as a formula. Formulas can be formatted the same as numbers. See also the Visual Reference topic Inserting formulas .

•	Ordinary text: Any other text entry. To force a text entry to be treated by TablePlus as ordinary text, start the entry with a single quote (') character. (The quote will not be displayed.)

You can use all the normal Windows editing keys, including cut and paste from the clipboard (the best way to import a long text string). To enter a return (for a new line), press Ctrl + Enter. See also "Importing from other applications" (below).

Note: When working in the Text Entry box, use Ctrl+X to Cut, Ctrl+C to Copy, and Ctrl+V to Paste. These Clipboard commands only affect text, and only in the current cell. The Cut, Copy and Paste buttons in TablePlus are for operations involving cells and ranges of cells.

Special characters

To insert a special character in a standard font, use the keyboard shortcuts shown in the How To subtopic Character shortcuts.

QuickFill and QuickClear

QuickFill is a feature that lets you quickly enter a standard sequence of numbers or entries, for example the months of the year, the days of the week, or any arithmetic progression. You can also use QuickFill to replicate one cell's contents over a range of cells, or use QuickClear to clear a range of cells. For details, see the Visual Reference topic Using QuickFill and QuickClear.

Importing from other applications

You can import and export tab-delimited text or Metafiles from and to other applications just by copying and pasting.

•	To paste into multiple cells in TablePlus, use the [image] Paste button.

•	To paste into another application, use Edit/Paste for the text format or Edit/Paste Special... for the picture format.


TablePlus: Previewing your table

The Preview window shows you what your table will look like. It consists of two parts: the worksheet, a collection of cells; and cell labels.

This is cell A1 (Column A, Row 1) with its labels:

To select a cell:

•	Click on the cell.

Clicking in another cell enters the text into the currently selected cell, and moves you to the new selected cell.

To select multiple cells:

•	Drag out a range of cells or hold down the Shift key and click..

To select a whole row or column:

•	Click on its row label (at left) or column label (at top).

To select the whole table:

•	Click on the top-left button to the left of the A label.

To move between cells:

•	Press Tab to move to the cell in the next column. Press Shift+Tab to move to the cell in the previous column.

OR

•	Use the keyboard arrow keys.

If you have a range of cells selected, then the movement is confined within that range.

Resizing

To resize columns, use the column labels at the top of the worksheet. For example, to change the width of the first column, position the mouse over the line separating the A and B column labels. The mouse cursor will change into a double-headed arrow. Drag to make the column wider or narrower. The current width appears in the box to the left of the X-button. Any text will be rewrapped to fit the new cell widths. If necessary, the cells will get taller or shorter automatically. To adjust several columns to the same size, select them all and resize any one of them.

You can adjust the depth of cells in the same way, using the row numbers. However, this is not needed so often. TablePlus works out the cell depth automatically by looking at the size of the text inside it, and does the work for you.


TablePlus: Changing the zoom view

Being able to change zoom is especially useful if you have a large table. You can alternate between a zoomed-out view which shows the whole table and a zoomed-in one for fine, close-up work.

To change the zoom view, click one of the Zoom buttons:

	Zoom Out Click to view more of the page in the window.
	Zoom In  Click to view the page area more closely.
	Actual Size Click to display the page at a zoom percentage of 100%.
	Auto Zoom Click to fit the table in the window.
	Custom Zoom Click to view at 50%. Double-click to display the Edit Zoom dialog, where you can select a zoom percentage from the list or type in a custom value.


TablePlus: Inserting formulas

A cell can display the result of a formula combining values of other cells with arithmetic operators and functions. Formulas are recalculated whenever values in the table change, so they're always up to date.

To display a cell's formula for editing in the Text Entry window:

•	Click to select the cell containing the formula.

To enter a formula:

•	Click the [image] Equals button.

OR

•	Start the entry in the text edit window with an equals sign (=).

Either action makes TablePlus switch to formula mode. A calculator appears for entering formulas.

QuickSum

To quickly sum cells in a row or column:

•	Click the [image] QuickSum button.

QuickSum works by inserting formulas into cells, so the totals are recalculated when any of the cells change.

If you have a range of cells selected, TablePlus applies the following rules when you click on the Sum button:

It looks for columns which contain numbers but not in their last cell. If it finds any, it fills the last cell with the sum of the column.

If there are no blank cells at the bottom of the range, it looks at the right edge cells of the range. If there are rows which contain numbers and have a blank cell at the right, it sums the row and places the total in the blank cell.

If there are no numbers in the range, or no blank cells at its bottom or right edge, it displays an error message.

Blank cells are taken to have the value 0.

If you have only a single cell selected, TablePlus applies these rules when "guessing" a range of cells to be summed:

1	It looks above the selected cell for numbers, and selects those cells automatically.

2	If there are no numbers above the selected cell, then TablePlus looks left of the select cell for numbers, and selects those cells automatically.

3	After guessing a range of cells to be summed, TablePlus switches to formula mode and waits for you to click the OK button. If the range of cells selected is wrong, then drag out a new range of cells to be summed (see "Values" below).

Formulas

Formulas can be made up from any of the following:

•	Operators

•	Percentages

•	Values

•	Functions

Operators

TablePlus allows use of the +, -, * and / arithmetic operators. The usual order of evaluation is used, with multiplication and division being evaluated before addition and subtraction. For example:

4 + 3 * 2 = 10 not 14

Operators with equal order of evaluation are performed left to right. To override the default order, enclose portions of the formula in parentheses:

(4 + 3) * 2 = 14

Percentages

TablePlus understands percentages. TablePlus treats percentage calculations differently depending on the operator (+, -, * or /) used with percentage symbol (%). For example:

2000 + 10% = 2200 	Adds 10% to 2000.

2000 - 10% = 1800 	Subtracts 10% from 2000.

2000 * 10% = 200 	Returns 10% of 2000.

200 / 2000% = 10 	Returns the percentage 200 is of 2000.

Values

Values in formulas can be the following:

•	Numbers e.g. 1, 13, -89.5.

•	Single cell references, e.g. A3, B6, C12. (See "Cell references" below.)

•	Ranges of cells. These are specified by the starting cell followed by a colon, then the end cell. For example: A1:B5 specifies every cell between A1 and B5 inclusive.

The simplest way to enter cell references or ranges of cells is to click on a cell or drag out a range. Clicking on the column or row label selects the whole column or row respectively.

Functions

TablePlus has some built-in functions:

•	SUM - returns the sum of its arguments.

•	AVERAGE - returns the arithmetic mean of its arguments.

•	COUNT - counts how many numeric values are in its arguments.

•	SQRT - returns the square root of its argument.

You can use these on ranges of cells, so that =AVERAGE( A1:B2 ) returns the average of the four cells in top-left corner of the table.

Cell references

TablePlus formulas can refer to cells in two ways: relative reference or absolute reference.

Relative cell references are stored 'relative' to the cell containing the formula, not by the cell's actual position. By default, TablePlus inserts cell references in a formula as relative references.

For example, if you entered the formula =B1 + A1 in cell C1, then TablePlus internally stores this as "Sum the values in the two cells above this one." If you then copy the formula to C2, TablePlus will convert the formula to =B2 + A2.

Absolute references are useful if you wish to store a value in a cell that all formulas refer to. TablePlus formulas will always refer to absolutely referenced cells, rows and columns no matter where you move or copy the formula.

To make a row or column reference absolute:

•	Prefix the reference with a dollar symbol ($).

For example, you could store number of employees in cell A1, and then refer to it in a formula by $A$1. If you then copy this formula TablePlus will always refer to cell A1 in every formula.

Since TablePlus stores relative cell references by default, it is dangerous to move a cell containing a formula without also moving all the cells that it references. If you do not, then TablePlus will look for the values 'relative' to the cell's new position! You could prevent this from happening by declaring all the cell references in the formula as absolute—bearing in mind that you then would not be able to copy the formula.

Formula errors

When TablePlus can not understand a given formula, it returns an error in the cell containing the formula.

Width	This sets how wide each character is, as a proportion of the text size. The default setting is 100%, which gives normal, squarish characters.
#DIV/0!	Divide by Zero Error. Your calculation involves a divide by zero, e.g. A1/0, or A1/B1 if B1 has no number.
#VALUE!	Value Error. You have used a value which TablePlus was not expecting, e.g. providing a range of cells when a single cell is expected or vice-versa, or =A1:A2 instead of =SUM(A1:A2).
#CIRC!	Circular Reference Error. This cell refers to another cell which refers back to this one, in a loop.
#SYNTAX!	Syntax Error. You have entered a formula that TablePlus cannot interpret, e.g. =/-.
#NAME!	Name Error. You have used a function name that TablePlus does not know, e.g. =FRED(1).
#REF!	Reference Error. You have referenced a cell that does not exist. Usually a result of dragging or copying cells with relative references.
#N/A	Not Available Error. TablePlus does not have an available number. Usually because the formula refers to cell which contains an error.
Note: You can type in error codes explicitly if you want to, e.g. type #N/A if you're preparing a table and do not know all the values yet.


TablePlus: Using QuickFill and QuickClear

QuickFill is a feature that lets you quickly enter a standard sequence of numbers or entries, for example the months of the year, the days of the week, or any arithmetic progression. You can also use QuickFill to replicate one cell's contents over a range of cells, or use QuickClear to clear a range of cells.

The sequences that TablePlus knows about are:

•	January, February, March, ...

•	JANUARY, FEBRUARY, MARCH, ...

•	january, february, march, ...

•	Jan, Feb, Mar, ...

•	JAN, FEB, MAR, ...

•	jan, feb, mar, ...

•	Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, ...

•	MONDAY, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY, ...

•	monday, tuesday, wednesday, ...

•	Mon, Tue, Wed, ...

•	MON, TUE, WED, ...

•	mon, tue, wed, ...

•	a, b, c, ...

•	A, B, C, ...

•	Any arithmetic progression, that is, any series of numbers with a common difference.

To QuickFill a sequence of entries:

1	Type the first entry of the sequence into the starting cell.

2	Move the cursor to the selected cell's QuickFill handle.

3	Drag out the range of cells to be quickfilled.

If there are not enough entries in the QuickFill sequence, then TablePlus wraps back to the beginning value in the sequence.

For numerical sequences, if the starting selection contains two or more cells, QuickFill uses the difference between them as the common difference. For example, if the first two cells contain the numbers 10 and 20, then the 'quickfilled' sequence would be: 10, 20, 30, ... If only a single number is specified, then the common difference between the numbers will be 1.

Similarly, for non-numerical sequences, you can specify a step between any entries, for example, enter "January" in the first cell, "March" in the second. QuickFill will place every other month in the sequence: "January, March, May, July, ..."

You can type phrases including known sequences, and QuickFill will fill the sequence, along with the other words. For example, type "Week 1" and QuickFill would give you the sequence "Week 1, Week 2, Week 3, ..." or "Jan Sales" would give: "Jan Sales, Feb Sales, Mar Sales, ..."

To replicate a cell's contents over a range of cells:

1	Click to select the cell whose contents you want to replicate.

2	Drag out the cell's QuickFill handle over the range you want to fill.

To QuickClear a range of cells:

1	Select the range to be cleared.

2	Drag the QuickFill handle upwards until no cells are specified.

Copying cell formatting

By default, QuickFill only affects the text, not the cell's formatting (font, color etc). To include the text formatting, hold down the Shift key while dragging.


TablePlus: Rearranging the table

You can use the Cut, Copy, and Paste buttons to rearrange the table, perhaps adding new rows or columns, without having to redo everything from scratch. You can cut and paste whole ranges of cells, complete with their formatting, or use drag-and-drop editing to rearrange content.

To edit the table using Cut/Copy/Paste:

1	Select the part of the table that to cut or copy to the Clipboard. To select a row or column, click its label.

2	Click either the Cut or Copy button.
Note: To copy the cell formatting as well as the cell contents, hold down the Shift key when clicking Cut or Copy.

3	Click in the table where you want to place the information, and click the Paste button.

When pasting a row or column, if you select a cell, TablePlus inserts the row or column before the selected cell. If you select the whole row or column via its label, TablePlus will overwrite the selected range of cells.

Drag-and-drop editing

TablePlus supports drag-and-drop editing of cell contents.

To move or copy the contents of one or more cells:

•	Click to select the cell(s).

•	Move the mouse cursor to the edge of the cell(s). The mouse cursor will change to an arrow.

•	Click and drag to the new cell and release the mouse button to move the selected contents into the new cell.

•	To copy the contents, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging.

By default, TablePlus only copies cell contents, not the formatting associated with the cell(s).

•	To move or copy cell formatting as well as contents, hold down the Shift key while dragging.


TablePlus: Formatting text

Using the standard text formatting buttons, you can change the text font and size, apply styles, set alignment, or rotate text by 90° or a user-defined angle.

To rotate text by a user-defined angle:

•	Double-click the [image] Custom Angle button. The Rotate Text dialog appears.

For additional text formatting options:

•	Double-click any of the alignment buttons. The Edit Text Format dialog appears.

Additional options in the Edit Text Format dialog include:

Width	Sets how wide each character is, as a proportion of the text size. The default setting is 100%, which gives normal, squarish characters.
Word space	Sets how wide the spaces between words are, as a percentage of the text size. The default setting is 100%. This field is ignored if the alignment is set to justified.
Letter space	Used to add/subtract space to/from each character. The default is zero. Negative values make the text look bunched up tight; positive values make it looser. The units are percentages of the text size.
Leading	Sets the vertical spacing between lines, as a percentage of the text size. The default value is 120%.
Border X, Border Y	Control the distance between the edges of the cells and the text inside the cell.
Alignment	Controls how the text is placed vertically in the cells: either at the top, in the center, or on the bottom of the cell.


TablePlus: Formatting numbers

Using the standard number formatting buttons, you can vary how numbers are displayed. Number formats let you add commas and currency signs to numbers, express numbers as percents, control how many decimal places are displayed, etc. Number formats do not alter numbers internally; only alter the way numbers are displayed.

For additional number formatting options:

•	Double-click any of the number formatting buttons. The Edit Number Format dialog appears.

Additional options in the Edit Number Format dialog include:

Format Codes	The currently available formats. Some codes are supplied with TablePlus, others are taken from the 'International' settings of Windows, and you can define custom codes of your own (see below).
Delete	Removes custom codes from the list. Disabled when TablePlus codes are selected.
Code	The currently selected code. You can edit existing codes here or type in a new custom code.
Samples	Shows samples of various numbers in the selected format.
Custom Formats

You can create your own number formats by combining TablePlus symbols. Here is what the various symbols mean:

#	Display a digit if the number has one. If there are more digits in the number than #'s specified, then the extra digits left of the decimal place separator will be displayed.
0	Always displays a digit. If a number does not have a digit in this position then a zero (0) is displayed. If there are more digits in the number than 0's specified, then the extra digits left of the decimal place separator will be displayed.
-	Display a negative symbol if the number is negative. No symbol is displayed if the number is positive.
+	Display a positive symbol if the number is positive, or a negative symbol if the number is negative.
(code)	Display the formatted number in parentheses if the number is negative.
[color]	Display a negative number in the specified color, e.g. RED.
$	Display a currency symbol with the number. The currency symbol can be placed before or after the number.
.	Decimal separator
%	Display fractions as percentages, e.g. 0.4 as 40%
/	Display decimal places as fractions, e.g. 0.4 as 2/5.
0	Display no decimal places, e.g. 0.4 as 0
0.0	Display one decimal place, e.g. 0.4 as 0.4
0.00	Displays two decimal places, e.g. 0.4 as 0.40
0.	Automatically calculate the number of decimal places to be displayed, e.g. 0.4 as 0.4
e	Display number as an exponential (or scientific format), e.g. 0.4 as 4e-01.
TablePlus is not strict about the order in which the format codes are specified, and tries to interpret whatever you type. For example, if you want a negative number to be displayed in a color, you can specify this at the beginning or end of the code—TablePlus still understands what you mean.

As you can see, there are many options to explore. Try looking at the example formats, and experiment with your own. One way to do this is to create your own series of numbers of different lengths and with varying decimal places, then apply the formats to these.

Entering values in different units

In TablePlus, some of the controls can take values in more than one unit. The default units are taken from your Windows International settings. If you have specified Metric, the values will be in centimeters; if English, they will be in inches.

To enter values in other units, enter the value required followed by the abbreviation for the unit:

"i" or "in"	inches
cm"	centimeters
"mm"	millimeters
"p"	points
"pp"	picas
"d"	didots
"cd"	ciceros
For example, when using the text size control to set the point size, enter "1in" in the control to set the point size to 72 points.

If you have entered a value in a control that cannot be converted to a equivalent unit, TablePlus ignores the unit abbreviation and takes that value in the control's default units. For example, if you enter "30p" in a control that is expecting degree units, then TablePlus will ignore the "p" and treat the value as 30 degrees.


TablePlus: Using QuickFormats

QuickFormats apply a style to your table, letting you easily change the appearance of entire tables. Click the QuickFormat Table button to bring up a dialog with a list of known formats, and a small sample table so that you can see what they do.

In the dialog, click the Options button to reveal more buttons that control which parts of your table the style will affect. Check or uncheck options until the preview looks the way you want it.

Lines	Line style and weight, line position, and the color of lines.
Alignment	Text alignment - left, right, centered, or justified.
Font	Fonts, with bold, italic, underline, and stikethrough styles, and text size.
Number	Number formats, number of decimal places, and so on.
Width/Height	Formats the table with cells the width and height as in the sample table.
Color	Apply color to the cells and text; does not affect line color.


TablePlus: Setting grid lines

Vertical and horizontal lines help separate the columns and rows visually. Lines in TablePlus run along the edges of cells. You can apply lines to groups of cells with a single action, for example to draw a box around the whole table. You can control the line styles, widths, and colors.

Before you apply a line, select both the cells you want to affect and which edges of those cells.

To set grid lines:

1	Select the cells you want to change.

2	Click one of the Edge buttons to select which edges you want to change: left, top, right, or bottom—or double-click the [image] Outer Edges button for a submenu that lets you chose from other combinations.

3	Click one of the Line Style buttons to apply a grid line style: no line, dotted line, hair line, double line, or thick line.

To apply a grid line with a specific thickness:

1	Select the cells and edges to change.

2	Double-click the Thick Line button.

3	In the dialog, specify the line weight in points.

To delete all the grid lines in a table:

1	Drag to select the whole table.

2	Double-click the Outer Edges button and choose the first button in the submenu to select all edges.

3	Click the first Line Style button (Hide Lines).

You can also change the color of grid lines. See the Visual Reference topic Applying color.


TablePlus: Joining cells

Sometimes—as with headlines, for example—you need to spread text across several cells. To do so, join the cells.

To join cells:

1	Select the cells you want to merge.

2	Click the [image] Join Cells button.

The text in the cell in the top-left corner of the selection will then cover all the cells. If the other cells have text of their own, it's hidden, and you are prevented from entering new text in them.

To unjoin cells:

1	Select the joined cells.

2	Click the [image] Separate Joined Cells button.

TablePlus sometimes forces cells to separate, to ensure all cell areas are rectangular.

Note: TablePlus cannot split a cell in half directly, but you can achieve a similar effect by using two columns and joining all pairs of cells except the ones you want split.


TablePlus: Changing table size

You can add or remove rows and columns, or change the total table width and height.

To change table size:

1	Click the [image] Resize table... button. A dialog appears showing the average cell width and the total width of the table.

2	Edit the width values, if desired.

For example, you may want a table which exactly fits a given page size. If you change the values for an existing table, all the columns will be scaled in proportion. The text size won't change, so the text will rewrap, possibly changing the total depth of the table.

You can also add or remove individual rows and columns using Clipboard (cut/copy/paste) operations. For details, see the Visual Reference topic Rearranging the table.

You can change the width of individual rows and columns using the mouse. See the Visual Reference topic Previewing your table.


TablePlus: Applying color

Using the Color buttons, you can change the color of text, cell backgrounds, or grid lines.

To apply color:

•	Select the part of the table you wish to change. Use the Edge buttons to select grid lines (see Setting grid lines ).

•	Locate the row of Color buttons for the part you clicked:

 buttons for text

 buttons for cell backgrounds

 buttons for grid lines

The five Color buttons in each row show the last five effects you applied.

•	Click one of the Color buttons to apply the color to the selected parts.

OR

•	Double-click any Color button to display the Edit Color dialog to apply a custom color effect.

Custom color effects

The Edit Color dialog includes a variety of custom effects:

Color	Selects a color from the palette. Double-clicking on a color automatically selects Edit for that color. The color [clear] is transparent and allows the background to be seen.
New	Click to define a new color using the Custom Color Selector.
Edit	Edits the selected color via a standard Windows color dialog.
Delete	Deletes the selected color.
Tint	Sets the tint (shade). The default is 100%, which produces the full color from the palette. The lower the tint, the less intense the color.
Pattern	Fills the button with hatched lines or some other effect (not available for Text color).
Sample	Shows the current color.


TablePlus: Updating PagePlus

To load the current table into PagePlus:

•	Click the [image] Accept button. This closes TablePlus and accepts changes.

If you close the TablePlus window using Alt+F4 or the window's Close button, you'll be prompted to update PagePlus.

In addition to updating PagePlus (the client program), Accept puts a copy of your document onto the Windows clipboard, as a metafile and as an OLE object. Most DTP programs will allow you to insert the object using a menu entry typically labeled Edit/Paste.

To exit TablePlus without updating PagePlus:

•	Click the [image] Cancel button. This closes TablePlus and abandons changes.


How To... Menu
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Start, Save and Close Publications
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

Creating a publication using a Page Wizard

Starting a new publication from scratch

Opening an existing publication

Working with more than one publication

Switching between Paper Publishing and Web Publishing modes

Saving your publication

Closing PagePlus

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Set Up Pages and Backgrounds
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

Setting publication dimensions

Setting page margins and columns

Setting master pages and display mode

Using headers and footers

Using page numbering

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS View and Turn Pages
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

Changing views

Viewing master pages

Turning pages

Adding and removing pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Work with Text
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

Customizing Page Wizard text

Importing text from a file

Understanding frame text (flowing text)

Understanding free text

Editing text on the page

Editing text with WritePlus

Moving text blocks

Creating headlines

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Format Characters and Paragraphs
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

Setting text properties

Using templates and text styles

Adjusting letterspacing and kerning

Fitting text to frames

Wrapping text around objects

Creating a bulleted or numbered list

Creating background boxes and rules

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Use Special Character Options
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

Inserting a symbol

Inserting date/time

Inserting user details

Viewing and changing document Information

Using hyphenation

Inserting a new line (soft return)

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Use Advanced Text Features
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

Using mail merge

Creating a table of contents

Creating an index

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

Drawing a line

Drawing a box

Drawing other shapes

Drawing a shape with LogoPlus

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Import Pictures and Objects
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

Importing paint- and draw-type graphics

Using the Gallery

Importing PhotoCD images

Importing TWAIN images

Inserting objects from other Serif applications

Using LogoPlus to insert a layered graphic

Using TablePlus to insert a table

Inserting a calendar

Using the Portfolio

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Select, Copy, Move, and Resize
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

Selecting an object

Selecting multiple objects

Copying and pasting objects

Moving objects

Resizing objects

Locking an object's size or position

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Arrange Objects
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

Layering objects

Aligning objects

Snapping

Converting an object to a picture

Exporting as a picture

Creating groups

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Rotate and Crop Objects
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

Rotating an object

Flipping an object

Cropping an object

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

Getting started in Web mode

Web page layout fundamentals

Hyperlinking an object

Adding hotspots to a page

Choosing Web site colors

Choosing Web page titles

Viewing the links in your publication

Setting Web picture display options

Adding animation effects

Adding sound and video

Adding Java applets

Adding HTML

Adding search engine descriptors

Setting service provider options

Optimizing your Web site

Publishing a Web site to a local folder

Previewing your Web site in a browser

Publishing to the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Check Your Work
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

Spell-checking

Automatic proofreading

Using the thesaurus

Checking fonts and resources used

Optimizing pictures for printing

Reviewing text content with the Text Manager

Automatic layout checking

Previewing the printed page

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Print Your Publication
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

Basic printing

Printing special formats

Printing color separations

Generating professional output

Saving printer schemes

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Work with Color
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

Applying colors and transparency

Using color schemes

Creating your own colors

Changing or copying image colors

Specifying PANTONE® colors

Printing in color

 Enhance Ease-of-use


SBS Enhance Ease-of-use
Step by Step: How to...

 Start, Save, and Close Publications

 Set Up Pages and Backgrounds

 View and Turn Pages

 Work with Text

 Format Characters and Paragraphs

 Use Special Character Options

 Use Advanced Text Features

 Draw Boxes, Lines and Shapes

 Import Pictures and Objects

 Select, Copy, Move, and Resize Objects

 Arrange Objects

 Rotate and Crop Objects

 Prepare a Publication for the World Wide Web

 Check Your Work

 Print Your Publication

 Work with Color and Transparency

 Enhance Ease-of-use

Setting units

Updating and saving defaults

Setting PagePlus options

Using shortcuts

Using right-click menus

Using PageHints


Troubleshooting and support

Troubleshooting a problem

Don't panic! Remember that all technical problems, no matter how bizarre they may seem, have a cause and a solution. By patiently applying a logical approach, you can often identify the source of the problem and fix it yourself. In general, try simplifying your PC's setup until the problem is no longer present. Then, incrementally restore the original setup, testing to see which component makes the problem recur. Be careful!

Initially, try to establish:

•	Is the problem most likely arising within PagePlus?

•	Is it a Windows problem?

•	Or is it a "hardware" problem having to do with your PC or its peripherals?

•	Have you made any recent changes to your system configuration that might be responsible for the problem?

If it's a PagePlus issue, perhaps there's a procedure you need to know more about. Check online Help for information on the specific task you're trying to accomplish.

For Windows or hardware issues, click the Start button and choose Help for troubleshooting information—or check the specific manuals for the peripheral.

Printing problems with Windows are generally caused by using an incorrect or outdated printer driver, or a third-party printer driver. Make sure that you use the Windows printer driver designed specifically for your printer. To check printer drivers, click Start, choose Settings > Printers.

Contacting Serif technical support

Our support mission is to provide fast, friendly technical advice and support from a team of on-call experts. Serif customers are entitled to free, unlimited phone support for the first 30 days following receipt of the product. After that time, pricing policies (per-call or per-year) go into effect.

You can reach our main Web support page at http://www.serif.com/support.aspTechnical support is provided by telephone and e-mail, as well as through FAQs and forums on our Web site (see below).

Europe Technical Support	(0115) 914 9090
	(0845) 345 6770     [Local rate, UK only]
	e-mail: support@serif.co.uk
USA Technical Support	(603) 886-6642
	e-mail: support@serif.com
International Technical Support	+44 (115) 914 9090
Please do not fax technical support queries.

Additional Serif contact information

World Wide Web:

Serif Web Site	http://www.serif.com
Support	http://www.serif.com/support.asp
Frequently Asked Questions	http://www.serif.com/faq.asp
Forums	http://www.serif.com/forums.asp
Serif Newsgroups	news://news.serif.com

Main office (UK, Europe):

The Software Centre, PO Box 2000, Nottingham, NG11 7GW, UK

Main	(0115) 914 2000
Registration	(0800) 376 1989
Sales	(0800) 376 7070
Customer Service	(0115) 914 9090
	(0845) 345 6770     [Local rate, UK only]
General Fax	(0115) 914 2020

American office (US, Canada):

The Software Center, 13 Hampshire Drive, Unit 12, Hudson NH 03051, USA

Main	(603) 889-8650
Registration	(800) 794-6876
Sales	(800) 55-SERIF or 557-3743
Customer Service	(800) 489-6720
General Fax	(603) 889-1127
Sales Fax	(603) 886-4919

International enquiries

Please contact our main or European office as appropriate.


Creating a publication using a Page Wizard

The first time you launch PagePlus, you'll see the Startup Wizard, with a menu of five choices. The first of these is Use a Page Wizard. Note that this option will only be available to you if you've installed the PagePlus 6.0 Design CD. (For more details about the Design CD, contact Serif.)

Page Wizards are built-in design assistants that speed you through the process of creating professional publications. Whether you're just beginning to work with PagePlus—or an old hand exploring new design possibilities—put Page Wizards to work for you!

To create a Page Wizard publication:

1	Launch PagePlus, or choose New... from the File menu. You'll see the Startup Wizard, with a menu of five choices.

2	Click Use a Page Wizard, select a publication category on the left, and examine the samples on the right. Click the sample that's closest to what you want, then click Next.

The Wizard now leads you through a series of steps that let you see the publication being assembled.

3	Make your design and content selections (color scheme, basic text, and so on) from the panel on the right. Click Next to proceed to the next step, or Back to revisit a previous choice. You can always revise the design later on (see below).

4	When you reach the final screen, click Finish.

PagePlus lets you revisit the initial choices incorporated in your Page Wizard publication, and make new choices if you wish. Using the Studio's Wizard panel, you can:

•	Apply different color schemes to the publication, and alter the individual colors in any given scheme, so you emerge with exactly the desired effect. See the topic Using color schemes.

•	Review and/or alter any of the answer text in the publication—the text you entered in response to the original Page Wizard questions. See the topic Customizing Page Wizard text.

For an illustrated overview of ways you can continue to develop Page Wizard publications, see the QuickTour Finishing Your Publication.


Starting a new publication from scratch

The first time you launch PagePlus, you'll see the Startup Wizard, with a menu of five choices. The second choice is Start from Scratch.

To start a new publication from scratch using the Startup Wizard:

1	Click Start from Scratch.

2	Select a publication type on the left and examine the samples on the right. Click the one that's closest to what you want.
OR
To define a custom page size, click the Custom Page Setup... button. Select a publication type.
• For Regular publications, click in the page size list to specify page dimensions and select either "Wide" or "Tall" as the page orientation.
• For other publications, choose a group: Small (for example, business cards), Large (banners or posters), or Folded (booklets). Click in the publication list to preview available choices. To define a new custom publication, click New... and use the dialog to enter the new publication's name and attributes.

3	When you're done, click Finish.

The new publication opens with a blank page.

To start a new publication during your PagePlus session:

1	Choose New... from the File menu.
OR
Click the [image] New button on the Standard toolbar.

1	If the Startup Wizard is turned on, follow steps 1 to 3 above.

2	If the Startup Wizard is turned off, a new publication opens with a blank page, using default settings.

To turn off the Startup Wizard:

•	Choose Options from the Tools menu, click the Ease of Use tab, and uncheck Startup Wizard.

Note: You'll have to turn the Startup Wizard back on to be able to access Page Wizards.

See Also:

•	QuickTour, Introducing PagePlus 6


Open an existing Publication
Opening an existing publication

The first time you launch PagePlus, you'll see the Startup Wizard, with a menu of five choices. The third choice is Open a Publication.

To open an existing publication from the Startup Wizard:

1	Select the Open a Publication option and click Next. You'll see a list of recent PagePlus publications (if any), with samples on the right.

2	Click a file name or sample, then click Finish.
OR
Click Browse to locate a different file. In the Open dialog, select the folder and file name and click the Open button.

The publication opens to the first page.

To open an existing publication during your PagePlus session:

1	Choose Open... from the File menu.

OR
Click the [image] Open button on the Standard toolbar.

2	In the Open dialog, select the folder and file name and click the Open button.

Note: To restore the saved version of the current file, abandoning any unsaved changes, choose Revert from the File menu. Opening a file that is already open has the same effect.

Open dialog options

The Open dialog has two options for intermediate to advanced users.

In the Files of type list, you can select either PagePlus publication (*.PPP) files or template (*.PPX) files. Files saved in the usual way use the .PPP extension. For details on working with template files, see Using templates and text styles.

Check the Open as Untitled box if you want a saved file to open as Untitled—for example, if you're about to create a new publication from an old one and want to leave the old one intact. This is the default option for template files.

See Also:

•	QuickTour, Introducing PagePlus 6


Working with more than one publication

PagePlus provides a multiple-document interface that lets you open more than one publication at a time. Each window has its own pasteboard, rulers, scrollbars, and option settings. As you switch from one window to another, menus update to reflect Paper Publishing mode or Web Publishing mode (see next topic). You can drag and drop objects between publication windows.

The Window menu lets you arrange the open document windows in various ways:

•	Click Cascade to arrange the windows as overlapping tiles.

•	Click Tile Horizontally to arrange the windows as horizontal, non-overlapping tiles. This is a useful mode when you need to make side-by-side comparisons of two tall (portrait aspect) publications.

•	Click Tile Vertically to arrange the windows as vertical, non-overlapping tiles. Choose this mode to compare wide (landscape aspect) publications.

•	Click Arrange Icons to arrange any minimized windows along the bottom of the workspace.

The Window menu also lists the names of open publication windows, with the current window checked. You can click a window's name, or use Alt+W plus the window's number on the menu, to switch  into another window.


Switching between Paper Publishing and Web Publishing modes

Paper Publishing mode is the familiar PagePlus environment for creating print publications. Web Publishing mode includes special features, such as menu items and custom settings, to facilitate creation of World Wide Web pages.

•	If you're just getting started with Web publishing using PagePlus, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Creating a Web Site. Continue with Getting started in Web mode.

To turn an existing PagePlus (paper) publication into a World Wide Web site:

•	Open the publication in Paper Publishing mode and choose Switch to Web Publishing from the File menu.

•	You'll be prompted to save your document (if it's unsaved).

•	You'll also have the option of running the Layout Checker. It's a good idea to run the Layout Checker prior to entering Web Publishing mode: you'll find out which text or objects might cause problems on a Web page.

The publication opens as an Untitled document in Web Publishing mode.


Saving your publication

You can save files either in the standard PagePlus format (the default) or as compressed files which occupy considerably less space. (Note that compressed files will take somewhat longer to open.)

To save your work:

•	To save the publication under its current name, choose Save... from the File menu. Files you've saved as compressed will be compressed on subsequent saves unless you use Save As... and change the Compress setting.

OR

•	Click the [image] Save button on the Standard toolbar.

OR

•	To save under a different name, change compression status, or if the publication is still Untitled, choose Save As... from the File menu. Check (or uncheck) Compress to change this setting.


Closing PagePlus

To close PagePlus:

•	Choose Exit from the File menu.

You'll be prompted to save changes made since the last save.


Setting publication dimensions

A publication's page size and orientation settings are fundamental to your layout, and are defined when the new publication is first created, either using a Page Wizard or as a "Start from Scratch" choice via File/New... and the Startup Wizard. If the Startup Wizard is turned off, or you cancel the setup dialog, a new publication defaults to Letter size (US) or A4 (Europe).

For an illustrated introduction to setting up pages from scratch, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Setting Up Publications.

You can adjust the dimensions of a publication at any time—but as a rule, make changes before you've gone too far with laying out page elements!

To adjust the dimensions of the current publication:

1	Choose Page Setup... from the File menu.

2	For Regular publications, you can select a paper size and enter values for page width and height, as well as setting the orientation (wide or tall). For other publication categories, you can select from the given publication types or define a custom publication by clicking New....

3	Click OK to accept the new dimensions. The updated settings will be applied to the current publication.


Setting page columns and margins
Setting page margins and columns (Paper Publishing mode only)

Page margins and page columns are visual guide lines that help you position layout elements in Paper Publishing mode. They're represented on the page area by dark magenta guide lines. Page margins (usually defined early in the design stage of a publication) are solid lines at the top, bottom, left, and right, while page column guides (optional) are dashed lines.

These guide lines don't actually control the flow of text. Rather, they serve as an underlying layout aid to assist you in positioning frames and other objects.

To set up page column guides or adjust the page margins (Paper Publishing mode only):

•	Choose Page Margins & Columns... from the File menu.

OR

•	Right-click on a blank part of the page and choose Page Margins & Columns....

The dialog box lets you set page column width and the gap between columns. You can set the left, right, top, and bottom margins individually, or click the From Printer button to derive the page margin settings from the current printer settings. The dialog also provides options for balanced margins (left matching right, top matching bottom) or for two master pages with mirrored margins (see next topic).

To show or hide page margin and column guides:

•	Check or uncheck Guide Lines on the View menu.

OR

•	Right-click on a blank part of the page and choose Display, then check or uncheck Guide Lines.

This setting also affects any ruler guides you've placed on the page area.

See Also:

•	QuickTour, Setting Up Publications

•	QuickTour, Positioning Objects

•	QuickTour, Precision Layout

•	Understanding frame text (flowing text)


Setting master pages and display mode

The master page is the background of your publication, where you can place objects you'd like to appear on every page—such as headers and footers, page numbers, or a border design. Every publication has a master page level.  You may not want master page objects to appear on a particular page (for example, a page number on a "new chapter" page).

For an illustrated introduction to master pages, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Setting Up Publications.

To hide master page objects:

•	Uncheck Master Page Objects on the View menu.

Two master pages with mirrored margins are useful if your publication will use left and right pages. "Mirrored margins" means that the "left" margin setting becomes the "inside," and the "right" margin becomes the "outside."

To set up two master pages:

•	Choose Page Margins & Columns... from the File menu and check the box for "Two master pages with mirrored margins."

See Also:

For further details, see the How To topic Viewing master pages.

Display Mode: Single Page vs. Facing Page View

In Paper Publishing mode, you can set up your publication so that the PagePlus window displays either one page at a time (which provides more pasteboard area), or two facing pages side by side. You'll need Facing Page mode if you're creating a publication with double-page spreads, where a headline or other element needs to spread from the left-hand page to the right-hand page. Facing Page mode can also be useful when working on any document where you need to see both the left- and right-hand page, even if no elements need to span both pages.

To switch between Single Page and Facing Page display (Paper Publishing mode only):

•	Check (or uncheck) Facing Pages on the View menu.

OR

•	Click the Facing Pages button on the HintLine toolbar.

Switching the view doesn’t affect the current zoom percentage.

Note: The more pages there are in your publication, the longer it will take to convert from one mode to the other. For this reason, it's best to choose a display mode early on in the design process.


Using headers and footers
Using headers and footers (Paper Publishing mode only)

Headers and footers are layout elements that go at the top and bottom (respectively) of your master page(s), and are repeated on every page of your publication.

To create headers and/or footers, with the option of including page numbers:

•	Choose Headers & Footers... from the Insert menu.

To edit existing headers and footers, or create more complex master page elements:

•	Switch to the master page layer by clicking the Current Page box on the HintLine toolbar (or to simply edit them, you can rerun the Wizard).


Using page numbering

Page number fields automatically display the current page number. Typically, page number fields are used on the master page(s) so they will appear on every page, but you can insert a page number field anywhere in your text.

To define a header or footer that includes page number fields (Paper Publishing mode only):

•	Choose Headers & Footers... from the Insert menu.

To insert a page number field anywhere on a page :

1	Switch to the master page layer (if desired) by clicking the Current Page box on the HintLine toolbar.

2	Click the [image] Text tool button on the Tools toolbar to obtain the I-beam cursor.

3	Click on the page where you want to position the page number field.

4	Choose Page Number from the Insert menu.

To display a dialog that lets you change the page numbering style used in your publication:

•	Choose Page Number Format... from the Format menu.

You can select from standard numbering schemes such as Arabic numerals (1, 2, 3...) or Upper Roman (I, II, III...). You can also specify the starting page number in the sequence. For example, Chapter Two of a long publication might be in a separate file and begin numbering with page 33.


Changing views

The HintLine toolbar at the bottom of the screen includes a number of buttons to let you zoom in and out to view and/or edit the page at different levels of detail.

To review the various page viewing options:

See the Visual Reference topic Hintline toolbar.


Viewing master pages

The master page is the background of your publication; objects on the master page appear on every page. Every publication has a master page level. For an illustrated introduction to master pages, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Setting Up Publications.

To edit objects on the master page(s):

•	Switch to the master page level by clicking the Current Page box on the HintLine toolbar. Click again to return to the page level.

OR

•	Choose Go to Master Page from the View menu. Choose Leave Master Page to return to the page level.


Turning pages

To go to an adjacent page:

•	Click the Previous (left arrow) or Next (right arrow) button on the HintLine toolbar.

To go to a specific page:

•	Right-click the page or pasteboard and choose Page Manager....

OR

•	Double-click the Page Number box at the left of the HintLine toolbar.

OR

•	Choose Page... from the Insert menu.

The Page Manager appears. Type the page number to go to and click OK.

To go to the first page:

•	Double-click the Previous button.

To go to the last page:

•	Double-click the Next button.


Adding and removing pages

To add or remove a page:

•	Right-click the page or pasteboard and choose Page Manager....

OR

•	Double-click the Page Number box at the left of the HintLine toolbar.

OR

•	Choose Page... from the Insert menu or Delete Page... from the Edit menu.

The Page Manager appears. Select Add page or Remove page. Set options for how many pages and where to add (or remove) pages, and click OK.


Customizing Page Wizard text

When you create a publication using a Page Wizard, any text you enter in the course of answering the Wizard's questions appears in the publication as answer text fields. Answer text, which you can easily edit with the Studio's Wizard panel, behaves quite differently from ordinary text—the kind you'd edit with the Text tool. If you don't use Page Wizards, you won't encounter answer text. If you do, however, your publications will generally include a mix of both varieties of text and you'll need to understand both methods of editing.

To learn about using the Text tool for ordinary text, see the topic Editing text on the page.

To customize Page Wizard text using the Studio's Wizard panel:

1	Click Wizard on the Studio toolbar.

2	In the upper Wizard Questions group, click a question category. Note that each category corresponds to one of the original Page Wizard steps.

3	In the lower group, review the answer text and retype as needed.

4	Click anywhere else to insert the changed information into the publication's answer text field(s).

Notes

•	There is no Undo for Wizard panel entries—simply retype the entry.

•	If you're using the Text tool to work with ordinary text in a publication that contains a mix of ordinary and answer text, you'll notice that you cannot select only part of an answer text field. As soon as you click answer text, the whole field highlights—a sure sign that you're not dealing with ordinary text! You can use the Text tool in this way to change the text's character or paragraph properties, or cut/copy/paste answer text fields within the document if necessary. However, if you retype over highlighted answer text, you'll effectively destroy the field. The new text you enter at that location will be ordinary text and can no longer be updated via the Wizard panel. To preserve answer text fields, use the steps shown above.

•	Many basic answer text items (such as name, address, etc.) are normally recorded as User Details to save you the trouble of re-entering them a second time. Via the Set User Details dialog, you can update the information in User Details or include a User Detail in any publication.


Importing text from a file

Importing text from a word-processor file is the traditional way to create text content for Desktop Publishing layouts (you can also type text on the page as "free text" or create a story using WritePlus). You use your current word processor (such as Microsoft Word) to create the text file for your publication. You can import several files into one publication. Each file, or "story," consists of a self-contained section of text like a single article in a newspaper, which flows in a sequence of linked text frames.

Note: Each story is a copy of the text file that you imported, which means that any changes you make in PagePlus only apply to the PagePlus story, not the original imported file. This means you cannot damage your word-processor files by importing them into PagePlus.

Tip: PagePlus will preserve the formatting of imported word-processor text. However, if you're using your word processor to create text specifically for PagePlus, you'll save time by typing as text only, and applying formatting later in PagePlus.

To import text:

1	Choose Text... from the Insert menu, or right-click a frame and choose Insert Text File.... The Import Text dialog appears.

2	Select the format of the source file to be imported and locate the file itself. (See below for details on setting the preferred text import format.)

3	Check the "Retain Format" box to retain the source file's formatting styles—that is, if you've defined and applied text styles (including font, point size, leading, or color) in the word processor, and want PagePlus to import and convert as much of this formatting as possible. Uncheck the box to discard this information. In either case, PagePlus will preserve basic character properties like italic, bold, and underline, and paragraph alignment (left, center, right).

4	Check the "Ignore Returns" box to ignore returns in the source text—that is, only if the file has been saved with a carriage return at the end of every line, and you want to strip off these extra returns. Otherwise, leave the box unchecked.

5	Click OK.

PagePlus will import the designated text into a text frame, either flowing text into a selected frame or creating a new frame.

If there is too much text to fit in one frame, PagePlus will offer you the AutoFlow option.

•	Choose Yes if you want to AutoFlow text—that is, automatically create text frames and pages until all the text has been imported. Choose No to store extra text in the frame's overflow area.

If the text doesn't fit exactly in the available frame area, PagePlus will offer you the AutoFit option.

•	Choose Yes to scale the story's text size (and other properties, if necessary) so it fits exactly into the available frames. Choose No to keep the text properties exactly as they are.

To change columns and margins in a newly created frame:

•	Select the frame and choose Frame Setup... from the Format menu.

Setting the preferred text import format

PagePlus supports direct text import from a number of major word processing applications, including Microsoft Word, Corel WordPerfect, and Lotus Word Pro. Direct import means that in order to import files of a particular format, the word processing application itself must be present on your machine. During installation, PagePlus checks for an installed word processor. You can change the preferred setting to any of the supported applications.

To designate the preferred text import format:

1	Choose Options... from the Tool menu.

2	On the General tab, select your preferred word processor in the "Import Text Using" drop-down list.

If you find that PagePlus does not list your word processor, or if text import from the designated application fails, choose the "Standard Converters" setting, which provides additional formats. If necessary, go back to your word processor and save your text file in a format that is supported. Try the following:

•	In a Windows word processor, save your file as RTF (Microsoft Rich Text Format) or as ANSI (plain text). Or use cut and paste instead.

•	In a DOS word processor, save your file as ASCII (plain text).

Word-processing conventions

Certain word-processing conventions can be problematic when files are converted for desktop publishing. Here are some points you should be aware of:

Double spaces at the start of a paragraph: Avoid typing multiple spaces. If you want a space (or "indent") at the start of a paragraph, choose Tabs and Indents... from the Format menu to specify the first line indent. This can also be saved as part of your text styles. Alternatively, you could type a tab character at the start of the paragraph.

Typing returns: When PagePlus imports text, it treats each carriage return as the end of a paragraph. Use returns only when you want a new paragraph, and don't insert returns at the end of every line in your word processor; let it wrap text instead. Avoid typing multiple returns to get space between paragraphs. It's better to specify values in the "Space above" and "Paragraph" options in the Format/Spacing... dialog. Again, these values can be saved as part of your style definitions.

Double hyphens for a dash: Typists often enter "--" (two hyphens) as a dash or separator between parts of a sentence. The typographic equivalent is an em dash. To insert this character, choose Symbol from the Insert menu and select Em Rule—or press Alt and then "0151" on the numeric keypad.

Inch marks as quotes: Most people use the inch mark as opening and closing quotes. Unless you're entering text in a typewriter-style font (such as Courier) you should use real quote marks. By default, PagePlus will automatically convert inch marks to quotes ("smart quotes"). You can change this setting by unchecking the "Smart quotes" box on the General tab of Tools/Options. For details, right-click the dialog check box.


Understanding frame text (flowing text)

This extended topic provides an introduction to text frames, plus the practical information you'll need to work with flowing text. To jump to a particular subtopic click its title below:

Frame text versus free text

What's a text frame?

Creating frames

Putting text into a frame

Frame setup and layout

How a story flows through a sequence of frames

Linking frames

Sizing frame text blocks

Frames as graphics

Frame text versus free text

PagePlus deals with all text as enclosed objects called text blocks which typically consist of a single paragraph of text. Text blocks can be either frame text or free text.

Frame text is placed in a text frame and is usually used for larger amounts of text ("stories") that you want to flow into columns and pages. Imported text is always brought on to the page as frame text.

Free text is placed directly on a page, and is generally used for small blocks of text used as headlines, captions, or decorative text. For details on free text, see Understanding free text.

You can type or paste text in as either free or frame text. You can drag any text block to become free or frame text as you prefer.

To decide between frame text and free text:

•	If you want PagePlus to automatically take care of flowing the text block into a layout, choose frame text.

•	If you want to take care of layout of the text block yourself, choose free text.

What's a text frame?

PagePlus provides text frames for flowing text. A text frame is effectively a mini-page, with:

•	Margins and column guides to control text flow

•	Preceding and following frames

•	Text that flows through the frame (from the previous frame and on to the next).

Typically, text frames are used for stories that continue from one page to another. You can create a publication with just one story, or with many independent frame sequences. By placing text frames anywhere, in any order, you can build up newspaper or newsletter style publications with many stories flowing from one page to another.

Text frames generally behave like all PagePlus objects, and you can select, resize, and move them. You can also use the Format/Line... and Format/Fill... options to change how they look. Of course, they can also contain text, referred to as "story" text. This means:

•	When you move a text frame, its story text moves with it.

•	When you resize a text frame, its story text reflows to the new dimensions.

The text frame margins and column guides turn blue when you select the frame. You can then drag on these guides to adjust the frame layout.

When selected, a text frame includes a Link button at the bottom right which allows you to import text files or control how the frame's story flows to following frames.

Creating frames

You add frames to a page just like any other object. PagePlus supports a wide variety of frame shapes. You can resize any frame, but cannot alter its basic shape.

To create a frame:

1	For a standard (rectangular) frame, click the [image]  Standard Frame button.
OR
For an irregular frame, click the [image] Shaped Frame button (its icon will display the most recently selected shape) and select a shape from the flyout submenu.

2	Drag over the page or pasteboard to indicate the frame's position and size.

By default, the Frame Wizard appears to help you set up the frame and begin entering text, using one of the options discussed below ("Putting text into a frame").

To turn off the Frame Wizard:

•	Choose Options... from the Tools menu, click the Ease of Use tab, and uncheck Frame Wizard.

Now, when you click a frame button, the Frame Wizard won't appear after you've dragged out the new frame.

Note: You can use the Update Object Default from the Format or right-click menu to set properties for future new frames you create. See Updating and saving defaults.

Putting text into a frame

You can put text into a frame in one of five ways:

1  WritePlus word processor:

•	Select a frame, then double-click on it, to start WritePlus.

This opens the PagePlus integrated word processor—useful for typing, formatting, and proofing large amounts of text. If the frame already contains text, it is automatically loaded into WritePlus for editing. (See Editing text with WritePlus.)

2  Importing text:

•	Select a frame, then double-click on its Link button, or choose Text File... from the Insert menu (or right-click on the frame) to import text. (If the frame already contains text, PagePlus lets you replace it, or append the new text file to it.)

If you want to create a simple document with just one story running from page to page, use Insert/Text File... with no frame selected. PagePlus automatically adds frames matching the underlying page layouts you've set up. The AutoFlow option can add pages as needed, until all your text has been imported, and the AutoFit option can adjust text size so that text fits into the available frames. (See Importing text from a file.)

3  Typing into the frame:

•	Select the Text tool, then click for an insertion point to type text straight into a frame, or edit existing text. (See Editing text on the page.)

4  Pasting via the Clipboard:

To paste copied text into an existing block:

•	Select the Text tool and click for an insertion point in the text, then press Ctrl+V.

To paste copied text as a new block:

•	Select the Pointer tool and click to select an existing text block, then press Ctrl+V. The pasted text will appear as a new block flowing immediately after the selected block.

5  Drag-and-drop:

•	Using the Pointer tool, drop a text block over a selected frame. The pasted text will appear as a new block flowing immediately after the selected block.

Frame setup and layout

The frame layout controls how text will flow in the frame. The frame can contain multiple columns, and the top and bottom of each frame (column blinds) can be adjusted to give varying column depths. The column widths, gutter (gap between columns), and the margins can also be adjusted to give varying column widths.

Using the Pointer tool with frames: You can select either the frame or text blocks within the frame. The very first click on a frame will select the frame. The next click selects the underlying text block. After that, if you click on a different text block, you'll select the other block; but if you click again on the same text block, you'll select the frame. Click slowly, with care not to double-click—that launches WritePlus!

To change the number of columns:

•	Select the frame with the Pointer tool, then select a new value using the Columns box on the Standard toolbar.

To change the frame layout:

•	Select the Pointer tool and right-click on the frame, then choose Frame Setup... to display the Frame Setup dialog.

OR

•	For visual adjustment, drag on the frame guides (columns, margins or column blinds) with the Pointer tool.

To navigate from frame to frame:

•	Display the ChangeBar, click the Sliders or Values tab, and click the Previous or Next buttons to jump to the adjacent frame in the sequence. Double-click to jump to the first or last frame, respectively.

How a story flows through a sequence of frames

You can have just one frame on its own, or you can have many frames. Frames can be connected in linked sequences.

The story associated with a given frame sequence flows through the first frame on to the next and keeps flowing into frames in the link sequence.

A key difference from a word processor is that PagePlus does not normally add or remove frames according to the amount of text. The text simply flows until the text runs out (and some frames are left empty), or the frames run out (and some text is left over).

If there is still more text to go after filling the last frame, PagePlus stores it in an invisible overflow area, remembering that it's part of the story text. If you later add more frames or reduce the size of text in a frame, the rest of the story text is flowed in.

If the text runs out before the last frame, you have some empty frames. These frames will be filled with text if you add more text to the story, or if you increase the size of the story text.

You can use the AutoFit function on the ChangeBar to scale a story's text size so it fits exactly into the available frames. See Fitting text to frames.

PagePlus keepts track of multiple linked frame sequences, and lets you flow several stories in the same publication. The Tools/Text Manager dialog provides an overview of all stories and lets you choose which one you want to edit.

Story and sequence information

When a frame is selected, the Frame Info box [image] on the Standard toolbar shows:

•	the type of frame (Standard, Oval, etc.)

•	the story title or file name of the frame's source text (the file last imported into the frame sequence),

•	the number of the selected frame, and

•	the total number of linked frames in the sequence.

If there is text in the overflow area, a plus sign (+) follows the file name (and also appears in the Link button of the final frame in the sequence). If no text file has been imported (i.e. the text was typed in, pasted in, or dragged in), the file name displays as "untitled". (You can change the title of your story using the Word Count button in WritePlus.)

Linking frames

For an illustrated introduction to linking frames, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Linking Text Frames.

There are two basic ways to set up a linked sequence of frames:

•	You can link a sequence of empty frames, then import the text.

OR

•	You can import the text into a single frame, then create and link additional frames into which the text automatically flows.

When you create a new frame, PagePlus automatically links it to the currently selected frame. So, when creating a new frame...

If you want the new frame linked to a previous frame: Select the previous frame before creating the new one.

If you want the new frame separate, not linked in a sequence: Make sure that no other frame is selected when creating the new one.

Note: When frames are created by the AutoFlow option when importing text, they are automatically linked in sequence.

To create a link or reorder the links between existing frames, you use the Link button which appears on the bottom right of a frame when it is selected. Remember to watch the cursor, which changes to indicate these operations...

To link the selected frame to another frame as the next frame:

•	Click on the frame's Link button, then click with the Textflow cursor on the frame to be linked to. Only empty frames are valid frames to link to.

To break the link from the selected frame to the next frame(s):

•	Click on the frame's Link button, then click with the Textflow cursor on a blank area of the page or pasteboard.

To unlink the selected frame from the current sequence (make it the first frame in a new sequence):

•	Click on the frame's Link button, then click with the Textflow cursor on the current frame. This makes it the first frame in a new sequence (and you'll need to import or create a new story).

If you click on the frame's Link button, and then change your mind, simply click on the Link button again to abandon any link changes.

Sizing frame text blocks

Frame text blocks automatically flow to the full width of the frame columns into which they pour. As you type into a frame text block, it expands downwards to fit the text you've typed. You can use the Pointer tool to fine-tune the flow of individual text blocks. Drag on the frame text block's handles for different effects...

•	Top middle handle: Drag to change the vertical start position of the block, for example to add space above. This is the visual way of adjusting the values in the Format/Spacing... dialog.

•	Any side handle: Drag inwards to change the left or right indents of the frame text block. Drag outwards to reset the indents to zero. The upper left handle changes the first line indent. This is the visual way of adjusting the values in the Format/Tabs & Indents... dialog.

•	Bottom middle handle: Drag to directly modify the leading (line spacing) of the block. This is the visual way of adjusting the Leading value shown on the ChangeBar.

Using the Pointer tool with text frames: You can select either the frame itself or text blocks within the frame. Keep the distinction in mind! The very first click on a frame will select the frame. The next click selects the underlying text block. After that, if you click on a different text block, you'll select the other block; but if you click again on the same text block, you'll select the frame. Click slowly, with care not to double-click—that launches WritePlus!

Part- and whole-frame text blocks

When a frame text block is broken over a column boundary, the original "whole" block is split into two or more temporary "part" blocks. Whenever text is reformatted, PagePlus puts part-blocks back together into their original whole state, then reflows and rebreaks as necessary.

Note: If you select a part-block, the controls for indents and leading may be disabled.

Frames as graphics

Frames have an associated box graphic, invisible by default—with a line of zero weight, and a clear fill. In the case of standard (rectangular) frames, you can edit these properties. You can wrap text around any type of frame.

To modify the graphic associated with a selected standard (rectangular) frame:

•	Select the frame with the Pointer tool, then choose Line... or Fill... from the Format menu. Use either dialog to adjust graphic properties.

OR

•	To apply a different line weight or type, select the frame and click a selection on the Studio's Lines panel.

To wrap text around a frame:

•	Select the frame with the Pointer tool, then choose Wrap Settings... from the Tools menu (or use the right-click menu) and select Wrap outside. This gives the frame a wrap outline, which will cause other text (for example, in an overlapping frame) to avoid the frame.


Understanding free text

Frame text versus free text

PagePlus deals with all text as rectangular objects called text blocks which typically consist of a single paragraph of text. Text blocks can be either frame text or free text.

Frame text is placed in a text frame and is usually used for larger amounts of text ("stories") that you want to flow into columns and pages. Imported text is always brought on to the page as frame text.

•	For details on frame text, see the previous topic.

Free text is placed directly on a page, and is generally used for small blocks of text used as headlines, captions, or decorative text.

You can type or paste text in as either free or frame text. You can drag any text block to become free or frame text as you prefer.

To decide between frame text and free text:

•	If you want PagePlus to automatically take care of flowing the text block into a layout, choose frame text.

•	If you want to take care of laying out the text block yourself, choose free text.

More about free text

PagePlus leaves free text blocks alone. You can manipulate free text blocks independently of any underlying layout or other text blocks, and you can resize, rotate, and crop them, and generally treat the text block as a graphical object.

You control the column width (or measure) of a new free text block by the way you create it.

To create a free text block:

•	Select the Text tool and click on a blank part of the page or pasteboard. A blinking cursor appears. The new text block uses the default column width.

To create a free text block with a specific width:

•	Select the Text tool and drag out a rectangle. A blinking cursor appears. The new text block's column width matches the width of the rectangle you dragged.

To type or edit text in a free text block:

•	Select the Text tool, click in the free text block, and start typing. As you type into a free text block, it expands downwards to fit the text you've typed.

To resize free text blocks:

With the Pointer tool selected, drag on the text block's handles for different effects...

•	Top handles: Drag to change the vertical start position of the block (like a move).

•	Side handles: Drag to change the column width (measure) for the free text block to wrap into.

•	Bottom middle handle: Drag to directly modify the leading (line spacing) of the block. This is the visual way of adjusting the Leading value shown on the ChangeBar.

To keep a text block as free text when using drag-and-drop editing:

•	Select the block, then choose Spacing... from the Format menu (or use right-click) and click the Options tab. Check the Keep as Free Text box in the dialog.

OR

•	Hold down the F4 key as you drop the text block.

For details on drag-and-drop editing, see Moving text blocks

Note: You can use Update Object Default from the Format or right-click menu to set properties for any new text you create. See Updating and saving defaults.


Editing text on the page

To review the basics of frame text and free text, see the How To topics Understanding frame text (flowing text) and Understanding free text.

Note: This topic pertains to "ordinary" text. To edit answer text stored as fields in a Page Wizard publication, use the Studio's Wizard panel (see the topic Customizing Page Wizard text.)

Once you have text on your page—whether it's frame text or free text—you can use the Text tool to edit it directly. For editing longer stories, and for more advanced options, choose WritePlus (see the next topic).

To edit text on the page:

•	Select the Text tool, then click or drag over the text object. A standard insertion point appears at the click position, or a range of text is selected, ready for the text to be edited. (If a range of text highlights instantly, or you can't click inside a range of text, you're probably dealing with "answer text"—see the note above.)

If you see a blinking insertion point, operations such as typing a character or pressing the Delete key affect the text at the insertion point. Other operations (e.g. changing text color) affect the whole text block.

If you've selected a range of text, operations such as typing, deleting, or changing text color affect the selected text. Other operations (e.g. applying a style) affect the whole text block.

If you see selection handles around a text block, it means the block is selected (but doesn't tell you which tool you're using). Block-level operations affect all the text in the selected block.

Note: When editing text on the page, pressing Enter to insert a carriage return starts a new paragraph within the same text block. To insert a "soft return" which breaks the line, but continues the paragraph, press Shift+Enter.

To create a new paragraph as a separate text block:

•	Click on a blank part of the page to create a free text block, then drag the new block into position in the desired frame.

OR

•	Double-click the text to launch WritePlus, where pressing Enter to insert a carriage return automatically defines a new text block.

For more help on editing text...

The following How To topics cover essential aspects of editing text on the page:

Moving text blocks

Setting text properties

Using templates and text styles


Editing text with WritePlus

WritePlus is the word processor built into PagePlus.

•	For an illustrated introduction to WritePlus, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Using WritePlus.

•	For tool tips and HintLine information, move the mouse over the various WritePlus elements.

•	For full details, consult the consult the Visual Reference section, WritePlus Text Editor, and the WritePlus topic sequence listed below.

About WritePlus

 WritePlus provides a fast, easy way to create, edit and proof text. It's designed to let you focus upon text content rather than presentation—what your text says rather than what it looks like. While not a true WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) environment, it provides a visual style display for keeping track of how the final text will appear.

For certain tasks, such as editing the full text of a story, it's much more convenient than editing text on the page. And for other tasks, such as marking index entries, it's essential! (See Creating an index .)

You'll find a full complement of writing and proofing tools directly available from the WritePlus toolbar, including:

•	Spell Checking

•	Thesaurus

•	Find and Replace

•	Word Count

Ways to launch WritePlus:

•	Double-click on any free text, frame text or text frame with the Pointer tool or Text tool. WritePlus opens with the selected text.

OR

•	Double-click on a blank area of the page or pasteboard area with the Text tool. WritePlus opens with a new free text window.

OR

•	When using the Frame Wizard to create a frame, select the Enter text in WritePlus option. WritePlus opens with a new story window.

OR

•	Choose Text Manager... from the Tools menu. Select a story or free text and click Display. WritePlus opens with the specified text.

OR

•	Find text using Find & Replace... from the Tools menu. WritePlus opens to the found text.

Normally, when you double-click on a frame text block, the entire story is loaded into WritePlus.

To load a single text block (not the whole story) into WritePlus:

•	Hold down the Ctrl key and double-click on the text block.

To update PagePlus text after editing in WritePlus:

•	In WritePlus, click the [image] Accept button.

WritePlus topic sequence

WritePlus help continues with the following Visual Reference topics:

1	Basic File/Edit commands

2	Using proofing tools

3	Entering text

4	Formatting text

5	Setting display options


Moving text blocks

A text block can be either frame text or free text, depending on where you drop it. To review the basics of frame text and free text, see the How To topics Understanding frame text (flowing text) and Understanding free text.

To move a text block using drag-and-drop:

•	Select the Pointer tool, click until the text block is selected, then hold the mouse button down and drag the text block to its new location. Release the mouse button.

As you move a text block around, the cursor changes to show what will happen if you drop the text block at that point:

	Flow Before	Flow After
The Flow Before and Flow After cursors mean that you are dragging a text block over a frame, and the block will be inserted in the frame as story text. PagePlus highlights the text block that the dragged block will be inserted before or after. Below, the Flow After cursor is displayed:

When you release the block, it is inserted into the frame's story text and then reflowed as needed.

Tip: To toggle the before/after action, hold down the F2 key as you drop the text block.

	Object Move
If PagePlus displays the general Object Move cursor, the text will not be inserted in story text (either because the block is not over a frame, or it has been set to "Keep as Free Text"). When you release the block, it drops exactly where you've put it as free text.

To keep a text block as free text:

•	Select the block, then choose Spacing... from the Format menu and click the Options tab. Check the Keep as Free Text box in the dialog.

OR

•	Hold down the F4 key as you drop the text block.

	Offset
If you simply move a block of frame text up or down a bit within the frame, without inserting it between different blocks, you'll see the Offset cursor. When you drop the block, you change the offset (gap) between it and whatever is above it:

•	If a column top margin is above the moved block, the top margin moves down to match the top of the block. Moving the block above the top margin has no effect.

•	If another frame text block is above the moved block, the moved block's "Space Above" setting changes. To reset the "Space Above" setting to zero, move the top of the block above the bottom of a preceding block.


Creating headlines

Typically, you create headline text as free text, by clicking with the Text tool and typing directly on the page. You can also double-click to start WritePlus and enter text there.

Format the various text elements using character formatting options (see Setting text properties) or by applying a named style (see Using templates and text styles).

As with any other PagePlus object, you can drag headline text to any position using the Pointer tool. Position your headline using the dot grid (or ruler guides you've placed), or simply do it by "eye."

You can also drag the text back into a frame so that it becomes part of the flowing text in a story. If you want to place a free text block over a frame, but don't want it to flow into the story (for example, with a pull-quote), keep the block as free text.

To keep a text block as free text:

•	Select the block, then choose Spacing... from the Format or right-click menu and click the Options tab. Check the Keep as Free Text box in the dialog.

OR

•	Hold down the F4 key as you drop the text block.


Setting text properties

PagePlus gives you a high degree of control over the fine points of typographic layout, whether you're working with characters or text blocks. To take full advantage of this control, you'll need to understand the basics of frame text and free text—see the How To topics Understanding frame text (flowing text) and Understanding free text. To review standard techniques for editing text, see the How To topics Editing text on the page and Editing text with WritePlus. If you're working in Web Publishing mode, you should note differences between HTML 3.2 and HTML 4.0.

Below, you'll find an at-a-glance table of most text properties you can control in PagePlus, with a brief description plus links to the specific tool(s) that adjust each property. Click the links to access the Visual Reference entries for the Format menu, Studio, Standard toolbar or ChangeBar. Also remember that in dialog boxes, you can right-click any control for context-sensitive help on that feature.

Property:	Options / Description:	Set using:
Type face (font)	Various TrueType fonts  Note: PagePlus includes over 400 TrueType fonts. You can install them from the Serif/Fonts folder of the Program CD, using the Control Panel/Fonts option from the Windows Start Menu.	Studio (Text panel)  Format/Character...  Standard toolbar
Font style	Regular, italic, bold, bold italic	Format/Character... Standard toolbar
Case	Normal, all caps, small caps	Format/Character...
Point size, width	Character dimensions	Format/Character... Standard toolbar ChangeBar
Pattern, color, shade	Various effects	Format/Character...
Effects	Strikethrough, underline, outline	Format/Character...
Slant	Intervals of 5 degrees	Format/Character...
Kerning	Spacing between one pair of characters (see Adjusting letterspacing and kerning)	Format/Kern
Paragraph alignment	Left, right, centered, justified	Standard toolbar Format/Spacing...
Space above/below	Offset between text block/paragraph and adjacent frame element(s)	Format/Spacing...
Letterspacing	Space between letters in a text block (see Adjusting letterspacing and kerning)	ChangeBar Format/Spacing...
Word spacing	Minimum, maximum, and optimum values for automatic word spacing in a text block	Format/Spacing...
Tabs & Indents	First-line, left and right indents, and tab position, alignment and tab leader types	Format/Tabs & Indents...
Bullets & Numbering	Paragraph bullet character, font, indent; numbering format, punctuation, indent (see Creating a Bulleted or numbered list)	Format/Bullets & Numbering...
Advance	Position of character(s) in relation to baseline (line on which text appears to sit)	ChangeBar
Leading	Distance from one text baseline to the next.	ChangeBar Format/Spacing...


Using templates and text styles

It's a good idea to establish the main text and graphic formatting to be used in your publication early in the creative process. PagePlus lets you save these instructions as named styles for later use. Once you've settled on a particular layout, you can save the layout as a template to be used as a basis for other publications.

Templates

You can save any PagePlus publication as a template (*.PPX) file. When opening a saved template file, PagePlus automatically opens an untitled copy, leaving the original template intact. Templates help ensure continuity between your publications by preserving starting setups for such elements as:

•	Page layout(s): A pre-designed, general-purpose grid, or a single- or multi-page solution for, say, a letter-size, 3-fold brochure or a corporate newsletter.

•	Content: Some content will be intended for the final publication (typically drawn graphics, column dividing rules or clipart samples). Other elements (the text and pictures) will be placeholders for you to replace.

•	Styles: A set of text styles appropriate to the elements in the template publication.

•	Color palette: A preferred palette of complementary colors.

To save a publication as a template:

•	Choose Save As... from the File menu. Under "Type," click to select the Template option. Enter a file name, leaving the .PPX extension intact, and click Save.

To open a template file:

1	Choose Open... from the File menu and select PagePlus Templates (*.PPX) in the "Files of type" box.

2	If you want to open the original template (wizard) file, uncheck the Open as Untitled option. To open an untitled copy, leave the box checked.

3	Click the Open button.

Text styles

For an illustrated introduction to text styles, take a few moments to view the QuickTour, Text Styles. (This help topic provides more advanced information than the QuickTour.)

If you've used a word processor, you're probably already familiar with the concept of a text style: a named set of attibutes that's applied to all the text in a text block. A block of text lacking a specific style is said to have [No Style], but typically there's an underlying, default style called Normal. In publications, it often makes sense to define named styles for particular layout elements—for example, Heading, Sidebar, or Body Text.

Don't confuse text styles, which are associated with text blocks, with character-level "font styles" such as bold or underline. Text styles often incorporate font styles, but can include many other properties as well.

The named style of the currently selected text appears in both:

	• the Styles box on the Standard toolbar and
	• the Styles group of the Studio's Text panel
Use either the Styles box or the Styles group to apply a particular style to existing text or to update an existing style. Use the Styles box to define a new style.

To apply a named style to a text block:

•	With no text block selected, drag the style name from the Studio's Text panel and drop it on the text block.

OR

1	Click in the text with the Text tool, or select the text block with the Pointer tool.

2	Click the style name on the Studio's Text panel.
OR
Click the down arrow on the Styles box and select the style name in the drop-down list.

Text in the text block takes on the properties of the named style.

To update a named style using the properties of a selected text block:

1	Select a text block that has the named style, and change its properties as desired. A ‘+' sign appears in front of the style name in the Styles box (and in the Text panel sample) denoting that the block uses that style as a base, plus local formatting.
Note: Any changes you make to text within a block, even to a single character, are considered local formatting and result in a "+" sign appearing next to the style name. See the "Local formatting" section below.

2	Right-click on the object and choose Update Text Style (or use the Format menu). The ‘+' sign in front of the style name disappears, and all text blocks using the named style, throughout the publication, take on the new properties.

To define a new style using the properties of the selected text (or text block):

•	Type a style name into the Styles box and press Enter.

The new style is defined with the properties of the selected text.

Note: Normally, new or updated styles are in effect only for the current publication; they are saved with the publication, but don't carry over to new publications. If you wish, however, you can use Tools/Save Defaults... to record the set of styles (along with other defaults) as a global setting so it will remain in effect for future publications. For information, see Updating and saving defaults.

Tip: You can also use the Paste Format command to apply formatting from one text block to another. The simplest way is to right-click the first text block and choose Copy, then right-click the second (target) block and choose Paste Format.

Local formatting

If you have a story with extensive local formatting (where the style name includes a "+" sign), be careful when modifying the base named style. When a style is updated or applied to a block, PagePlus compares the formatting of the new style to the formatting currently applied throughout the block. Any properties that differ are applied to the whole block, eliminating any local variations.

Example 1. The new style's point size is 10. The block's point size is also 10,  with a single 14pt word. When the style is applied, the 14pt word remains because the point size property hasn't changed.

Example 2. The new style's point size is 10. The block's point size is 9, with a single 14pt word. When the style is applied, the whole block (including the 14pt word) gets reset to 9pt, because the point size property has changed.

This rule applies to all the various formatting commands: point size, style, color, leading, indents, etc. Bold, Italic, Underline, and Strikethrough are treated as a single Style value. That is, if ANY of these properties differ between the new style and the block, then ALL of them will be reset in the block.

Using the Text Style Palette

The Text Style Palette, accessible from the Format menu or by right-clicking in the Styles group of the Studio's Text panel, displays a list of all the named styles in your publication, and lets you create a new style, modify or remove an existing style, or import styles from other PagePlus files (see below). You can use the palette to apply any style to selected text, too.

For details, access the Text Style Palette and right-click on any control to view context-sensitive help.

Importing styles

When you use the Insert/Text File... command to import text from a word-processor file, you can choose whether or not to retain the source file's named styles.

•	Check Retain Format in the Import Text dialog if you want PagePlus to import and retain these styles. Any text not tagged with a style will be marked with the "Normal" style as used in your publication. (If a "Normal" style isn't defined, PagePlus will define a new style with that name, using your current attributes for default text. Later, you can update this style to a new definition if you wish, thereby changing all the imported text.)

•	Uncheck Retain Format to discard styles; PagePlus will mark all text with the "Normal" style, as for unstyled text in the case above.

To import a set of text styles from another PagePlus file, choose Text Style Palette... from the Format menu (or by right-clicking in the Studio's Text/Styles group) and click the Import styles button. Use the dialog to select the source file.

Note: If duplicate style names exist, you'll have the option of overwriting the existing style name, skipping the style, or renaming it (using a default name). New styles will be added to those already in the Styles list. PagePlus derives its definitions of imported style properties from the first character it encounters in the source document that uses that named style. If the source document has local formatting and you subsequently attempt to modify the imported style, you may change some local formatting (see "Local formatting" above). In general, make sure the first character is representative of the base style you want (e.g., correct point size, regular rather than bold, etc.), and use the Text Style Palette to review the properties of imported text styles.

Using Contents styles to prepare a table of contents

The Table of Contents Wizard (Insert/Table of Contents...) helps you create a table of contents with a title and first- and second-level headings derived from named styles in your publication. PagePlus includes three built-in text styles intended specifically for table of contents preparation: Contents-Title, Contents-1st, Contents-2nd. Using the Wizard, you'll specify which named styles should map to the three Contents styles. For example, you could map all text using the Heading style to Contents-1st. You can update the Contents styles as needed.

For details, see Creating a table of contents.

Using Index styles to prepare an index

PagePlus includes four built-in text styles intended specifically for use in an index: Index-Main, Index-Separator, Index-Sub, and Index-Title. You can update these Index styles as needed.

For details, see Creating an index.


Adjusting letterspacing and kerning

Letterspacing (tracking)

The spacing between characters in a paragraph can have a subtle effect on the reader. PagePlus lets you experiment with the letterspacing of text in a text block. The normal value is expressed as 0%. Increase the value to spread text apart, and reduce it to tighten letterspacing. Note that this adjustment affects all the text in the selected text block.

To adjust letterspacing of a text block:

1	Click in the text with the Text tool, or select the text block with the Pointer tool.

2	Display the ChangeBar and choose a value from the [image] Letterspacing drop-down list box, or type in a new value.
OR
Choose Spacing... from the Format or right-click menu; the Spacing tab is displayed. Click the up or down arrows on the Letter space box to adjust the value, or type a new value.

Note: In Web Publishing mode, letterspacing variations are only preserved if you're working in HTML 4.0.

Kerning

Kerning is normally applied where two large, adjacent characters look over- or under-spaced due to the shape of the characters, and is used to reduce or increase the space between the pair of characters.

	For example, the letters 'A' and 'V' look over-spaced when placed adjacent to each other.
	Kerning solves this problem by bringing the two letters closer together.

To adjust kerning between a letter pair:

1	Using the Text tool, click between the two characters for a blinking cursor.

2	To increase space (positive kerning), press Ctrl+Alt+'+'.
To decrease space (negative kerning), press Ctrl+Alt+'-'.

OR

Choose Kern... from the Format menu. You'll see a submenu to let you adjust the spacing. Choose Custom to enter a kern value specified as a percentage of the text size.

Typically the advantages of kerning are only noticeable on larger text, so the most detailed attention is applied to kerning when creating display text: headlines or text logos. PagePlus automatically applies pair-kerning to text over 16 points. You can change the point size above which automatic kerning is applied, or disable the feature.

To set the automatic pair kerning value:

1	Choose Spacing... from the Format or right-click menu and click the Options tab.

2	To turn automatic pair kerning off, uncheck the Auto pair kerning box.

3	To change the minimum point size for automatic pair kerning, click the nudge buttons or enter a new value in the box.

Auto pair kerning will only have an effect on text which uses a TrueType font containing "pair kerning" information.


Fitting text to frames

To review the basics of frame text, see Understanding frame text (flowing text), and in particular the subtopic How a story flows through a sequence of frames.

Fitting story text precisely into a sequence of frames is part of the arduous art of laying out publications.

If there's too much story text to fit in a frame sequence, PagePlus stores it in an invisible overflow area. The Link button on the last frame of the sequence displays a plus sign (+), as does the Frame Info box on the Standard toolbar. You might edit the story down or make more room for it by adding an extra frame or two to the sequence.

If there's too little text, on the other hand, you'll have some empty frames, and may need to fill the blank space with additional graphics or text.

When importing text, it's a good idea to take advantage of the AutoFlow feature, so enough frames are created to display the whole story. That way, you can gauge just how much adjustment will be needed to fit the story to the available "real estate" in your publication. Make the major changes first, then proceed to the fine-tuning.

As your layout progresses, you can adjust frames and story text so you get closer and closer to a perfect fit.

The ChangeBar's Size & Position tab includes several tools that can simplify the task of fitting text to frames:

	AutoFit Click to scale the story's text size so it fits exactly into the available frames. You can use this early on, to gauge how the story fits, or near the end, to apply the finishing touch. AutoFit first applies small point size changes, then small leading changes, then adjustments to the paragraph space below value, until the text fits. Other settings are not affected.
	Shrink Story Text Click to reduce the story's text size one increment. Double-click for a greater reduction.
	Enlarge Story Text Click to increase the story's text size one increment. Double-click for a bigger increase.


Wrapping text around objects

PagePlus lets you wrap text around an object automatically. Usually, this means wrapping text around a picture that overlaps or sits inside a text frame. But you can wrap frame text around another frame, or even flow text inside a graphic (a circle, for example). Wrapping is accomplished by changing the wrap setting for the object around which text will wrap.

For an illustrated introduction to text wrapping, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Wrapping Text.

To control an object's wrap setting:

•	Choose Wrap Settings... from the Arrange or right-click menu.

You can set wrap status (off, wrap outside, or wrap inside), outline shape (irregular or square), and standoff.

For a text object, the wrap status settings include "Text will wrap," which means the object's text will wrap around another object, provided that the wrap setting of the other object is "Wrap outside" or "Wrap inside." "Text will wrap" is the default setting for text objects.

If wrapping is turned on for any object, the object appears with a dotted wrap outline that shows the boundary around which text will wrap. The standoff is the distance (default .05 inch) between the object and its wrap outline.

To adjust the shape of the wrap outline:

•	Select the Pointer tool and move the mouse over the wrap outline.
 The Wrap Adjust cursor appears.

•	To add a new "node" or control point, dividing the outline into more sections, click on any part of the dotted line.

•	To move a node, drag on the node.

•	To move a line (between two nodes), drag on the line.

•	To delete a node, drag another node to coincide with it.

The outline shape determines how text wraps around the object. You can use these two buttons on the Standard toolbar to switch between square and irregular wrapping:

	Square Wrap Click to set the object's text wrap outline outside the object's rectangular frame, so text wraps around the frame. To fine-tune text wrap settings, choose Wrap Settings... from the Arrange or right-click menu.
	Irregular Wrap Click to fit the object's text wrap outline to the object's actual contours, so text wraps more closely around the object. To fine-tune text wrap settings, choose Wrap Settings... from the Arrange or right-click menu.

Fine-tuning text wrap

Text wrap makes it more difficult to achieve aesthetic composition (especially inside objects), so you may want to check for the following:

•	Right edge of the text does not follow the wrap outline.

•	Single words in spaces too small for them.

•	Large gaps appear in the text.

These problems can be corrected by using auto-hyphenation, justifying the text, using the "Don't overset text" option, changing the size of the text slightly, or discreetly editing the text itself.

Note: "Don't overset text" is a special case where a line of text consists of just a single word. If the word exceeds the text block width, and "Don't overset" is checked, the characters of the word are kerned until the word fits within the text block width; if the option is unchecked, the characters are unaffected and the word width exceeds the text block width.

Using the wrap outline to crop an object

For special effects, you can use an object's wrap outline to subtract visible portions of the object. In the Wrap Settings dialog, check the Crop object to outline box.

For more on cropping, see Cropping an object.


Creating a bulleted or numbered list

You can turn a text block into a bulleted or numbered list. Each time you insert a return, the new line will begin with the specified symbol.

To create a bulleted or numbered list:

1	Click in the text with the Text tool, or select the text block with the Pointer tool.

2	Choose Bullets & Numbering... from the Format or right-click menu. Click either the Bullets tab or the Numbering tab.

The dialog lets you set properties of paragraph bullet and numbering. Bullet properties include character, font, and indent; numbering properties include format, punctuation, and indent. The Preview window shows the effect on selected text.

To turn off bullets or numbering for a selected text block:

•	Choose Bullets & Numbering... from the Format or right-click menu. Click the None tab, then click OK.


Creating background boxes and rules

Background boxes and ruled lines are two effects that you can employ to set a block of text apart from its surroundings. For example, you might use either effect for a "pull quote" inserted alongside a newsletter article. Boxes are shaded rectangular regions that surround the text block, while ruled lines sit above and/or below the block.

To create a background box or ruled line:

1	Click in the text with the Text tool, or select the text block with the Pointer tool.

2	Choose Text Background... from the Format or right-click menu.

3	For a background box, click Background Rectangle. Use the dialog to set color, shade, corners, and style options.
OR
For a ruled line, click Lines. Use the dialog to select gap, attributes, and style for lines above and/or below the text.

The Text Background dialog includes a preview window and provides context-sensitive help on the various options for each effect.

Note: Background boxes created using the "Text" style fit themselves precisely to the actual text in the block, regardless of where the block's handles are located. Don't try to adjust such a box by adjusting the block handles—you'll only alter the column width or leading settings! If you want a standoff between the text and the edges of its box, set the "Measure" style before adjusting block handles. Depending on the effect you want, you can use one of these options instead of a background box:

•	Place a box graphic behind the text and adjusting its proportions as desired.

•	Give the whole frame a shaded fill, and adjust the margins (or the border of a shaped frame) using Format/Frame Setup... so the text is inset from the frame's edges.


Inserting a symbol

You can insert symbol characters using either the Insert menu or (for common symbols) keyboard shortcuts.

To insert a symbol character using the Insert menu:

1	Select the Text tool and click in the text for a blinking cursor.

2	Choose Symbol... from the Insert menu, and select a symbol from the submenu.

3	If you need a symbol not shown on the submenu, select Other to display Windows' Character Map applet. In Character Map, select the symbol font (such as Wingdings) and double-click on the desired character(s). Click Copy, then Close. In PagePlus, with the text cursor correctly positioned, press Ctrl+V to paste the selection into your text. Note that special characters may be pasted at a default size and may require resizing. You may also have to reformat the character in the desired font.

To insert a symbol character using keyboard shortcuts:

Consult the table of Character Shortcuts.


Inserting date/time

You can insert a date/time field into your text, stamped with current date/time information. Various date and time formats are available. By default, the date/time field updates itself automatically. You can turn auto-updating off if necessary.

To insert a date/time field:

1	Select the Text tool and click in the text for a blinking cursor.

2	Choose Date or Time... from the Insert menu. Select a date/time format.

3	To keep the original date/time stamp in place indefinitely, uncheck Update Automatically.

To edit the information in a date/time field:

•	Select the field and choose Date or Time... from the Insert menu.

Note: You cannot edit date/time fields using the Text tool.


Inserting user details

When you create a publication using a Page Wizard or edit answer text in a Gallery object, certain basic information you enter (such as name, address, etc.) is stored separately as User Details. This means you don't need to re-enter the same information the next time it's required in a Page Wizard.

There are two ways to alter your User Details: You can simply enter different information the next time you create a Page Wizard publication; by default, this will update the User Details. Or you can employ the Set User Details dialog to review all your User Details at a glance, and update fields directly.

To review or change User Details:

1	Choose Set User Details... from the Tools menu.

2	Enter new information into the spaces on the Home, Business, or Custom tabs.

3	To leave stored User Details intact (that is, prevent them from being updated by subsequent Page Wizard entries), uncheck the "Update from Wizard entries" box.

Note: Changing a User Details entry as described above won't affect existing answer text in a Page Wizard publication or Gallery object. To edit such existing answer text, use the Studio's Wizard panel as described in the topics Customizing Page Wizard text. and Using the Gallery.

Apart from the Wizard process, you can insert a User Detail field into any publication. The Custom tab of the Set User Details dialog includes blank, renameable fields where you can enter any information you may frequently need to "plug into" your publications.

Note: Like date or time fields (see the previous topic), the User Detail fields you insert can be either self-updating or fixed, as you choose. A self-updating field remains linked to the User Details so that altering the related entry instantly updates the field on the page. Use caution with self-updating fields! Remember that the User Details normally update each time you enter different information in a Page Wizard. Because of the risk of accidental updating, the default setting is for a fixed field.

To insert a User Detail field:

1	Select the Text tool and click in the text for a blinking cursor.

2	Choose User Details... from the Insert menu. Select a User Detail.

3	To make the field self-updating (see note above), check Update Automatically.


Viewing and changing document information

PagePlus maintains basic properties and statistics for each publication file.

To view or change document properties:

1	Choose Properties... from the File menu.

2	Click the Summary tab to view or change fields for Title, Subject, Author, Keywords, and Comments.

3	Click the Statistics tab to view key dates, page count, etc.

In WritePlus, you can click the Word Count button to change the title of a story or view its word count and character count.

For tracking version history, especially if layout work is being shared, you may wish to display current properties so they show up on the screen or on a printout. Properties you can insert include Title, File Name, Author, Last Edit Time, Revision Count, and Page Count.

To insert document information in your text:

1	Select the Text tool and click in the text for a blinking cursor.

2	Choose Document Info... from the Insert menu. Select a property to insert and click OK.

If the document information changes, the document information field in the text is automatically updated.


Using hyphenation

Hyphenation is usually accomplished automatically in PagePlus using auto-hyphenation. This feature recognizes and corrects lines which would otherwise be too ragged or use overly large word spacing. You can turn it off, if desired, or change the hyphenation settings.

To access auto-hyphenation settings:

1	Choose Spacing... from the Format menu.

2	To turn off auto-hyphenation, click the Options tab and uncheck Auto hyphenation.

3	To adjust auto-hyphenation settings, click the Advanced tab. For details on specific settings, right-click on any of the controls in the dialog.

Whether auto-hyphenation is on or off, you can insert a hyphenation point between two characters, marking that point as suitable for creating a line-end using a hyphen.

To insert a hyphenation point:

1	Using the Text tool, click in the text where you want to mark a hyphenation point.

2	Press Ctrl+'-'.
OR
Choose Hyphenation Point from the Insert menu.

Note: Inserting a hyphenation point is not the same as typing a hyphen. You can't remove a hyphenation point by backspacing over it.

To remove a hyphenation point:

•	Press Ctrl+'-'.

OR

•	Using the Text tool, click in the text in front of the marked character or hyphen.

Checking/fixing hyphenation points is usually one of the "finishing touches" to a publication. For example, an auto-hyphenated text block using "justified" alignment may have some lines with large, ugly gaps between words. To fill a line out, you can insert a hyphenation point in a word a bit further on, so that the line breaks at a more attractive place.

A hyphenation point in a word overrides auto-hyphenation of the word. To ensure a word is never broken by auto-hyphenation (for instance, to reduce the number of hyphens in a narrow column of text), insert a hyphenation point before the first character of the word.

Hyphenation points work even if auto-hyphenation is turned off.

Tip: If you're not sure, check your dictionary before placing hyphenation points!


Inserting a new line (soft return)

When editing text on the page, pressing Enter to insert a "hard" return starts a new paragraph within the same text block. When editing in WritePlus, pressing Enter begins a new text block.

To insert a "soft return" which breaks the line, but continues the paragraph:

(on the page)

•	Press Shift+Enter.

OR

•	Choose New Line from the Insert menu.

(in WritePlus)

•	Press Ctrl+Enter.

Note: On the page, the difference between a hard return (Enter) and soft return (Shift+Enter) may not be noticeable unless, for example, the "first-line indent" or "space below" settings are other than zero, the default. These settings affect the appearance of paragraphs within the text block.


Using mail merge
Using mail merge (Paper Publishing mode only)

Mail merge lets you print your publication any number of times, merging data from an address file. You can work with character-delimited data files from other programs. For an illustrated introduction to mail merge, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Mail Merge.

To create a new PagePlus address list file:

1	Choose MailMerge from the Tools menu and select New Address List... from the submenu.

2	Enter a folder and file name for the new address list (*.SDB) file. The Edit Address List dialog appears, showing a blank first record. You can start entering information now (see Editing address lists below), or wait until later.

3	To record any changes and dismiss the dialog, click Close.

You can create any number of address list files, but can only have one open at a time. When you start a PagePlus session, the most recent address list file is automatically opened for you. (Initially, PagePlus opens with a default address file named ADDRESS.SDB, containing one empty record.) You can open a different address list at any time.

To open a PagePlus address list file:

1	Choose MailMerge... from the Tools menu and select Open Address List... from the submenu.

2	Locate the address list (*.SDB) file to open. You'll see a message confirming that the address list was successfully opened, and noting the number of records in the list.

Editing address lists

Each record in a PagePlus address list contains 20 standard fields. Use the Edit Address List dialog to create or delete records, enter information, or find occurrences of specific text.

To edit a PagePlus address list file:

1	Choose MailMerge... from the Tools menu and select Edit Address List... from the submenu. The first record of the current address list appears, with six fields in view.

2	Scroll down to view additional fields.

3	To enter information, simply type into a field.

4	To create a new record, click New.

5	Use the arrow buttons to navigate between records.

6	To delete the current record, click Delete. If you click Delete on the first record, its information is cleared, but the record form remains.

7	To record any changes and dismiss the dialog, click Close.

Note: Closing the Edit Address List dialog does not actually "close" the address list file. It's still the current address list. However, any changes you've made are saved to disk at this time.

Inserting placeholders for your data

In order to merge information from an address list file into a publication, you need to insert placeholders so PagePlus knows which fields' data to use.

To insert an address field placeholder:

1	Using the Text tool, click in the text where you want to insert the address field.

2	Choose MailMerge... from the Tools menu and select Insert Address Field... from the submenu. From the scrolling list in the dialog, select the address field to insert, and click Insert.

3	The Insert Address Field dialog remains open so you can insert additional fields if needed. To dismiss the dialog, click Close.

Merging and printing

Once you've inserted all necessary placeholders, you're ready to print the publication. Mail merge lets you print multiple copies of the current publication. You can choose to print using every address, or view each address and choose which ones to print.

To merge and print:

1	Choose MailMerge... from the Tools menu and select Merge and Print... from the submenu.

2	If you wish to preview the merged data during printing, click View and Print. Otherwise, click Print All Addresses.

Using data files from other programs

To use a character-delimited output file from another program (such as Microsoft Office SchedulePlus® or Lotus Organizer®), you first need to convert the outside file to the PagePlus address list format. You use the Address List Mapper to "map" each field in the outside file to a specific PagePlus address list field.

Supported file formats include: Comma Delimited (*.CSV), Semicolon Delimited (*.TXT), Space Delimited (*.TXT), and Tab Delimited (*.TAB).

To convert a character-delimited file to a PagePlus address list file:

1	Choose MailMerge... from the Tools menu and select Open Address List... from the submenu.

2	In the dialog, click the down arrow on the "Files of type" box. If you know the file extension of the outside file, select it from the drop-down list; otherwise, select All Files.

3	Locate the outside file to open, and click Open. The Address List Mapper dialog appears.

4	To map fields, click a PagePlus (*.SDB) field name on the left, then one of the outside file's field names on the right. The list of mapped fields builds on the left side of the dialog.

5	To unmap a pair of fields, select it on the left and click Unmap (or Unmap All to start over).

6	When you're done mapping, enter a folder and file name for the mapped address list file, and click OK. You'll see a message confirming that the address list was successfully opened, and noting the number of records in the list.


Creating a table of contents

A table of contents is a useful addition to a longer newsletter or any document with complex organization. The Table of Contents Wizard helps you create a table of contents with first- and second-level headings derived from named styles in your publication.

To review named styles, see Text styles.

To create a table of contents:

1	Decide which named styles you want to include as first- or second-level headings.

2	Check your publication to make sure these styles are used consistently.

3	Review the choices you'll need to make in the Table of Contents Wizard.

4	Choose Table of Contents... from the Insert menu.

5	You can easily modify the look of your table of contents, or run the Wizard again to update the information.

Using styles to prepare a table of contents

The Wizard shows you a list of all the styles used in your publication, and you check boxes to include text of a given style as either a first- or second-level heading. For example, you could include all text using the "Heading" style as a first-level heading.

Headings in the resulting table of contents will appear in the order the text occurs in your publication.

When the table of contents is created, PagePlus uses three built-in text styles intended specifically for table of contents preparation: "Contents-Title," "Contents-1st," and "Contents-2nd." Using the Wizard, you'll be shown a list of styles in your publication, and can check boxes to include text of a given style as a first- or second-level heading. For example, you could map all text using the Heading style to Contents-1st. You can change the look of your table of contents by changing the built-in style definitions.

Table of Contents Wizard choices

Before building your table of contents, decide how you want it to look, so you'll be ready to answer the Wizard's questions.

Placement options: Should the new table of contents...

•	Follow in the selected frame sequence? (Grayed out if none is selected.)

OR

•	Replace the current table of contents? (Grayed out if there is none.)

OR

•	Go on a blank page at the start of your publication?

OR

•	Go on a blank page at the end of your publication?

Display options: Do you want to...

•	Display a title? If so, the title you enter will be placed at the top of the new table of contents.

•	Display page numbers? If so, you'll be asked to pick a character for a tab leader that can appear between each heading and its corresponding page number. Typical choices include dots (ellipses) or underscore, or "None."

Changing the look of your table of contents:

You can update the built-in Contents styles as needed, using the Text Style Palette... option on the Format menu.


Creating an index

An index is a valuable reader aid in a longer document such as a report or manual. The Index Wizard helps you create an index with main entries and subentries, based on index entry marks you insert using WritePlus. Creating an index involves considerable time and thought—but the results can be well worth the effort.

To review WritePlus features, see Editing text with WritePlus.

A suggested plan of action...

In order to build a good index, you must become familiar with the content of the publication, and put yourself in the place of a reader approaching the material.

1	Start by making a preliminary list of index entries, using key vocabulary terms and concepts.

2	Then use WritePlus to go through the text of each story and mark the entries wherever they occur. Insert additional entries and subentries as they occur to you. You can either proceed systematically down your list of entries or work your way through the publication—or a bit of both.

3	Periodically build an index from the marked text, each time replacing the previous index. This will let you maintain a current, top-level view of how the index is developing.

4	You can print out the index or convert it to a text file to make it more convenient to use. In text file form, you can rework the list and use it as a plan for the next revision.

5	Repeat the process until you're satisfied (or exhausted, or both!). Be sure to check your spelling.

Using WritePlus to mark index entries

Use the Mark Index Entry dialog to insert index entry marks.

To display the Mark Index Entry dialog:

•	Click the [image]  Mark Index button.

OR

•	To edit a specific index entry, double-click it.

Type the text for the main entry and sub-entry (if any). You must include a main entry for each sub-entry. The dialog's scrolling list records entries and sub-entries alphabetically. To reuse an entry, click it in the list.

Click OK to insert the entry mark at the cursor position. To undo a mark entry, click the Undo button or press Ctrl+Z.

Index entry marks are invisible on the PagePlus screen and can only be edited in WritePlus. In WritePlus, click the [image] Special Characters button to display index marks. For example:

	MAIN ENTRY:
	ENTRY + SUB-ENTRY:

In WritePlus, you can cut, copy or delete index entry marks just like regular text—by selecting them and issuing the appropriate command. One efficient strategy is to proceed one index entry at a time, pasting copies of its particular entry mark wherever they belong, throughout the text.

To review index entries, click the Next Entry or Prev Entry button. Each click locates and highlights the adjacent entry mark in the text.

To create an index:

First use WritePlus to mark the entries.

1	Review the choices you'll need to make in the Index Wizard.

2	Choose Index... from the Insert menu.

You can easily modify the look of your index, or run the Wizard again to update the information.

Index Wizard choices

Before building your index, decide how you want it to look, so you'll be ready to answer the Wizard's questions.

Placement options: Should the new index...

•	Follow in the selected frame sequence? (Grayed out if none is selected.)

OR

•	Replace the current index? (Grayed out if there is none.)

OR

•	Go on a blank page at the start of your publication?

OR

•	Go on a blank page at the end of your publication?

Display options: Do you want to...

•	Display a title? If so, the title you enter will be placed at the top of the new index.

•	Right-align page numbers? If so, you'll be asked to pick a character for a tab leader that can appear between each entry and its corresponding page number. Typical choices include dots (ellipses) or underscore, or "None."

•	Include an index separator (A, B, C, etc. for first-letter groupings)?

To capture the index as a text file:

1	Open the index as a story in WritePlus.

2	Click the Select All button to select all the text.

3	Press Ctrl+C to copy the text to the Clipboard.

4	Open your favorite word processor and paste in the index text.

Changing the look of your index:

You can update the built-in Index styles (Index-Title, -Separator, -Main, and -Sub) as needed, using the Text Style Palette... option on the Format menu. For example, indent the "Index-Sub" text slightly, and introduce some space above the "Index-Separator" text.


Drawing a line

PagePlus provides Line, Box, and Shape buttons for creating simple graphics. You might use the Line button for:

•	Vertical lines, drawn in the column gutter, to separate columns. You might want to drag a guide from the ruler to the middle of the gutter, with snapping off, to help you.

•	Rules at the top and/or bottom of the page.

•	Horizontal lines to separate articles, sections within a column, or to highlight a headline.

To draw a line:

1	Click the [image] Line button on the Tools toolbar.

2	Then click and drag to draw a straight line on your page.

To constrain the angle of the line to 45-degree increments (including horizontal and vertical):

•	Hold down the Shift key as you drag.

Normally, the selected tool reverts to the Pointer after you draw a line.

•	To retain the Line tool after drawing a line, hold down the Shift key when you first click the button.

You can easily apply different line types, fills, colors, and so on to your graphics.

To edit a line:

•	Select the line with the Pointer tool and drag to move or resize. When resizing, use the Shift key if you wish to keep the line constrained.

•	Use the Studio's Lines panel to change the line's weight (thickness) or type. Click a sample in the Lines panel to apply it to a selected line, or drag and drop from the panel onto any line.

•	Use the Studio's Colors panel to change the line's fill color and/or shade. Click a sample in the Colors panel to apply it to any line, or drag and drop from the panel onto any line.

•	Use the ChangeBar to change the line's weight, type, or pattern, or fine-tune its size and position. (Lines take an exterior pattern but not an interior pattern.)

To access all Line properties:

•	Right-click on the line and choose Line.... The dialog lets you adjust all Line properties.

Note: You can use Update Object Default from the Format or right-click menu to set properties for any new graphics you create. See Updating and saving defaults.


Drawing a box

PagePlus provides Line, Box, and Shape buttons for creating simple graphics. You might use the Box button for:

•	A border framing your page, e.g. a box around the whole page.

•	Shaded panels, also known as screens, behind pictures to draw attention to them. The effect works equally well behind text—or you can use the background box feature (see Creating background boxes and rules).

To draw a box:

1	Click the [image] Box button on the Tools toolbar.

2	Then click and drag to draw a box on your page.

To draw a square:

Hold down the Shift key as you drag.

Normally, the selected tool reverts to the Pointer after you draw a box.

•	To retain the Box tool after drawing a box, hold down the Shift key when you first click the button.

You can easily apply different line types, fills, colors, and so on to your graphics.

To edit a box:

•	Select the box with the Pointer tool and drag to move or resize. When resizing, use the Shift key if you wish to constrain the box as a square.

•	Use the Studio's Lines panel to change the weight (thickness) or type of the box border. Click a sample in the Lines panel to apply it to a selected box, or drag and drop from the panel onto any box.

•	Use the Studio's Colors panel to change the box's line or fill color and/or shade. Select the box and right-click a sample in the Colors panel, then choose either Apply to Line or Apply to Fill. (Left-clicking a sample applies the color or shade to the selected object's fill.)

•	Use the ChangeBar to change the box's line weight, line type, corner radii, or interior/exterior pattern, or you can fine-tune its size and position.

To access all Line and Fill properties:

•	Right-click on the box and choose Line... or Fill.... The dialogs let you adjust all Line or Fill properties.

Note: You can use Update Object Default from the Format or right-click menu to set properties for any new graphics you create. See Updating and saving defaults.


Drawing other shapes

PagePlus provides Line, Box, and Shape buttons for creating simple graphics. You might use the Shape button for:

	• Decorative circles or polygons • Functional arrows, stars, callouts, and so on • "Clickable button" objects on Web pages. (Use the Hotspot tool to overlay hyperlinks.)

To draw a shape:

1	Click the [image] Shape button on the Tools toolbar. (The actual icon may vary, as it depicts the most recently selected shape.)

2	Select a shape from the flyout submenu.

3	Then click and drag to draw the shape on your page.

To draw a constrained shape (such as a circle):

Hold down the Shift key as you drag.

Normally, the selected tool reverts to the Pointer after you draw a shape.

•	To retain the Shape tool after drawing a shape, hold down the Shift key when you first click the button.

You can easily apply different line types, fills, colors, and so on to your graphics.

To edit a shape:

•	Select the shape with the Pointer tool and drag to move or resize. When resizing, use the Shift key if you wish to constrain the shape.

•	Use the Flip buttons on the Standard toolbar to orient directional shapes like arrows or callouts.

•	Use the Studio's Lines panel to change the weight (thickness) or type of the shape's border. Click a sample in the Lines panel to apply it to a selected shape, or drag and drop from the panel onto any shape. Note that some properties available for lines and boxes (dashed lines, for example) are not available for these other shapes.

•	Use the Studio's Colors panel to change the shape's line or fill color and/or shade. Select the shape and right-click a sample in the Colors panel, then choose either Apply to Line or Apply to Fill. (Left-clicking a sample applies the color or shade to the selected object's fill.)

•	Use the ChangeBar to change the shape's line weight, line type, corner radii, or pattern—or fine-tune its size and position. (Most shapes accept an interior pattern but not an exterior pattern.)

To access all Line and Fill properties:

•	Right-click on the shape and choose Line... or Fill.... The dialogs let you adjust all Line or Fill properties.

Note: You can use Update Object Default from the Format or right-click menu to set properties for any new graphics you create. See Updating and saving defaults.


Importing paint- and draw-type graphics

PagePlus supports all industry-standard paint-type files and a wide variety of draw-type files.

Paint pictures, also known as raster graphics or bitmaps, are built from a matrix of dots ("pixels"), rather like the squares on a sheet of graph paper. They are typically created either by use of a paint type program such as Microsoft Paint, or by using an image scanner to convert photographs. Draw pictures, also known as vector graphics, are resolution-independent and contain drawing commands such as "draw a line from A to B." Draw images are often easier to edit and print out better than paint graphics.

To import a paint- or draw-type graphic:

•	Click the [image] Import Picture... button on the Tools toolbar.

OR

•	Choose Picture... from the Insert menu.

OR

•	Press Ctrl+G.

Any of these actions displays the Picture Wizard, which allows easy import of pictures from a number of different sources, such as PhotoCD and TWAIN (live scanner) images. If the Wizard is turned off, the menu command displays a submenu; choose the desired picture source to open a file selection dialog.

For details on the Picture Wizard's other primary import options, see the following How To topics:

Importing PhotoCD images

Importing TWAIN images

Choosing the "From file" option lets you import pictures of many formats, including Windows bitmap (BMP), Windows metafile (WMF), TIFF, GIF, and Encapsulated PostScript (EPS).

Once you've selected the file to open, the dialog disappears and the mouse pointer changes to the [image]  Picture Paste cursor. What you do next determines the initial size and placement of the image:

•	To insert the picture at a default size, simply click the mouse.

OR

•	To set the size of the inserted picture, drag out a region and release the mouse button.

Note: You can always resize a picture as required, after it's been placed, by dragging its handles. For the finer points of resizing, see Resizing.

More about paint graphics...

If PagePlus cannot import your file directly, check your application to see if it can save the file in one of the supported formats.

The quality of reproduction of paint-type pictures can vary dramatically. They are created at a fixed resolution and hence lose quality when resized. This depends on factors such as:

•	How many dots per inch are stored in the original file.

•	How many dots per inch are used to reproduce the picture.

•	Whether it is color, bi-level (monochrome), or gray-scale.

•	What scaling is applied to the picture.

High resolution bitmaps counter this problem, but tend to be very large files.

Imported GIF and JPG images, commonly used in Web Publishing mode, are treated as separate images and inserted with the original file name unaltered. Even if these are scaled down on the publication page, the original file size is preserved and (if exported to a Web page) the image will take longer to display. As a rule, downscale these images first in a paint program, then import them to PagePlus.

More about draw graphics...

Draw-type pictures are typically created a number ways, such as:

•	Exporting from an EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) generating program.

•	Auto-tracing a paint-type picture using a draw-type program such as CorelDRAW!

•	Drawing the picture yourself using a drawing program such as Serif DrawPlus.

PagePlus supports a wide variety of industry standard draw-type files including Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) and Windows Metafile (WMF). If PagePlus cannot import your file directly, check your application to see if it can save the file in one of the supported formats.

Draw-type pictures can be enlarged, reduced or stretched and then printed out on any printer, at any resolution, without any loss of quality.

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS): An EPS file is a special case of a draw-type picture which contains the PostScript coding needed to produce output on a PostScript printer. If you plan to generate final PostScript output, we recommend you use EPS for imported pictures.

If you don't have a PostScript printer you can still print these pictures, provided the program that created the file has included a screen representation. You'll know if it has: PagePlus will display a bitmap of the file. Otherwise you'll see only a box on the screen and output. You can check the application that created the file—it may have an option to include a screen representation. See the subtopic Exporting as EPS.

Windows Metafile (WMF): Windows Metafiles are the native graphics format for Windows and so are quite common. They can easily be modified, edited and recolored using Serif DrawPlus. If you're not using PostScript, this is the recommended vector format.


Using the Gallery

The Studio's Gallery panel includes a wide variety of predesigned elements—graphics that you can customize and use as a starting point for your own designs. These include 3D Text, Adverts, Attention Grabbers, Backgrounds, Business Forms, Coupons, Logos, Mastheads, and more.

To use a Gallery object:

1	Click a category name in the upper group to preview the available objects as thumbnails in the lower group.

2	Drag and drop a thumbnail out onto the page. The view switches to the Wizard panel, which prompts you to fill in answer text.

3	Click the <Back and Next> buttons, or the question categories in the upper group, to view the various question screens. Retype answer text as needed.

4	Click anywhere else to insert the changed information into the publication's answer text field(s).

Gallery objects are groups that can be moved around and resized like other objects. You can ungroup a Gallery object to edit its individual components, and then regroup them. You can edit the answer text of a Gallery object at any time using the Wizard panel.

To customize a Gallery object's text later using the Studio's Wizard panel:

1	Click Wizard on the Studio toolbar.

2	In the upper Wizard Questions group, click a question category.

3	In the lower group, review the answer text and retype as needed.

4	Click anywhere else to insert the changed information into the publication's answer text fields.

Notes

•	There's no Undo for Wizard panel entries. Simply retype the entry.

•	Either grouped or ungrouped, the components of a Gallery object  remain editable via the Wizard panel, as long as they remain in the original document. In general, it's a good idea to set the object's text before ungrouping it.

•	Gallery objects lose their ability to be edited via the Wizard panel if they're copied into another publication, or into the Portfolio. In either case you can still edit the components directly, once the object is ungrouped.

•	Many basic answer text items (such as name, address, etc.) are normally recorded as User Details to save you the trouble of re-entering them a second time. Via the Set User Details dialog, you can update the information in the User Details or include a User Detail in any publication.


Importing PhotoCD images

PhotoCDs contain high-quality, color photographic images at several different resolutions so you can choose which resolution or quality is appropriate. You can import Kodak PhotoCD images into PagePlus.

To import a PhotoCD image:

1	Insert a PhotoCD disc in your CD-ROM drive.

2	Choose Picture... from the Insert menu. You'll see the Picture Wizard. If the Wizard is turned off, the command displays a submenu; select the PhotoCD... item.

You'll see the PhotoCD Gallery, displaying image thumbnails.

3	Use the Next and Previous buttons to find the desired picture and then click OK.

4	In the dialog, specify the number of colors and resolution (pixel dimensions) at which to import the image.

More about PhotoCD images...

At higher sizes, PhotoCD images are very cumbersome to work with, so use moderate sizes is possible. For print work, the "768x512" resolution generally gives best results.

For Web publications, first estimate the pixel dimensions the image will occupy on your Web page. There's no need to start with a much larger image.

You can use most photo (paint) editing programs to resize or otherwise manipulate the image. Use the JPEG (.JPG) format  to save photographic images in compressed form, but don't repeatedly save as JPEG—image quality may suffer.

If you'll be including photographs on the printed page, use the Photo Optimizer to ensure the best possible reproduction on your specific printer. See Optimizing pictures for printing.


Importing TWAIN images

If your scanner or digital camera provides TWAIN support, you can scan pictures directly into PagePlus using the TWAIN standard. Or, save the scanned image as a TIFF or PCX and then import into PagePlus.

To set up your TWAIN device for importing:

•	See the documentation supplied with your scanner for operating instructions.

To import a scanned image:

•	Choose Picture... from the Insert menu. You'll see the Picture Wizard. If the Wizard is turned off, the command displays a submenu; select TWAIN, then Acquire from the submenu to open a file selection dialog.

If you have more than one TWAIN-compatible device installed, you may need to select which source you wish to scan with.

To select a different TWAIN source for scanning:

1	Choose Picture... from the Insert menu or click the [image] Import Picture... button on the Tools toolbar.

2	Using the Picture Wizard, click Scanner, then Next, and click the Select Source button.
OR (if the Wizard is turned off)
Select Scanner, then Select Source from the submenu.

More about scanned images...

For line art and halftone images, scan at the highest resolution possible (but not higher than your output device) and (if saving) save as a black-and-white TIFF or PCX.

For photographic images, scan using grayscales and save as a grayscale TIFF file. If you have a color scanner, save a color TIFF. You can resize these images and still maintain reasonable quality, provided you don't make them significantly larger than the original. In general, the number of grayscales or colors is a more important issue than the actual resolution (dpi).

Scanned images, especially color, can get very large and you need to take this into consideration. Large files take a long time to load, save and print and eat your disk space!


Inserting objects from other Serif applications

The Insert button on the Tools toolbar provides a quick way to add objects from other Serif graphic applications, including DrawPlus, 3DPlus, and GraphicsPlus. (You can also add layered logo graphics, tables, and calendars using tools built right into PagePlus—see the following several topics.) The Insert button's flyout submenu displays icons for the other Serif applications, with the choices enabled if the applications are installed on your system.

For details on Serif products, contact us or choose Visit the Serif Web Site from the Help menu.

 Serif DrawPlus

DrawPlus is the companion drawing module for PagePlus. Among Version 4.0 features are:

•	Samples and Wizards: Dozens of professionally executed drawings and animations, hundreds of text and shape elements. Includes Logo Wizard, Backdrop Wizard, Watermark Wizard, Border Wizard.

•	QuickShapes: They work like intelligent clip art to create complex shapes, even spirals, petals, and webs.

•	Animation Mode: Turn out Web animations in no time—using advanced features like onion skinning, backgrounds, overlays, and frame management.

•	Natural Curve Editing: Simply click and drag to break and redraw a curve at any point. Apply smoothing selectively to freeform curves.

•	Advanced Fill Support: Apply high-end conical, ellipse, bitmap, and plasma fills to any text or shape for exciting, professional results.

•	Transparency Effects: Full range of transparencies for shading, shadows, reflections, depth effects, and more.

•	Powerful Graphic Functions: Use the Contour command for outlining and edge effects... Add to composite two shapes into one... Subtract for cropping and masking... Intersect to carve out unique shapes and regions.

•	Professional-standard Drawing Features: Such as converting text to curves, user-defined envelopes, automatic shadows, layers, and scalable vector graphics.

To launch DrawPlus (if it's installed on your system):

1	Click the Insert button on the Tools toolbar and choose [image] DrawPlus Object from the flyout submenu.

2	Click again on your page, or drag out to indicate the desired size of the DrawPlus object.

 Serif 3DPlus

From automated, Wizard-based text effects to fully rendered 3D scenes, 3DPlus gives professional-quality output with plenty of room for your input and creativity. Features include:

•	3D Text and Object Presets: Text Effects Wizard lets you choose from a variety of interesting, pre-stored 3D text examples and enter your own text. Choose from a wide range of 3D shapes in the Objects Gallery.

•	Instant Scenes: Instant Scene Wizard provides a variety of cool effects combining both text and a background, ready for you to customize or use "as is."

•	Object Manipulation Tools: Distance, Scene Distance, Move, Scene Move, Rotate, Spin, Resize, Extrude.

•	Independent Lighting Tools: Floodlight, 3 Directional Spotlights (Key Lights).

•	Backgrounds Gallery lets you apply a preset bitmap background (such as a pattern or landscape) to the current scene.

•	Materials Gallery: Vary object properties like base color, texture, transparency, shininess.

•	Draw Style Choices: Including Filled, Wireframe, Points.

•	Output Options: Multiple bitmap formats; Optimized and Web-safe palettes; Image size adjustment; Transparent GIF; OLE or printing

To launch 3DPlus (if it's installed on your system):

1	Click the Insert button on the Tools toolbar and choose [image] 3DPlus Object from the flyout submenu.

2	Click again on your page, or drag out to indicate the desired size of the 3DPlus object.

 Serif GraphicsPlus

GraphicsPlus specializes in truly instant information graphics that you can add to a host document or save as a GIF file (for E-mail messages or Web pages). Just choose a sample layout from the Gallery, then drag and drop choices to customize design, color scheme, and texture. Among the included layouts, you'll find:

•	Groups: Accents, Headings, Categories

•	Relationship Diagrams: Org Charts, Orbits, Triads, Pyramids, Puzzles

•	Processes: Flow, Fan, Cycle

•	Comparison Diagrams: Pro & Con, Ratings, Quadrants, Stock Arrows, Stock Tables

•	Tables: Simple, Row, Column, Grid, Totals

•	Charts: Bar, Column, Pie, Pyramid, Line, Area

•	Lists: Bullets, Checklists, Centered, Paragraphs, Quotes

•	Scheduling: Agendas, Time Lines, Gantt Charts, Day/Week/Month

To launch GraphicsPlus (if it's installed on your system):

1	Click the Insert button on the Tools toolbar and choose [image] GraphicsPlus Object from the flyout submenu.

2	Click again on your page, or drag out to indicate the desired size of the GraphicsPlus object.


Using LogoPlus to insert a layered graphic

LogoPlus is the logo/headline module built into PagePlus. Use it to create shapes, fancy text, and combinations to make powerful headlines and logos that add impact to your publications.

•	For an illustrated introduction to LogoPlus, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Using LogoPlus.

•	For tool tips and HintLine information, move the mouse over the various LogoPlus elements. (HintLine messages end with ">>" if double-clicking that element brings up a submenu or dialog.)

•	For full details, consult the Visual Reference section, LogoPlus Graphic Editor, and the LogoPlus topic sequence listed below.

To launch LogoPlus:

1	Click the Insert button on the Tools toolbar and choose [image] Logo from the flyout submenu.

2	Click again on your page, or drag out to indicate the desired size of the LogoPlus object.

LogoPlus launches with a dialog that lets you preview various logo templates. Choose Blank to start from scratch, or one of the sample designs to use as a starting point. If you wish, you can alter the dimensions now; but you can also do so later.

Once you've chosen a template, click OK.

LogoPlus builds up a design using layers, starting with a single text layer. Using the intuitive interface, you can enter text, add new layers with various geometric shapes, modify the attributes of any layer, add special effects, and reorder the layers as you wish. When you're done creating, simply click to insert the design into PagePlus.

To insert a design into PagePlus:

•	In LogoPlus, click the [image] Accept button.

The current design is inserted as an OLE object.

LogoPlus topic sequence

LogoPlus help continues with the following Visual Reference topics:

1	Entering and editing text

2	Previewing your design

3	Creating and manipulating layers

4	Modifying layers

5	Editing shadows and lines

6	Applying color

7	Updating PagePlus


Using TablePlus to insert a table

TablePlus is the table editor built into PagePlus. Use it to design attractive spreadsheets, charts, and tables and insert them into your publication.

•	For an illustrated introduction to TablePlus, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Using TablePlus.

•	For tool tips and HintLine information, move the mouse over the various TablePlus elements. (HintLine messages end with ">>" if double-clicking that element brings up a submenu or dialog.)

•	For full details, consult the consult the Visual Reference section, TablePlus Table Editor, and the TablePlus topic sequence listed below.

To launch TablePlus:

1	Click the Insert button on the Tools toolbar and choose [image] Table from the flyout submenu.

2	Click again on your page, or drag out to indicate the desired size of the TablePlus object.

TablePlus launches with the Create New Table dialog, which lets you preview various built-in table templates. You can set the number of columns and rows, and preview the table design.

3	Once you've chosen a template, click OK.

TablePlus displays the table in its Preview window. You can enter text and numbers, rearrange rows and columns, reformat the entire table and/or its contents, enter formulas, and control how the table appears.

To insert a table into PagePlus:

•	In TablePlus, click the [image] Accept button.

The current table is inserted as an OLE object.

To edit an existing table:

•	Double-click the table to launch TablePlus.

TablePlus topic sequence

TablePlus help continues with the following Visual Reference topics:

1	Creating tables

2	Entering text

3	Previewing your table

4	Changing the zoom view

5	Inserting formulas

6	Using QuickFill and QuickClear

7	Rearranging the table

8	Formatting text

9	Formatting numbers

10	Using QuickFormats

11	Setting grid lines

12	Joining cells

13	Changing table size

14	Applying color

15	Updating PagePlus

TablePlus hints and tips

•	To remove all the lines in a table: Select the whole table, double-click the Outer Edges button, and choose the first button in the submenu. Then click the first Line Style button (Hide Lines).

•	To make the background transparent: Select the whole table, double-click any of the Background Color buttons, and set the color to [Clear].

•	To add a table border: Make the table bigger then you need by 2 rows and 2 columns, and use the extra space for the border.

•	To make a headline span several columns: Join cells together.


Inserting a calendar

The Calendar Wizard helps you design a month-at-a-glance calendar to use in any publication. You can create a postage-stamp graphic or a full-page "planner." Options include year, month, week and day labeling, room to write, and 24 style choices.

To insert a calendar:

1	Click the Insert button on the Tools toolbar and choose [image] Calendar from the flyout submenu.

2	Click again on your page, or drag out to indicate the desired size of the calendar.

The Calendar Wizard then helps you pick a design and define options for your calendar.


Portfolio
Using the Portfolio

The Studio's Portfolio panel is a container for storing design objects (pictures, text blocks, and even unlinked text frames) you'd like to reuse in different publications. Once you've copied a design to your Portfolio, the design is available in any publication—simply open the Portfolio! For example, if you're creating a Web site and want to borrow a logo or other motifs from various paper publications, copy the elements to the Portfolio.

You maintain your own collection of Portfolio designs by adding and deleting items, with the option of naming individual elements to facilitate rapid access. There's even a Find feature that lets you search for designs by name or text content.

To view the Portfolio:

•	Click Portfolio on the Studio toolbar.

The Portfolio has two parts: (1) an upper Categories group and  (2) a lower Designs group where you drag designs for storage. The Designs group shows a list of thumbnails representing the designs you've placed in the selected category.

To add, delete, or rename Portfolio categories:

1	Right-click in the Categories group and choose Add Category..., Delete Category..., or Rename Category....

2	Use the dialog to enter and/or confirm your change.

To move or copy an object into the Portfolio:

1	To move, drag the object from the page and drop it onto the Designs group. To copy, press the Ctrl key before starting to drag.

2	If the Prompt for Name option is turned on (see "Naming Designs"), you'll be prompted to type a name for the design. (You can name or rename the design later, if you wish.) By default, unnamed designs are labeled as "Unnamed Design."

3	A thumbnail of the design appears in the Designs group, and its name or label appears in the list above.

Note: To undo a Portfolio move or copy operation, press Ctrl+Z or click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar.

To use a design from the Portfolio:

•	Click its thumbnail in the Designs group and drag it out onto the page. The Portfolio retains a copy of the design until you expressly delete it.

To delete a design from the Portfolio:

•	Right-click its thumbnail and choose Delete Design from the submenu.

If you want the Portfolio to present a confirmation dialog each time you delete a design, right-click anywhere on the Portfolio and select Confirm on Delete. (Or check the box in the Confirm Delete dialog.) Uncheck to bypass confirmation.

Note: You cannot undo a Portfolio delete operation.

Naming designs

To rename a design:

•	Double-click on it, or right-click its thumbnail and choose Rename Design. Type the new name and click OK. The new name appears immediately in the Designs group list.

If you want the Portfolio to prompt you for a name each time you drag in a new design, right-click on the Designs group and select Prompt for Name. (Or check the "Always prompt" box in the Edit Design Name dialog.) Uncheck to bypass the prompt.

Tip: Since the Designs group sorts designs alphabetically by name, you can use initial number or letter sequences to group your designs logically. For example, use abbreviations like HDL or LG for headlines and logos, or PIC and TXT to separate picture and text objects. This will help you manage a large set of Portfolio items within one category. If the set gets too big, create a new category (see above).

Finding designs

To locate a design based on its name or the text it contains:

1	Right-click on the Portfolio and choose Find Design....

2	Type the text to find and click Find Next. Starting from the first item displayed, PagePlus searches for the next design (if any) whose name or text includes the search text. Note that graphic text, such as that used in LogoPlus objects, is not included. The search spans all your Portfolio categories.

3	Click Find Next to continue the search, or Close to exit.


Selecting an object

Before you can change an object, you need to select it.

To select an object:

•	Choose a tool (see below).

•	Click on the object. Small "handles" appear defining the object's corners and edges. You'll also see the object's wrap outline, if it is turned on (see Wrapping text around objects).

•	If objects overlap, click repeatedly (without double-clicking) until the desired object is selected.

Using the Pointer tool with text frames: You can select either the frame or text blocks within the frame. The very first click on a frame will select the frame. The next click selects the underlying text block. After that, if you click on a different text block, you'll select the other block; but if you click again on the same text block, you'll select the frame. Click slowly, with care not to double-click—that launches WritePlus!

Ruler indents

When you click to select an object, white indents on each ruler indicate the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the object.

For details on using the rulers, see the Visual Reference topic Rulers.

Selection tools on the Tools menu:

	Pointer tool Click to use the Pointer tool to select, move, copy, and resize objects.
	Rotate tool Click to use the Rotate tool to rotate an object around its top left handle. Select the object, then drag one of its handles. You can also use the Rotate tool to move and copy objects.
	Crop tool Click to use the Crop tool to crop (or trim) objects. Select the object, then drag one of its handles inward. You can also use the Crop tool to move and copy objects.
	Text tool Click to use the Text tool (which provides the standard I-beam cursor) to create new text or edit existing text.


Selecting multiple objects

Selecting more than one object at a time (creating a multiple selection) lets you:

•	Position, resize, or rotate all the objects at the same time.

•	Create a group object from the multiple selection, which can then be treated as a single object, with the option of restoring the individual objects later.

For an illustrated introduction to using multiple selections, take a moment to view the QuickTour, Grouping Objects

See also Creating groups.

To create a multiple selection:

•	Click in a blank area of the page and drag a "marquee" box around the objects you want to select.

OR

•	Hold down the Shift key and click each object in turn.

Handles appear around the multiple selection, along with a [image] Group button.

To create a group from a multiple selection:

•	Click its Group button.

To add or remove an object from a multiple selection:

•	Hold down the Shift key and click the object to be added or removed.

To deselect all objects in a multiple selection:

•	Click in a blank area of the page.


Copying and pasting objects

To copy an object (or multiple selection) to the Windows Clipboard:

•	Right-click the object and choose Copy from the submenu.

OR

•	Select the object and press Ctrl+C, or choose Copy from the Edit menu, or click the [image] Copy button on the Standard toolbar.

If you're using another Windows application, you can usually copy and paste objects via the Clipboard.

To paste an object from the Clipboard:

•	Right-click on the page and choose Paste from the submenu.

OR

•	Press Ctrl+V, or choose Paste from the Edit menu, or click the [image] Paste button on the Standard toolbar.

The Paste command defaults to the PagePlus object format, if available. There are various Clipboard formats, including "picture," "bitmap," "text," and "OLE." Pasted graphics become Windows bitmaps. In some cases an application places several formats on the Clipboard.

To choose between alternative Clipboard formats:

•	Choose Paste Special... from the Edit menu.

(For details on resizing standard-format pictures, see Defining the size of pasted pictures below.)

To duplicate an object:

1	Select the object, then press the Ctrl key. The cursor changes to the Copy cursor.

2	Drag the outline to a new location on the page. You can release the Ctrl key once you've started the drag.

3	To constrain the position of the copy (to same horizontal or vertical), press and hold down the Shift key while dragging.

A duplicate of the object appears at the new location.

Tip: Duplicates are useful if you intend to use the object on another page, but aren't quite ready to paste it into place. Drag a duplicate to the pasteboard area. When you're ready to paste, go to the new page and drag the copy (or a copy of the copy) from the pasteboard.

Using the Portfolio for "long-term storage"

The Portfolio can store design objects you'd like to reuse in different publications. For details, see the Visual Reference topic Portfolio. To move an object into the Portfolio, simply drag it from the page and drop it onto the Portfolio's (lower) Designs group. To drag a copy of the item, duplicate it—press the Ctrl key before starting to drag.

Making one object look like another

You can copy and paste formatting between objects.

To copy and paste one object's formatting to another object:

1	Using the Pointer tool, select the first object and press Ctrl+C to copy it to the Clipboard.

2	Select the second object.

3	Choose Paste Format from the Edit menu. This applies the Clipboard object's properties to the selected object, matching them as closely as possible.

Note: The "Paste Format" command works with graphics and text blocks, but not with text frames or selected regions of text.

Defining the size of pasted pictures

When you use Paste Special... and select a standard picture format (Bitmap, Device Independent Bitmap, or Metafile), you'll see the [image]  Picture Paste cursor. What you do next determines the initial size and placement of the image:

•	To insert the picture at a default size, simply click the mouse. (See Note below.)

OR

•	To set the size of the inserted picture, drag out a region and release the mouse button.

When you click to paste in a picture, you can tell in advance what size PagePlus thinks the picture should be—white ruler indents appear in the rulers. If you don't want this size, drag instead.

Imported GIF and JPG images, commonly used in Web Publishing mode, are treated as separate images and inserted with the original file name unaltered. Even if these are scaled down on the publication page, the original file size is preserved and (if exported to a Web page) the image will take longer to display. As a rule, downscale these images first in a paint program, then import them to PagePlus.

Note on default picture sizes

When you choose the default option for an imported picture, PagePlus attempts to size the picture correctly. Normally, PagePlus treats the resolution of all imported paint-type (bitmap) pictures as 96dpi. Depending on the creation program, a bitmaps may have a different resolution setting installed internally. To force PagePlus to check for internal settings, uncheck the "Import pictures at screen resolution" box in the Picture tab of Tools/Options....


Moving objects

For an illustrated introduction to placing objects on the page, take a moment to view the QuickTour, Positioning Objects.

To move an object (including a multiple selection):

1	Select the object.

2	Click within the object (not on a handle) and drag the bounding box to the new location while holding down the left mouse button. To move the object with full display, pause a moment between clicking and starting to drag.

To constrain the movement of an object to horizontal or vertical:

•	Select the object and use the keyboard arrows (up, down, left, right).

OR

1	Press and hold down the Shift key after you begin dragging the object.

2	Release the Shift key after you release the left mouse button.

Specifying an object's position with the ChangeBar

The ChangeBar's Size & Position tab includes controls for fine-tuning the position of a selected object:

	Horizontal position Change the horizontal placement of the object's top left corner, with respect to the ruler's zero point. The higher the value, the further to the right.
	Vertical position  Change the vertical placement of the object's top left corner, with respect to the ruler's zero point. The higher the value, the lower on the page.

More about positioning objects...

For an illustrated introduction to placing and aligning objects precisely, take a moment to view the QuickTour, Precision Layout.

See also Aligning objects.


Resizing objects

To resize an object (in general):

1	Select the object.

2	Click one of the object's handles and drag it to a new position while holding down the left mouse button.

Dragging from an edge handle resizes in one dimension, by moving that edge. Dragging from a corner handle resizes in two dimensions, by moving two edges. You can also constrain the resizing—note the special behaviors for various objects below.

Resizing pictures

To maintain a picture's aspect ratio (proportions) when resizing:

•	Drag from a corner handle.

To allow free resizing of a picture to any aspect ratio:

•	Hold the Shift key down and drag from a corner handle.

Tip: If you'd like to be able to freely resize pictures without holding down the Shift key, display the Picture tab of the Tools/Options... dialog and uncheck "Maintain aspect ratio when resizing". With this setting reversed, you can still constrain the aspect ratio by holding down Shift.

Note: Imported GIF and JPG images, commonly used in Web Publishing mode, are treated as separate images and inserted with the original file name unaltered. Even if these are scaled down on the publication page, the original file size is preserved and (if exported to a Web page) the image will take longer to display. As a rule, downscale these images first in a paint program, then import them to PagePlus.

To restore a picture's original aspect ratio or size after resizing:

•	Choose Picture from the Format menu and select Properties... from the submenu.

•	To restore the original aspect ratio, set the scale width and height percentages to the same value.

•	To restore the original size, check the Original Size box. (See Note below.)

Resizing line/box/oval graphics

 To freely resize a line, box, or oval:

•	Drag from a corner (or line end) handle.

To constrain a line, box, or oval when resizing:

•	Hold the Shift key down and drag from a corner (or line end) handle.

This has the effect of keeping the line at 45-degree angles (including horizontal and vertical), the box as a square, and the oval as a circle.

Note: Unless the graphic was a square or circle to start with, this will alter the aspect ratio. There is no specific command to preserve the aspect ratio of a box or oval. To turn the graphic into a picture (which can then be proportionally resized), choose Convert To Picture from the Tools menu.

Resizing groups

You can resize a group object. The size of pictures, graphics, free text, and text frames in the group will change. The size of text inside text frames won't change, only the size of the frame itself.

Note: You can move, but cannot resize, a multiple selection. Turn the multiple selection into a group first, by clicking its Group button.

Special behavior of text blocks

Text blocks (paragraphs inside text frames) show handles when selected, but are not "resizable" as such. Rather, dragging the handles of a text block affects the properties of the text in the block. For details, see the How To subtopic Sizing frame text blocks.

Setting the size of an imported picture

When using the Import Picture command, after you've selected the file to open, the dialog disappears and the mouse pointer changes to the [image]  Picture Paste cursor. What you do next determines the initial size and placement of the image:

•	To insert the picture at a default size, simply click the mouse. (See Note below.)

OR

•	To set the size of the inserted picture, drag out a region and release the mouse button.

When you click to paste in a picture, you can tell in advance what size PagePlus thinks the picture should be—white ruler indents appear in the rulers. If you don't want this size, drag instead.

Note on default picture sizes

When you choose the default option for an imported picture, PagePlus attempts to size the picture correctly. Normally, PagePlus treats the resolution of all imported paint-type (bitmap) pictures as 96dpi. Depending on the creation program, a bitmaps may have a different resolution setting installed internally. To force PagePlus to check for internal settings, uncheck the "Import pictures at screen resolution" box in the Picture tab of Tools/Options....

Note: You can use Update Object Default from the Format or right-click menu to set properties for any new graphics you create. See Updating and saving defaults.


Locking an object's size or position

To prevent accidentally moving, resizing, flipping, or rotating an object, you can lock it in position.

To lock an object:

•	Right-click on the object and check Lock Object on the submenu.

To unlock an object:

•	Right-click on it and uncheck Lock Object.


Layering objects

As objects are created, they are layered in such away that the most recently created object will overlap earlier ones. You can change the layering order, which affects how objects appear on the page.

For an illustrated introduction to the concept of layering, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Layering Objects.

To change the object's position in the layering order:

•	Right-click on the object and choose Layer.

OR

•	Select the object and choose Layer from the Display menu.

Either command displays a submenu. From the submenu:

•	To shift the selected object's position to the bottom layer, behind all other objects, select Send to Back. You can also use the [image] Send to Back button on the Standard toolbar.

•	To shift the selected object's position to the top layer, in front of all other objects, select Bring to Front. You can also use the [image] Bring to Front button on the Standard toolbar.

•	To shift the object's position one layer toward the front, select Forward One.

•	To shift the object's position one layer toward the back, select Back One.


Aligning objects

Precise alignment is one key to a professional layout. You can use menu commands to align the edges of any two or more objects with one another, or align objects with a page edge. In addition, layout tools such as rulers and the dot grid provide guides to assist you in placing objects on the page. Snapping (see the next topic) lets you align objects with nearby guides.

For an illustrated introduction to alignment and snapping, take a moment to view the QuickTour, Precision Layout.

To align the edges of two or more objects:

1	Using the Pointer tool, Shift-click on all the objects you want to align, or draw a marquee box around them, to create a multiple selection.

2	Choose Align Objects... from the Arrange or right-click menu.

3	In the dialog, check one or more options for vertical and/or horizontal alignment. To uncheck all options (the default), click the No Change buttons.

To align one or more objects with a page edge:

•	Follow the steps above, but check the Include Page option. (If only one object is selected, page-edge alignment is automatic.)

Using ruler guides

PagePlus lets you to set up horizontal and vertical ruler guides—non-printing, red lines you can use to align headlines, pictures, and other layout elements "by eye," and also as a snapping aid.

To create a ruler guide, simply click on a ruler. The red ruler guide line appears.

To move a guide, click and drag it—it will follow the current cursor position. To remove a guide, drag and drop it anywhere outside the page area.

Using the dot grid

The dot grid is a matrix of dots, based on ruler increments, covering the page and pasteboard areas. Like ruler guides, it's handy for both visual alignment and snapping.

To turn the dot grid on and off:

•	Check (or uncheck) Dot Grid on the View menu.

OR

•	Right-click on the page or pasteboard and choose Display, then check or uncheck Dot Grid.

OR

•	Double-click the [image] Snapping button on the HintLine toolbar (or choose Options... from the Tools menu and click the Layout tab). Check or uncheck Dot Grid.

The dots in the grid are spaced according to ruler marks, for example every 2 marks or every 4 marks. You can specify the interval.

To change the grid interval:

•	Double-click the Snapping button (or choose Options... from the Tools menu and click the Layout tab). Enter a value in the "Grid dots every <n> ruler marks" box.

Note: Keep in mind that the dot grid is not absolute, but relative to ruler marks. At higher zoom percentage (magnification), there's less distance between ruler marks, and hence between dots. So, for finer control, with a tighter grid, you can click a Zoom button to magnify the page view.


Snapping

The snapping feature simplifies placement and alignment by "magnetizing" grid dots and guide lines. When snapping is on, objects you create, move, or resize will jump to align with the nearest visible grid dot or guide line.

The dot grid (see the previous topic Aligning objects) is a matrix of dots, based on ruler increments, covering the page and pasteboard areas.

Guide lines include ruler guides (see previous topic) as well as guide lines based on page margins and columns and frame margins and columns (see the Visual Reference topics Page margins and columns and Frame margins and columns).

To turn snapping on and off:

•	Click the [image] Snapping button on the HintLine toolbar. When the button is down, snapping is on.

OR

•	Check or uncheck Snapping on the Arrange menu.

Selective snapping

You control which points and lines are snapped-to by showing or hiding the individual guide elements.

To show or hide guide elements:

•	Check (or uncheck) the element's name on the View or menu.

OR

Right-click on the page or pasteboard and choose Display, then check or uncheck the element's name.

Note: The "Guide Lines" setting controls ruler guides you've placed as well as page margins and page column guides. "Frames" controls frame borders, margins, and columns. "Dot Grid" controls the dot grid.


Converting an object to a picture

The Convert To Picture function deletes the selected object or group and replaces it with a picture representation. It has many practical uses, for example:

•	Combining objects into a permanent graphic, such as a logo created from multiple text, graphic and picture objects. The resulting graphic can then be sized, positioned, and rotated as a single object.

•	Rotating an object that normally cannot be rotated, such as a text frame and its text.

•	Converting text to a picture which can then be scaled to be larger than 250 points.

•	Creating a composite shape from multiple graphics.

Remember that Convert to Picture is a one-way process, so any objects which are converted will no longer exist as separately editable objects.

To convert one or more objects to a picture:

1	Select the object, or Shift-click (or drag a marquee) to select multiple objects.

2	Choose Convert To Picture from the Tools or right-click menu.


Exporting as a picture

Exporting as a picture lets you convert all the objects on the pasteboard and page, or just the currently selected object(s), to a graphic file, using a file format you specify, including EPS (Encapsulated PostScript, see below). It's particularly useful for generating logos and pictures to be used in publications created in other applications, such as a word processor.

To export as a picture:

1	(If exporting objects, not the whole page) Select the object or Shift-click (or drag a marquee) to select multiple objects.

2	Choose Export As Picture... from the File menu.

3	In the "List files of type" box, select a picture file format.

4	Specify a folder and file name for the picture.

5	To export just selected object(s), check Selected object(s). To export the whole page, uncheck this box.

6	To choose from export options such as resolution and color, check Show Filter Options.

7	Click Save. You'll see export options, if available and requested, for the particular export filter in use.

The "Resolution" and "Color" options are only available for bitmap type pictures. Remember that the higher the resolution the larger the resulting picture file. Note, there is little point in generating color pictures if you are printing to a monochrome printer!

Exporting as EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)

In order to export as EPS, you need to install the Apple LaserWriter printer driver on your system. If necessary, you can install this driver from your Windows 95/98 CD-ROM.

To install and set up the Apple LaserWriter printer driver:

1	Choose Settings/Printers from the Start menu and select Add Printer.

2	When asked to select the Manufacturer, choose Apple and then select Apple LaserWriter as the printer model. Select the default name: Apple LaserWriter when prompted.

3	When asked what Port to use with this printer, select LPT1: Printer Port.

4	Once you've finished the install procedure, right-click on the Apple LaserWriter printer icon in the Printers folder and choose Properties, then click on the Paper tab.

5	If you selected US based install when installing PagePlus 6.0, make sure that the size is set to Letter. If you selected European based install, check that the size is set to A4.

6	Click the Unprintable Area... button and set all the values to 0.

7	Select the PostScript tab and set the PostScript output format to Encapsulated PostScript (EPS).

8	Close Control Panel, and restart PagePlus.


Creating groups

You can easily turn a multiple selection (see Selecting multiple objects) into a group object. When objects are grouped, you can position, resize, or rotate the objects all at the same time.

For an illustrated introduction to grouping, take a moment to view the QuickTour, Grouping Objects.

To create a group from a multiple selection:

•	Click the [image] Group button.

To ungroup (turn a group back into a multiple selection):

•	Click the [image] Ungroup button.

You'll know that a selected object is a group if the Ungroup button appears.

The objects that comprise a group are intact, but can't be edited individually.

In general, any operation you carry out on the group affects each member of the group. One exception occurs if the group is resized. The size of pictures, graphics, and text frames in the group will change, but not the size of free text objects.


Rotating an object

For an illustrated introduction to rotating objects, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Rotating and Flipping Objects.

To rotate an object counter-clockwise around its top left handle:

•	Select the [image] Rotate tool on the Tools toolbar.

•	Click to select the object, then drag one of its handles.

Note: You can also use the Rotate tool to move and copy objects.

To constrain rotation in 45-degree steps:

•	Press the Shift key after you've begun rotation, and hold it down until after you release the mouse button.

To unrotate (restore the original orientation):

•	Double-click the object.

•	To restore the rotated position, double-click again.

To fine-tune rotation:

1	Display the Changebar and click the Size & Position tab. Using the [image] Object rotation control...

2	Click the small up or down "nudge" buttons to adjust in increments.

OR

Click in the text box, then press the up or down arrows on the keyboard to adjust values incrementally

OR

Type in an exact value and press the Enter key.

To prevent a picture object from accidentally being rotated:

•	Right-click on the object and select Lock Object from the submenu.

More about rotating objects...

Sometimes you'll find that an object cannot be cropped or rotated. Here are some workarounds for different types of objects:

•	Single frames and their text: Select the frame, then choose Convert to Picture from the Tools menu. This converts the text frame into a picture which can be cropped or rotated. It will only work if the frame is a single frame and not a part of a frame sequence. Remember that once you have changed a frame into the picture format it will no longer flow text.

•	Frame text objects: Either use Convert to Picture (see above), or drag an individual text block out of the frame, drop it as free text, then crop or rotate the free text.

•	Group selections: You can crop or rotate the individual objects or use Convert to Picture.

•	Previously rotated or cropped objects: You can't rotate a cropped object or crop a rotated object. You can, however, crop or rotate first, then use Convert to Picture, and finally rotate or crop the picture.


Flipping a picture

For an illustrated introduction to flipping pictures, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Rotating and Flipping Objects.

To flip a picture horizontally (left to right; top and bottom stay the same):

•	Select the picture and click the [image] Horizontal Flip button on the Standard toolbar.

To flip a picture vertically (top to bottom; left and right stay the same):

•	Select the picture and click the [image] Vertical Flip button on the Standard toolbar.

To prevent a picture object from accidentally being flipped:

•	Right-click on the picture and select Lock Object from the submenu.


Cropping an object

Cropping means masking (hiding) parts of an object, for example to improve composition or create a special effect. The underlying object is intact.

To crop (trim) an object:

1	Select the [image] Crop tool on the Tools toolbar.

2	Click to select the object, then drag one of its handles inward.

Note: You can also use the Crop tool to move and copy objects.

To scroll the visible portion of a cropped object within the crop area:

•	Select the object and drag its center area.

To uncrop (restore full visibility):

•	Double-click the object.

•	To restore the cropped state, double-click again.

To prevent a picture object from accidentally being rotated:

•	Right-click on the object and select Lock Object from the submenu.

Cropping an object using its wrap outline

If wrapping is turned on for an object you select, its wrap outline appears. (See Wrapping text around objects.) For special effects, you can use an object's wrap outline to subtract visible portions of the object.

To crop an object using its wrap outline:

1	Right-click on the object and select Wrap Settings from the submenu.

2	In the Wrap Settings dialog, make sure wrapping is turned on, and check the Crop object to outline box.

3	Select the Pointer tool and move the mouse over the wrap outline.
 The Wrap Adjust cursor appears.

•	To add a new "node" or control point, dividing the outline into more sections, click on any part of the dotted line.

•	To move a node, drag on the node.

•	To move a line (between two nodes), drag on the line.

•	To delete a node, drag another node to coincide with it.

•	Drag nodes and lines inward to mask portions of the object.

More about cropping objects...

Sometimes you'll find that an object cannot be cropped or rotated. Here are some workarounds for different types of objects:

•	Single frames and their text: Select the frame, then choose Convert to Picture from the Tools menu. This converts the text frame into a picture which can be cropped or rotated. It will only work if the frame is a single frame and not a part of a frame sequence. Remember that once you have changed a frame into the picture format it will no longer flow text.

•	Frame text objects: Either use Convert to Picture (see above), or drag an individual text block out of the frame, drop it as free text, then crop or rotate the free text.

•	Group selections: You can crop or rotate the individual objects or use Convert to Picture.

•	Previously rotated or cropped objects: You can't rotate a cropped object or crop a rotated object. You can, however, crop or rotate first, then use Convert to Picture, and finally rotate or crop the picture.


Getting started in Web mode

This topic and those that follow, provide you with the details you'll need to know to create a successful site on the World Wide Web using PagePlus.

•	For an illustrated introduction to creating a publication for the World Wide Web, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Creating a Web Site.

•	For background information (especially tailored for desktop publishing designers transitioning to the Web), see the "Designing for the World Wide Web" section in the PagePlus Companion.

How easy is it to create your own Web site with PagePlus? If you have the PagePlus 6.0 Design CD, it can be as simple as answering a few questions in a Web Page Wizard. And no matter how much customizing you choose to do after that, the whole job won't be nearly as complicated as developing your own newsletter. So, if you're already comfortable using PagePlus for paper publications, you'll find it easy going. If you're just beginning, you'll learn to use PagePlus tools as you go.

What is a Web site?

The Internet is a global network that interconnects computers around the world. The World Wide Web began as a way of using the Internet to access information stored in a file format known as HTML, or Hypertext Markup Language. Broadly defined, a Web site is a collection of (mostly) HTML files stored on a file server that someone with a Web browser can get to. Actually, Web sites don't depend on the Internet at all—they can be (and often are) accessed just as well over a local area network or private intranet. Remember, a Web site is just a collection of files.

The HTML format is a way of describing the layout of a page. An HTML file uses plain text with various embedded codes to describe a page that somebody has designed, consisting of text and clickable hypertext links. Besides HTML files, a Web site generally includes other files (pictures, for example) that the designer has seen fit to incorporate. A Web browser (such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Explorer) is a program that can read an HTML file and display the page (one hopes) the way the designer intended it to look.

Typically, a Web site has a single Home Page using a standard file name like INDEX.HTML. The Home Page is the first page a visitor sees. It usually will contain links to other pages on the site, which in turn have links to others. To the person using a Web browser to access the site, the information appears seamlessly linked—navigable with a click of the mouse.

PagePlus takes the pages you've laid out and converts them to HTML. In fact, the Web Page Wizards simplify things further by providing you with a variety of starter layouts, professionally designed expressly for World Wide Web display. Whether you're looking for a business, community, or personal Web site, you're bound to find the Web Page Wizards a convenient point of departure.

What will I need to publish my Web site?

Publishing a site with PagePlus is a one-step operation that both: (1) converts your publication to files for the Web, and (2) copies the Web files to a location you specify, either to a local folder or to a World Wide Web host.

To publish to a local folder, you don't even need a connection to the Internet. Of course, you'll need a Web browser to preview your site.

To publish to the World Wide Web, you'll need a host for your Web site—that is, disk space on a server connected to the Internet—so that others can access your site. This usually means opening an account with an online service provider: either a large network such as America Online or a specialized Internet service provider (ISP). The big subscription networks typically allocate to each user 1-2 megabytes of server space for a "personal web site," and many plans are available from smaller ISPs. Once you've set up your account and can connect your computer to the host, publishing to the Web is simply a matter of transferring your files. The Web Publishing utility included with PagePlus takes care of this.

Starting a new Web publication

Paper Publishing mode is the familiar PagePlus environment for creating print publications. Web Publishing mode includes special features, such as menu items and custom settings, to facilitate creation of World Wide Web pages.

Anyone using Web Publishing mode for the first time should begin by creating a simple Web site using a Page Wizard.

To create a new Web publication using a Page Wizard:

1	Launch PagePlus or choose New... from the File menu. You'll see the Startup Wizard.

2	Select the Use a Page Wizard option and click Next.

3	Select the Web Sites option and click Next. On the following screens, select a basic site category and design, and enter basic text (such as name and address), when prompted.

4	Then sit back and let PagePlus create an instant Web site for you!

Just as in Paper Publishing mode, you also have the option of starting a new publication from scratch, or opening an existing publication (see the How To topics on: Starting a new publication and Opening an existing publication).

If you'd like to build on previous work you've done with PagePlus, you can also take an existing paper publication and convert it to a Web publication.

To turn an existing PagePlus (paper) publication into a World Wide Web site:

•	Open the publication in Paper Publishing mode and choose Switch to Web Publishing from the File menu.

•	You'll be prompted to save your document (if it's unsaved).

•	You'll also have the option of running the Layout Checker. It's a good idea to run the Layout Checker prior to entering Web Publishing mode.

The publication opens as an Untitled document in Web Publishing mode.

What's involved in creating a Web site?

Even if you've used the Web Page Wizard to "create" your site, there are lots of creative choices to be made. While the Wizard simplifies your design tasks considerably, chances are you'll want to put your personal stamp on the site before publishing it. As you proceed through the following help topics, you'll learn about...

1	The basics of using text on Web pages: Using Web text styles to make the most of HTML's constraints.

2	The basics of hypertext linking: Connecting your readers to other Web pages or Web sites through hyperlinks or hotspots.

3	Visual design options: For example, background color or picture variations and optional animation effects.

4	Fine-tuning your pages for both aesthetics and performance: Setting picture formats, adding search engine descriptors, setting service provider options, and so on.

5	Using the Layout Checker to help optimize your pages for efficient display.

6	Publishing your site!


Web page layout fundamentals

One advantage PagePlus has over a dedicated Web-page creation program is that it frees you from the structures of HTML, the language of Web pages. In theory, there's nothing to prevent you from taking your newsletter layout, or a print ad with a wild mix of multicolor graphics and fancy typography, and publishing them intact to the World Wide Web. In fact, your page can look as great on the Web as it did on your screen!

While you don't have to know HTML to use PagePlus, you should understand that:

1	The time it takes a visitor to load your page is directly related to the size of the HTML file plus any accompanying graphic files. The graphics take up considerably more space—and slow down loading time.

2	Those parts of your layout that PagePlus cannot translate to HTML will be output as graphics. The more of your layout that PagePlus can translate into HTML, the better.

3	PagePlus supports two versions of HTML: 3.2 and 4.0. HTML is far superior in terms of points (1) and (2), but has some platform disadvantages (see below).

HTML 3.2 and HTML 4.0

If you're used to working in a Desktop Publishing environment, you may have to scale back your typographic expectations somewhat when designing for the Web. With its built-in support for HTML 4.0, however, PagePlus gives you much more freedom. It's useful to compare HTML 4.0 to its predecessor, HTML 3.2.

•	With either format, you can in theory use any font you like. However, if a specified font isn’t present on a visitor’s computer, an available font will be substituted, with unpredictable results for your beautifully designed layout! As a rule, stick with the standard Windows fonts (Times New Roman, Arial, Courier New, and Symbol). To be sure, run the Layout Checker, which will warn you if your publication uses other fonts. You’ll have the option of converting each such instance to a picture—which will ensure the non-standard font’s appearance is preserved.

•	HTML 3.2 has the advantage of working on most browsers, but constrains your page design options, especially with regard to object placement. With HTML 3.2, WebPlus must construct Web pages using complex tables. Each object must fit in a separate cell, and any objects that overlap on the page must be converted to a single graphic, which can greatly add to the file size of freeform layouts.

•	HTML 4.0 produces smaller, faster, higher-quality Web pages but can only be viewed on Internet Explorer 3 and above, or Netscape Navigator 4 and above. In laying out text, you can specify any point size, use variable leading and letterspacing, and even justify paragraphs! The result is a much closer WYSIWYG match between what you see on-screen in WebPlus and what ends up in the Web browser. Because HTML 4.0 positions elements using absolute coordinates, WebPlus can output your pages without using tables. Overlapping is no longer as serious an issue in page design, and file sizes are reduced.

Summary: Chances are good (and getting better all the time) that you can safely adopt HTML 4.0 as your publishing standard. In the rapidly-changing environment of the Internet, users who stick with obsolete browsers are few and far between. For this reason, HTML 4.0 is the default choice in PagePlus.

If necessary, you can switch between HTML 4.0 and 3.2. Note that changing the HTML version does not affect the structure of your PagePlus publication, only the format used to publish it as a Web site.

To switch the HTML publishing format:

1	Choose Web Site Properties... from the File menu. The Site tab displays.

2	Select either "HTML 3.2" or "HTML 4.0" and click OK.

Using graphics efficiently

When working in Web Publishing mode, it's a good idea to set your monitor to display 256 colors (rather than thousands or millions). Certain objects (such as those using 3D or transparency) may not look quite right, but you'll get a more accurate preview of how your graphics will display on the Web site. Some visitor's monitors are limited to 256 colors, as is the GIF image format which is standard for Web graphics. If there are problem objects, always test the page in a browser before finally publishing it.

•	For important additional information on using and choosing colors for Web publications, see the topic Colors in Web Publishing mode.

The file size of a graphic is directly proportional to its linear dimensions. As a rule, keep picture dimensions to the minimum needed to convey your point. Plan your layouts so as to avoid large graphic areas.

As noted above, overlapping objects cause problems if you've selected HTML 3.2 as your output format. In this format, if one graphic overlaps another or if text overlaps a graphic (no matter which one is "on top"), PagePlus can't export the objects individually. Instead, they're exported as one unnecessarily large, rectangular graphic. This only wastes space.

To alert you, PagePlus displays a red box around overlapping objects as soon as the overlap condition arises. In addition, the Layout Checker reports overlaps. In the case of two graphics that you actually want to combine, you may of course leave them overlapping; they'll turn into one picture when exported. Otherwise, it's best to separate the objects until the red box disappears.

Use photographic images sparingly. These tend to be larger and require more colors to display satisfactorily.


Hyperlinking an object
Hyperlinking an object (Web Publishing mode only)

Hyperlinking an object such as a box, a word, or a picture means that a visitor to your Web site can click on the object to trigger an event. The event might be a jump to a Web page (either on your site or somewhere else on the Web), the appearance of an e-mail composition window, or the display of a graphic, text, audio, or video file. Hyperlinking enables visitors to navigate through your site. You can also place hyperlink hotspots over parts of the page (see the next topic).

To hyperlink an object:

1	Use the Pointer tool to select the object, or use the Text tool to highlight the region of text.

2	Choose Hyperlink... from the Insert menu. The Hyperlinks dialog appears.

3	Click to select the link destination type, and enter the specific hyperlink target (see Selecting a hyperlink target below).

4	Click OK.

As a visual cue, hyperlinked words are underlined and appear in the color you've specified for Hyperlinks in the Web Site Properties dialog (see Choosing Web site colors).

To modify or remove a hyperlink:

1	Use the Pointer tool to select the object, or click with the Text tool for a blinking cursor inside the linked text. (It's not necessary to drag over a hyperlinked region of text.)

2	Choose Hyperlink... from the Insert menu. The Hyperlinks dialog appears with the current link target shown. If the link is in text, the whole text link highlights.

•	To modify the hyperlink, select a new link destination type and/or target.

•	To remove the hyperlink, click the Remove button.

Note: Removing a hyperlink does not remove the underlying object or text.

Suppose you want to edit hyperlinked text—for example, take away some of the "hot" text or extend the hyperlinked region—while retaining the link itself. Simply use the Text tool and type (or delete characters) within the linked text. Any contiguous characters will share the same link. Likewise, you can cut/copy/paste linked text and objects without affecting their link properties.

For an overview of all the hyperlinks in your publication, use the Hyperlink Manager. See Viewing the links in your publication.

Selecting a hyperlink target

To link to a World Wide Web page:

1	As the link destination type, select An Internet Page.

2	Specify the correct Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the target Web page. The list shows URLs previously used in your publication. Choose one of the listed URLs, or enter a different one.

Clicking this type of link will display the target page in the visitor's browser.

To link to a page on your own Web site:

1	As the link destination type, select A Page in your Publication.

2	Select the target page number.

Clicking this type of link will display the target page in the visitor's browser.

To link to an e-mail address:

1	As the link destination type, select An Internet e-mail address.

2	Enter the full e-mail address (usually your own).

Clicking this type of link will display an e-mail composition window so a reader can send e-mail to the specified address. Typically, this option lets visitors to your site send you feedback.

To link to a file (for example, a sound or video file):

1	As the link destination type, select A file on your hard disk.

2	Enter the full hard disk path name of the file to display (click the Browse... button if necessary). Make sure it's a file that a Web browser can display, such as an HTML, TXT, or GIF file.

Clicking this type of link will display the specified file in the visitor's browser. When PagePlus publishes your site, the specified file will be copied along with your Web pages. This is a convenient way to attach supplementary content. For example, you could include small, thumbnail pictures on your Web page, each linked to a full-size image file. The page would load more quickly, and visitors could select which images to view at full resolution.

For details on other ways of linking to sound or video files, see the topic Adding sound and video.


Adding hotspots to a page
Adding hotspots to a page (Web Publishing mode only)

A hotspot is a transparent hyperlink region on a Web page. Usually placed on top of graphics, hotspots act like "buttons" that respond when clicked in a Web browser. They are especially useful if you want the visitor to be able to click on different parts of a picture (such as a graphic "menu" or map of your site).

To define a hotspot:

1	Click the [image] Hotspot button on the Tools toolbar.

2	Click and drag to draw a rectangular hotspot region. The Hyperlinks dialog appears.

3	Click to select the link destination type, and enter the specific hyperlink target (see the previous subtopic Selecting a hyperlink target).

4	Click OK.

To modify a hotspot hyperlink:

•	Using the Pointer tool, double-click the hotspot.

OR

•	Click to select the hotspot and choose Hyperlink... from the Insert menu.

The Hyperlinks dialog appears with the current hotspot link target shown.

•	To modify the hyperlink, select a new link destination type and/or target.

•	To remove the hyperlink, click the Remove button.

Editing hotspots

You can move and resize hotspots on the page, just like other objects.

To move or resize a hotspot:

•	Click to select the hotspot.

•	To move, click and drag from the center. To constrain the hotspot to vertical or horizontal movement, hold down the Shift key while dragging.

•	To resize, click and drag on its handles. To constrain the hotspot to a square shape, hold down the Shift key while dragging.

You can also edit rectangular hotspots into freeform shapes that closely match the parts of the underlying graphic you want to be "hot." To edit the outline, first move the mouse pointer over the hotspot's outline until it changes to the [image] Wrap Outline cursor. Then create extra nodes on the outline and drag to reshape it.

To create an extra node on a hotspot:

•	Click anywhere along the hotspot's outline.

To change the shape of a hotspot's outline:

•	Click on a node or outline segment and drag to a new position.


Choosing Web site colors
Choosing Web site colors (Web Publishing mode only)

Like all PagePlus publications, each Web publication has a color scheme, selected either while making Page Wizard choices, or subsequently using the Studio's Color Schemes panel. (For details, see the topic Using color schemes.) The selection of schemes includes ten specifically designed for Web use (named "WWW 1" through "WWW 10").

Web publications have several special Web color settings, usually defined as part of their color scheme. You'll need to know about these, even if you haven't applied scheme colors to other elements in your publication:

•	The Hyperlink color applies to hyperlinked text before it's been clicked on, while the same text after a visitor has clicked to "follow" the link takes on the Followed Hyperlink color.

•	A Web site's Background (blue in the sample below) can be either a solid color or a tiled (repeated) picture, usually a bitmap pattern. The tiled picture option works just like desktop "wallpaper"—so a small bitmap can go a long way. The color scheme sample shows [image]  if the scheme uses a tiled bitmap.

•	The Web Text color is applied to body text in Web publications. PagePlus 6.0 Page Wizard publications are designed so that the Web Text color takes Scheme Color 1. For example, if Scheme Color 1 is black, body text will appear black.

		In Web Publishing mode, color scheme samples show the Web colors along with the five basic scheme colors, as shown at left. The easiest way to apply new Web colors is to select a different color scheme by clicking a sample on the Studio's Color Schemes panel.
You can also change any of the Web colors within a scheme using the Color Manager's Color Schemes tab, in the same way that you'd modify the scheme's five basic colors.

Note: Unless you're converting a PagePlus 5.0 publication (see below), you will NOT need to use the Color Manager's Web Colors tab.

To modify a scheme's Web colors:

1	Right-click the color scheme sample (in the Color Schemes or Wizard panels) and choose Color Schemes.... You'll see the Color Schemes tab of the Color Manager, with the scheme selected. A preview window shows the hypertext and background colors associated with the scheme. (As noted, body text will match Scheme Color 1.)

2	To modify the selected scheme, click Modify Scheme....

3	The dialog includes a "Web colors" group showing the current selections for the various Web components. To set or change the color assigned to a particular component, simply select an RGB color from the drop-down list.

4	To use a picture as a background, check the Picture Background box and use the Browse... button to locate an image to be tiled on the page background.

5	When you're done, click OK.

Web colors in PagePlus 5.0 publications

Web publications created with PagePlus 5.0 did not use color schemes as defined in PagePlus 6.0. They did, however, include definitions for the various Web colors (hyperlinks, background, and body text). PagePlus 5.0 used a variable color called the [image] [Web] color to mark body text in the same way that "Scheme Color 1" is used in PagePlus 6.0.

The Color Manager's Web Colors tab lets you update your older PagePlus Web publications. Suppose you've just opened one of these older documents in PagePlus 6.0. If you display the Color Manager and select the Web Colors tab, you'll notice a check box indicating that the Web colors are detached from the publication's color scheme.

  (In PagePlus 6.0 publications, this box will not be checked as the Web colors are part of the color scheme.)

Leaving the Web colors detached just means that you define them separately from the publication's current color scheme. With colors detached, you'll notice that the samples in the Color Schemes panel show only the five basic colors. The [image] [Web] color will still be available as a choice in the Colors panel list, and body text marked with this color will take on the color assigned to "Web text" on the Color Manager's Web Colors tab.

Should you wish to assign one of the PagePlus 6.0 color schemes to an older publication, simply use the Studio's Color Schemes panel as you would with any new publication. After you've clicked a color scheme sample, you won't see an immediate effect on the publication's hyperlinks and so on, as long as Web colors are still "detached" from the scheme. To apply the scheme's Web colors to the publication, you'll need to "attach" them first.

To apply (attach) a scheme's Web colors to a PagePlus 5.0 publication:

1	Display the Color Manager and select the Web Colors tab.

2	Uncheck the "Detach Web colors from color scheme" box.

As soon as you uncheck the box, the Web colors from the current scheme replace the previous values in the drop-down lists, and the lists become grayed out—because you can no longer define them independently. Should you change your mind at this point, click Cancel to restore the detached colors.

3	To accept using the scheme's colors, click OK. The publication updates with the new values and at this point you can no longer retrieve the old ones. (For this reason, if you've any doubt, it's wise to jot down the old settings before replacing them.)

Note: When you apply a scheme's Web colors to a PagePlus 5.0 publication, any body text that formerly used the [image] [Web] color automatically takes on Scheme Color 1. The [image] [Web] color as such is not recognized in PagePlus 6.0 color schemes.


Choosing Web page titles
Choosing Web page titles (Web Publishing mode only)

The Web page title, which will appear in the title bar of the visitor's Web browser, can serve to unify the pages and focus the site's identity, as well as aid navigation. Once you've chosen a page name, copies of that page will have the same name. An easy way to have every page of your site display the same title (in effect, a site title) would be to start with a blank page, give it a name, then replicate that page.

Note: Leaving the page title undefined won't affect the performance of your site in any way.

To enter a title for a Web page:

1	Choose Web Site Properties... from the File menu.

2	Click the Page tab, type the title of your choice, and click OK.


Viewing the links in your publication
Viewing the links in your publication (Web Publishing mode only)

The Hyperlink Manager gives you an overview of all the hyperlinks in your publication. (To review hyperlink basics, see Hyperlinking an object.)

To display the Hyperlink Manager:

•	Choose Hyperlink Manager... from the Tools menu.

The Hyperlink Manager dialog displays both object and text hyperlinks in your publication, listed by page number. The entries are in "from/to" format, showing each link's source object type and its destination page or URL.

To display a hyperlink for closer inspection:

•	Click to select the link entry and click the Display button.

OR

•	Double-click the link entry.

PagePlus "zeroes in" on the selected hyperlink.

To remove a hyperlink:

•	Click to select the link entry and click the Remove button.

Note: Removing a hyperlink does not remove the underlying object.

To modify a hyperlink:

•	Click to select the link entry and click the Modify button. The Hyperlinks dialog appears.

•	To modify the hyperlink, select a new link destination type and/or target.


Setting Web picture display options
Setting Web picture display options (Web Publishing mode only)

The Web Picture Properties Wizard helps you set the properties of objects that will be converted to pictures when the publication is exported. For each picture, you can choose a file format or let PagePlus make the selection for you. In addition, you can enter an identifying tag for Web site visitors to read while the image is downloading.

You can run the Wizard to check a single, selected picture; one or more specified pages; or the entire site.

To run the Web Picture Properties Wizard:

•	If you're checking just a single picture, select it first.

•	Choose Web Picture Manager... from the Tools menu.

•	Select which object or page(s) you want the Wizard to check, then click Finish.

The Wizard cycles through pictures in the specified range, and displays each one in turn along with a Web Picture Properties dialog.

For each object, you can choose GIF (best for small graphics) or JPEG (best for photos), or let PagePlus make an automatic selection (the default). In addition, you can enter an identifying tag line for Web site visitors to read while the image is downloading.

Setting the picture format

If you choose Automatic Selection (the default), PagePlus will use built-in criteria to determine the optimum picture format, either .GIF or .JPG (known as JPEG). Both are universally supported by Web browsers.

The GIF format is limited to 256 colors, and uses "lossless" compression so that no actual picture information is discarded. It generally works best for small graphics. Using the automatic option, PagePlus will export most graphics (imported WMFs, line/box graphics, overlapping objects, etc.) as GIF. The GIF export filter applies an optimized 256-color palette.

JPEG is primarily intended for photographic images, and uses a "lossy" compression scheme to preserve picture quality while keeping the file size reasonably small. Using the automatic option, only actual JPEG images or valid bitmaps (stored as TIFFs, device independent bitmaps, etc.) will default to JPEG. JPEG export uses a high-quality option with no discernable loss in quality, but with compression approximately twice that of GIF for a typical photographic image.

Let your own eye be the judge. Your best bet is to retain the Automatic Selection option for all pictures to start with, then preview your site and determine if you want to try a different option for any particular pictures. In particular, set the export type to GIF for bitmaps that use solid colors; otherwise, speckling of the image is likely to occur.

Note: If you prepare non-photographic images in a paint program for use on your Web site, you should preferably save them as GIFs, them import them into PagePlus rather than pasting via the Clipboard or using some other format. This approach makes it less likely that picture quality will suffer when images are output to the Web.

•	For additional background information and tips, see the PagePlus Companion chapter, "Designing for the World Wide Web."

Entering the tag line (alternative text)

The alternative text will appear inside the image frame during the time the image is being loaded into the visitor's Web browser. Depending on the speed of the connection, this could be either a short interval or a "World Wide Wait!" Some Web users turn "image loading" off to speed things up—and in that case the tag line is all they'll see. So it's good practice to enter a concise, descriptive phrase describing each picture.

A word about cropping

In PagePlus 5.0, cropping images using the PagePlus wrap outline (as described in Cropping objects) was not recommended in Web Publishing mode. PagePlus 6.0 removes this restriction—you can use the Crop tool or the crop-to-wrap function freely for standalone graphics. Bear in mind that HTML 3.2 still won't allow overlapping objects; they will be converted to pictures on export. Using HTML 4.0, however, almost anything is possible!


Adding animation effects
Adding animation effects (Web Publishing mode only)

PagePlus lets you add two varieties of eye-catching animation effects to any Web page: animated marquees and GIF animations. Using Wizards, you can preview the animation and/or customize the effect. Once placed into your Web publication, the animations appear static, but they will spring to life once the site has been exported and a visitor views your page in a Web browser.

Note: Bear in mind that animations do add to the "overhead" or load time your page requires, and may not display as quickly on the Web as when previewed in a Wizard.

Animated marquees

The Animated Marquee Wizard prompts you through the steps of adding horizontally scrolling motion to a headline or catch phrase. You can choose the background color, enter from one to three lines of text, and define text properties, scroll direction, speed and alignment for each line. If you like, you can define a URL hyperlink for the marquee. For the most compelling effect, select two lines with strongly contrasting text colors and opposing scroll directions.

To run the Animated Marquee Wizard:

•	Choose Web Object from the Insert menu and select Animated Marquee... from the submenu.

Animated marquees appear as static graphics on the publication page. You can cut, copy, move, and resize them just like other graphics. They will animate when viewed in a Web browser.

To edit an animated marquee you've already defined:

1	Double-click the marquee. The Wizard restarts, with the current settings in place.

2	Step through the Wizard and change the settings as desired.

GIF animations

With the GIF Animation Wizard, you can preview more than 600 supplied animations—small pictures grouped into categories. Use them to illustrate particular themes or just add some fun to your page!

To run the GIF Animation Wizard:

•	Choose Web Object from the Insert menu and select Animated GIF... from the submenu. Follow the Wizard's instructions.

Note: If you chose the default install option, you'll need to have the PagePlus CD-ROM in your CD drive to access the animations.

GIF animations appear as static graphics on the publication page. You can cut, copy, move, and resize them just like other graphics. They will animate when viewed in a Web browser.

To replace one animated GIF with another:

1	Double-click the GIF on the page. The Wizard restarts.

2	Using the Wizard, choose a different animation to replace the first.


Adding sound and video
Adding sound and video (Web Publishing mode only)

PagePlus lets you augment your Web pages with sound and video files in a variety of standard formats, including both non-streaming and streaming media. (Non-streaming files must download in entirety to a user's computer before they begin playing; streaming files require a special player that buffers incoming data and can start playing before the whole clip has arrived.)

There are actually two sound playback options—background sound, where a sound loads and plays automatically when a specific page is first displayed in the visitor's Web browser, and linked sound, triggered by a mouse click (for example on an icon or hyperlinked object). The supported audio formats are .WAV, .AIFF, .AU, MIDI (.mid, .midi), and RealAudio (.ra, .ram).

Linked video works like linked sound. Supported video formats are .AVI, QuickTime (.mov, .qt), MPEG (.mpg, .mpeg, .mpe, .mpv), and RealVideo (.ram, .rv).

With both background and linked sound (or video), you have the option of embedding the source file in your publication, as opposed to keeping it separate. Although embedding any file adds to the size of the publication, it is the default option because you'll no longer have to worry about juggling separate files or the chance of accidentally deleting one of them. When you publish your site, PagePlus takes care of exporting and copying both embedded and non-embedded files.

You won't be able to play back or edit sound or video files in PagePlus; you'll need to use an external media editor. Both types of files tend to take up a lot of space, more or less depending on the method of compression you've used. The large file size translates to long download times for non-streaming files. Media files also tend to be platform-specific: for example, there are different Windows, Mac, and Unix sound file formats. For these reasons, except for very short audio clips, one rarely encounters non-streaming media on the Web. However, if a fast connection is guaranteed, you can get away with using longer/larger non-streaming files. A technically complex alternative is to use streaming media such as RealAudio and RealVideo.

To add background sound to a page:

1	Choose Web Site Properties... from the File menu and select the Page tab.

2	Browse to the sound file you want to add, or enter its path name directly.

3	If you do not wish to embed the file in your publication, uncheck the "Embed" option.
Note: If you choose not to embed your source files, we suggest you keep them together in a subfolder named "Media" or the like. When you publish your site, PagePlus exports and copies both embedded and non-embedded files into a common folder.

4	To have the sound play back as a continuous loop, check "Loop sound". Otherwise, it will play just once.

The sound file will download and play back when the Web page displays in a browser.

With both linked sound and linked video, the basic question is how you want the visitor to be able to trigger the playback of a given media file. PagePlus offers the same basic options for both kinds of media:

1.  From a hyperlinked object or hotspot: You start with an existing object in the publication, and hyperlink it to the media file, or use a hotspot over an image.

2.  From an icon: PagePlus provides an icon pre-linked to the media file. You then position the icon on your page.

3.  From a picture: You select an external picture file, which PagePlus then imports and links to the media file.

4.  Inline: A media "player" will be visible on your published Web page (rather than appearing after the user clicks a link, icon, or picture). In PagePlus, you'll see a marker on the page where the player will appear.

With option 1, the media file remains external and can't be embedded in your publication. Options 2 to 4 give you the choice of embedding the media file.

To add linked sound or video to a page:

•	To link from an object or hotspot (option 1 above), choose Hyperlink... from the Insert menu and select A file on your hard disk as the link target, then locate the media file. For details, follow the links given in option 1.

OR

1	To link from an icon, picture, or inline player (options 2 to 4), choose Web Object... from the Insert menu and select either Sound... or Video... from the submenu.

2	Browse to locate the media file name.

3	Select a link display option.

4	If you do not wish to embed the file in your publication, uncheck the "Embed" option.
Note: If you choose not to embed your source files, we suggest you keep them together in a single subfolder, named "Media" or the like. When you publish your site, PagePlus exports and copies both embedded and non-embedded files into a common folder.

5	Click OK to close the dialog, then click (or click and drag) with the cursor to place the icon, picture, or marker on your page.


Adding Java applets
Adding Java applets (Web Publishing mode only)

Java is a cross-platform, object-oriented programming language used to create mini-applications called applets that can be attached to Web pages and that run when the page is viewed in a Web browser. PagePlus lets you add Java applets to your Web publications. You don't have to write your own! Plenty of applets are available online—for example animation, interface components, live information updating, two-way interaction, graphics rendering, live updating, streaming audio and video, games, and many more.

Downloaded applets typically consist of a main ".class" file and one or more associated files (such as other .class files, picture files, media files, etc.). Again, you don't need to understand the underlying code, but it's essential to make sense of any "Read Me" documentation that comes with the applet. When using PagePlus to embed an applet, you must list its component files as well as any necessary parameters (as described in the applet's documentation) that specify exactly how the applet should run.

When adding a Java applet in PagePlus, you have the option of embedding its files in your publication, as opposed to keeping them separate. Although embedding any file adds to the size of the publication, it is the default option because you'll no longer have to worry about juggling separate files or the chance of accidentally deleting one of them. When you publish your site, PagePlus takes care of exporting and copying both embedded and non-embedded files.

Bear in mind that Java applets won't execute instantly in a visitor's browser. As with image or media files, it will take time to download the applet files to the user's computer before anything "happens" on screen. Take the combined applet file sizes into account when figuring the time it will take the Web page to display.

PagePlus inserts a marker into your publication at the place where the applet will appear on your Web page. You can't actually see the applet running until you preview the exported site. The marker's dimensions probably won't correspond exactly to those of the applet when it's running, so plan your page layout accordingly. Also, bear in mind that a Java applet's user interface may look slightly different on each browser that displays it, even on the same operating system. The more preview tests you can run, for example using both Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer, the better.

To add a Java applet to a page:

1	Choose Web Object... from the Insert menu and select Java Applet... from the submenu.

2	In the dialog, click Browse... to locate the Applet Class File.

3	Click the upper Add.. button to locate any other files required by the applet. You can hold down the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple files in the dialog. To delete a file once you've added it to your list, click the file name and then click the Delete button.

4	If you do not wish to embed the files in your publication, uncheck the "Embed" option.

5	Click the lower Add... button to enter any required parameters (see documentation supplied with the Java applet). Add parameters one at a time, typing the Name and Value (excluding quotation marks) in the fields provided. To delete a parameter from the list (for example if you typed it wrong), click the Up or Down buttons to select the parameter, then click the Delete button below the list.
Note: When you publish your site, PagePlus will export and copy both embedded and non-embedded files into a common folder along with the HTML pages and graphics. Keep this in mind when entering file paths. If the applet's documentation insists on certain components being placed into separate subdirectories, you'll need to place them there "by hand" using an FTP utility.

6	Click OK to close the dialog, then click (or click and drag) with the cursor to place the Java marker on your page.


Adding HTML
Adding HTML (Web Publishing mode only)

While PagePlus's Web Publishing mode doesn't support full-fledged HTML editing, it does allow you to add extra HTML code to a page. Using this approach, you can include HTML fragments generated by another application, copied from another Web page, or perhaps that you've written yourself.

PagePlus inserts a marker into your publication at the site where the HTML code will run. Since you won't be able to see the effect of the HTML until you preview the exported site, be careful to place the marker correctly. You'll definitely want to check your Web page in a browser! If there's a problem, double-check the code you entered and its position on the PagePlus page. If you have some grasp of HTML, examine the page source in a text editor such as Notepad or use your browser's "View Source" mode.

To add HTML code to a page:

1	Choose Web Object... from the Insert menu and select HTML... from the submenu.

2	Enter the HTML code fragment in the scrolling field. To indent lines, press Ctrl+Tab to insert a tab. You can also use Ctrl+C to copy, Ctrl+X to cut, and Ctrl+V to paste via the Clipboard.

3	Click OK to close the dialog, then click (or click and drag) with the cursor to place the HTML marker on your page.


Adding search engine descriptors
Adding search engine descriptors (Web Publishing mode only)

Although they're optional, if you want to increase the likelihood that your Web site will be "noticed" by the major Web search services, you should enter search engine descriptors. Search services maintain catalogs of Web pages, often compiled through the use of "crawlers" or other programs that prowl the Web collecting data on sites and their content. By including descriptive information and keywords, you'll assist these engines in properly categorizing your site. Note that you generally need to register your site's URL with a search provider before it can be included for data collection.

To enter search engine descriptors:

1	Choose Web Site Properties... from the File menu. You'll see the Site tab.

2	In the top window, type in a brief description of your site. Although the description can be any length, the first ten words or so are the most important.

3	In the bottom window, enter any number of keywords (separated by commas) that you think fairly categorize your site. Put yourself in the place of a potential visitor. What keywords might they enter if they were searching for exactly what your site has to offer?


Setting service provider options
Setting service provider options (Web Publishing mode only)

Check the instructions from your Web service provider as to their naming conventions for Home Pages and file extensions. Typically, Home Pages are named INDEX.HTML. Depending on the particular server in use, however, some other name may be required. Likewise, the extension .HTM is sometimes used for pages.

To change the Home Page name and/or file extension (if necessary):

1	Choose Web Site Properties... from the File menu.

2	On the Site tab, enter a new file name and/or extension, as required by your service provider.


Optimizing your Web site
Optimizing your Web site (Web Publishing mode only)

As with a paper publication, preparing a Web site for its unveiling means checking and rechecking the content.

You can use the regular PagePlus checking functions: see the series of How To topics in the "How to Check Your Work" section, starting with Spell-checking.

In Web Publishing mode, you also need to minimize the time each of your Web pages will take to load into a visitor's Web browser—which is directly related to the total file size of the HTML page plus any associated graphics. (To review tips on optimizing text and graphics, see Web page layout fundamentals.)

Prior to publishing your Web site to the World Wide Web, you'll want to "publish" it to a local hard disk (see next topic) and preview it in your own Web browser. Bear in mind that load times will be considerably slower over the Web, unless a visitor has an exceptionally fast connection.

Using Windows Explorer, you can check the file sizes of the items in your site's folder. As a rule of thumb, keep the total size (HTML plus graphics) per page to around 50K. The Home Page can be larger—people expect to wait a bit longer for this—but again, the smaller the better.

The Web Site Layout Checker can inspect for (and often correct) text-specific problems, overlapping objects, or other conditions that will result in file sizes that are larger than necessary. For details on using the Layout Checker, see Automatic layout checking.


Publishing a Web site to a local folder
Publishing a Web site to a local folder (Web Publishing mode only)

Even though you may have saved your "Web site" as a PagePlus publication, it's not truly a Web site until you've converted it to HTML files and graphics files in a form that can be viewed in a Web browser. In PagePlus, this conversion process is called "publishing" the site. You can publish the site either to a local folder (on a hard disk) or to the World Wide Web itself. To review the basics, see Getting started in Web mode.

Publishing the site to a local folder lets you preview the pages in your own browser prior to publishing them on the Web. You may find it convenient to keep your browser program open, and go back and forth between PagePlus and the browser. This way you can make changes to a single page in PagePlus, publish just the one page, then switch to your browser and preview that page to make sure everything appears just as you want it.

To publish the site to a local folder:

1	Choose Publish Site from the File menu and select to Disk Folder... from the submenu.

2	In the Publish to Folder dialog, locate the folder where you wish to store the output files, or click New Folder to create a new folder.

3	To publish only one page (or a range of pages), specify the page (or pages) to publish. This can save a lot of time by skipping the export of pages you haven't changed.

4	If using HTML 3.2, set additional options if desired (see note below).

5	Click OK.

Note: If you're exporting the publication in HTML 3.2 format (see the subtopic HTML 3.2 and HTML 4.0), the dialog includes two additional choices:

•	If you uncheck the Create a separate file for each page box, the pages in your publication will be combined ("stacked" vertically) to create a single page; this option is not generally recommended.

•	Usually, Web pages align with the left margin of a user's browser. You can choose the Center pages option instead—but again, make sure circumstances warrant this unusual format.

After PagePlus has finished exporting the selected pages, you'll be asked if you want to run a Web browser to preview your pages. Answering Yes will open a new instance of your designated Web browser on the first exported page. To preview pages if your browser is already open, answer No (to avoid opening a new instance of the browser), then switch to the browser and open the HTML file for the page using the browser's Open File or Reload command. See the next topic for more information on previewing your site.

Page and file names

By default, the published page 1 (the Home Page) has the file name INDEX.HTML so that Web browsers can locate it. (You can change this default if necessary using Web Site Properties.) Subsequent pages (which must of course have unique file names) are named "index-2.html, index-3.html," and so on, by default. If you're about to overwrite an existing file name, PagePlus will prompt you before proceeding.

Graphic files are numbered consecutively so that no file name is likely to be reused. Each time you publish a page, its graphic files are re-exported with new file names.


Previewing your Web site in a browser
Previewing your Web site in a browser (Web Publishing mode only)

Previewing your site in a Web browser is an essential step before publishing it to the World Wide Web. It's the only way you can see just how your PagePlus publication will appear to a visitor. Bear in mind that pages generally load much more quickly from a hard disk than they will over the Web. If performance is sluggish from a hard disk, it's time to subtract some graphics, divide the content into more (and smaller) pages, or run the Layout Checker again.

To preview your Web site from a local hard disk:

•	Choose Publish Site from the File menu and select to Disk Folder... from the submenu. After publishing the site (or selected pages), answer Yes when asked if you want to run a Web browser to preview your pages.

OR

•	Choose Preview Site in Browser... from the File menu. You can specify the page range and (if using HTML 3.2) set additional options. Then the publication is exported to a temporary folder.

OR

•	(if you've previously published the site to a folder) Open your Web browser and use its Open File command to display a page from the site, usually the INDEX.HTML (Home Page) file.

You may find it convenient to keep your browser program open, and go back and forth between PagePlus and the browser. This way you can make changes to a single page in PagePlus, publish just the one page, then switch to your browser and preview that page to make sure everything appears just as you want it. See the previous topic Publishing to a local folder.


Publishing to the World Wide Web
Publishing to the World Wide Web (Web Publishing mode only)

Publishing to the World Wide Web involves a few more steps, but is basically as simple as publishing to a local folder! Read through the following steps carefully before you try, and have the necessary information at hand. If you still have basic questions about the process, you may wish to revisit the topic Getting started in Web mode.

To publish your site to the World Wide Web:

1	Choose Publish to Web... from the File menu and select to Web... from the submenu. The Web Publishing Options dialog appears.

• The dialog is preset to publish all the pages in your document. To publish one page, or a range of pages, check Pages and enter the starting and ending page under Page Range. This can save a lot of time by skipping the export of pages you haven't changed.

• If you're exporting the publication in HTML 3.2 format (see the subtopic HTML 3.2 and HTML 4.0), the Options dialog includes two additional choices. Unless you want to combine the pages in your document into one long page, leave the "Create a separate file for each page" box checked. Usually, Web pages align with the left margin of a user's browser. You can choose the "Center pages" option instead—but again, make sure circumstances warrant this unusual format.

2	Click OK, and PagePlus begins exporting pages to temporary files. Once exporting is complete, the Specify Account Details dialog appears.

• To publish to VisualCities, leave the FTP Address as "ftp.visualcities.com". Alternatively, enter the address of an alternate Web server. (If using an alternate Web server, be sure to review the section on "Gathering server information" below.)

• Enter your Username and Password. Be sure to enter the password exactly as given to you, using correct upper- and lower-case spelling, or the host server will not recognize it.

• If you wish, check the "Save Password" box and PagePlus will "remember" your password the next time you publish.

• If publishing to VisualCities, leave the Folder box blank. VisualCities automatically looks up your publishing folder. (Alternate Web servers, however, may require this information.)

3	Click OK, and PagePlus seeks an Internet connection, then transfers your Web files to the host server you've designated. Any files with duplicate names are overwritten. You'll see a message when all files have been successfully copied.

4	You'll be able to see your page(s) "live" on the Web immediately. Point your Web browser to the URL including the path to the host server plus the folder to which you published. For VisualCities, the folder is the Site Name you selected when you registered. For example, if your VisualCities Site Name is sitename, then your Home page can be found at:
    http://members.visualcities.com/sitename/

5	Congratulations! (And when you're done admiring your site, don't forget to disconnect from the Internet...)

Gathering server information

The first time you publish to a particular server, you'll be prompted to enter basic information, such as server's URL. On many services (as with VisualCities), your personal publishing directory is just your screen (user) name appended to a standard URL.

However, if your account is with a specialized Internet service provider, or you're using a dial-up networking connection or some other arrangement, you may need to do a bit more research to determine the required information. For example, you should verify beforehand:

•	The steps needed to connect to the server, whether via LAN (intranet) or Dial-up Networking connection

•	Your user name and password

•	Which transfer protocol the server supports: FTP or Windows file transfer


Spell-checking

The Spelling Checker Wizard lets you check the spelling of a single word, selected text, a single story, or all stories in your publication. You can use the Wizard from either PagePlus or WritePlus. WritePlus also offers an AutoSpell feature that highlights possible problem words.

To start the Spelling Checker Wizard:

From PagePlus...

•	To check a single story, first make sure the text or frame is selected.

•	Choose Spelling Checker... from the Tools menu.

From WritePlus...

•	To check a specific region of text, first drag to select the text region.

•	To check all text past a certain point, first click to insert a blinking cursor at that point.

•	Click the [image] Spell Check button.

To set choices in the Spelling Checker Wizard:

•	Click to select the scope of the search.

•	To ignore words in certain categories, click I want to set the spell options.

When a problem is found, WritePlus opens with the problem word highlighted, and the Check Spelling correction dialog appears. In the dialog, you can choose to replace or skip any or all instances of the problem word, with the option of adding the problem word to your dictionary.

For details, access the Check Spelling dialog and right-click any control for context-sensitive help.

Spell checking continues until you click the Close button or the spell-check is completed. To save any alterations made to the last story spell-checked, close WritePlus in the normal way.

To check the spelling of a single word:

•	Start the Spelling Checker Wizard and click the QuickSpell... button

•	Type a word and click Spell. The dialog reports a possible spelling error and suggests alternative spellings.


Automatic proofreading

The Proof Reader Wizard checks for grammar and readability errors in selected text, a single story, or all stories in your publication. You can use the Wizard from either PagePlus or WritePlus.

To start the Proof Reader Wizard:

From PagePlus...

•	To check a single story, first make sure the text or frame is selected.

•	Choose Proof Reader... from the Tools menu.

From WritePlus...

•	To check a specific region of text, first drag to select the text region.

•	To check all text past a certain point, first click to insert a blinking cursor at that point.

•	Click the [image] Proof Reader button.

To set choices in the Proof Reader Wizard:

•	Click to select the scope of the search.

•	To set options for spell-checking, level of formality, and rule types, click I want to set the proof options.

When a possible problem is found, WritePlus opens with the problem text highlighted, and the Proof Reader correction dialog appears. In the dialog, you can choose to correct or ignore the problem, skip the sentence, or ignore the grammar rule in future, with the option of adding the problem instance to your database.

For details, access the Proof Reader dialog and right-click any control for context-sensitive help.

Proofreading continues until you click the Close button or the check is completed. To save any alterations made to the last story checked, close WritePlus in the normal way.


Using the thesaurus

The Thesaurus lets you find synonyms, definitions, and variations of words in your publication text. You can use the Thesaurus from either PagePlus or WritePlus.

To display the Thesaurus:

From PagePlus...

•	To look up a specific word on the page, first drag to highlight it.

•	Choose Thesaurus... from the Tools menu.

From WritePlus...

•	To look up a specific word in a story, first drag to highlight it.

•	Click the [image] Thesaurus button.

Using the Thesaurus:

Enter a word in the "Replace/Look Up" box and click the Look Up button. If the word entered is found in the thesaurus database:

•	The word looked up is moved to the "Entry" box.

•	The "Senses/Meanings" box displays a list of definitions for the word in the "Entry" box. Initially, the first definition is selected. The "Full Sense/Meaning" box shows a fuller description of the selected definition.

•	The "Synonyms" box lists synonyms for the definition selected in the "Senses/Meanings" box. Initially, the first synonym appears in the "Replace/Look Up" box.

To pop a new word into the "Replace/Look Up" box:

•	Click the word in the Synonyms list.

You can navigate through the thesaurus by selecting the specific meaning, followed by the specific synonym you are interested in and then clicking on the Look Up button to get a new range of meanings and synonyms for the new word.

To replace the original word (selected in your text) with the word in the "Replace/Look Up" box:

•	Click the Replace button.

To exit the thesaurus:

•	Click the Cancel button.


Checking fonts and resources used

The Fonts and Resources Manager lists the fonts and resources used in your publication, and shows if the pictures are linked to external picture files or embedded within the document.

To display the Fonts and Pictures dialog:

•	Choose Fonts & Resources Manager... from the Tools menu.

Fonts section

The Fonts section of the dialog lists fonts used in the publication. If you are copying a publication to take to a different computer, you should check that the fonts used are available on the new computer.

To display the font type:

•	Click on the font name.

The font type (TrueType, Printer, or System) appears below the Fonts section.

In general, use only TrueType fonts. These are standard, printer-independent Windows fonts. Take particular care using printer-dependent fonts, as the new machine may be using a different printer driver.

Resources

The Resources section lists imported pictures, media, Java applets, etc. and shows whether each is linked or embedded. "Linked" data consists of a reference to the original file. If you copy or move a publication with linked resources, for example from one computer to another, you should also copy any resource files linked to the publication.

To display the path name for a resource:

•	Click on the resource name.

•	The path appears below the Resources section.

To control whether pictures you import are linked or embedded:

•	Choose Options... from the Tools menu and click the Picture tab.

•	Set your preferences for linking and embedding.


Optimizing pictures for printing

The Photo Optimizer Wizard helps you to improve the print quality of a selected bitmap picture on a specific printer. The Wizard lets you print test samples and choose the best brightness/contrast settings, which are then applied when the publication is printed. You'll see the most dramatic results with photographic images using many colors or shades of gray.

To optimize a bitmap picture for printing:

•	Select the picture.

•	Choose Picture from the Format menu and select Photo Optimizer... from the submenu.

•	Follow instructions in the Photo Optimizer Wizard.


Reviewing text content with the Text Manager

The Text Manager displays a list of all the text stories and free text used in your publication.

To display the Text Manager:

•	Click on the Frame Info box on the Standard toolbar.

OR

•	Choose Text Manager... from the Tools menu.

The upper window displays stories, arranged alphabetically by story title (or source file name) as shown in the Frame Info box. The lower window lists free text arranged by page number. The lists include the first line (if any) of each text block.

To display any text:

•	Select the entry and click the Display button.

To edit the text in WritePlus:

•	Double-click the entry.

OR

•	Select the entry and click the Edit button.

WritePlus opens, displaying the selected text.

Tip: To change the title of a story, click the Word Count button in WritePlus.


Automatic layout checking

The Layout Checker Wizard searches your publication for common layout problems, such as objects off the page, unused text in a story, and empty frames. If problems are found, the Layout Checker displays a recommended solution and in many cases can fix the problem automatically.

To run the Layout Checker Wizard:

•	Choose Layout Checker... from the Tools menu.

You can specify which problems the Wizard should check for. Depending on the publishing mode, options include:

(In Paper Publishing mode)

•	Objects wholly or partly outside the printable area, including pasteboard objects

•	Unused text in a story (overflow text which isn't on any page)

•	Empty frames

•	Blank pages

•	Misalignment of text lines in adjacent columns

•	Widows and orphans (single lines of text at the top or bottom of a page)

•	Overspaced text (too much space between words)

•	Overset text (text which doesn't fit on its line)

(In Web Publishing mode)

Note: This list of potential problems applies to HTML 3.2 export. If you're using HTML 4.0 mode, far fewer conditions are likely to cause problems. See the subtopic HTML 3.2 and HTML 4.0.

•	Text problems (properties that cannot be displayed correctly on the Web):

--Point size not 10, 12, 14, 18, 24 or 36 pt

--Font not Arial, Times New Roman, Courier or Symbol

--Letterspacing not 0%, width not 100%, leading not between 120-130%

--Advance, strikethrough, outline, slant, or small caps used

--Space above or below

--Text justified or force-justified

--Pattern used

--Dropped cap or text lines set

--Indent set for frame text (indent OK for free text)

•	Overlapping object problems (text that will become a graphic):

--Text overlaps another object

--Text is rotated or cropped

•	Long download times (your publication will be slow to download from the Web for the average user):

--Area that will become a graphic results in graphic larger than 300 x 200 pixels

•	Other problems:

--Objects not on the page or not entirely on the page

--Unreachable pages (pages that cannot be reached by hyperlinks from page 1)

--Page size too large

--More than 1" of blank space at the top of the page

--Unused text in story

The Wizard proceeds through the selected range of pages and displays each problem region in turn. You can examine the problem, fix it on the spot, and/or click the Continue button to continue checking.


Previewing the printed page

The Print Preview button changes the screen view to display your layout without frames, guides, rulers, and other screen items. Special options, such as tiled output or crop marks, are not displayed.

To preview the printed page:

•	Click the [image] Print Preview button on the HintLine toolbar.

OR

•	Choose Print Preview from the File menu.


Basic printing

PagePlus supports scaling, tiling, color separations, and many other useful printing options. If you're working with a service bureau or commercial printer and need to provide PostScript output, see the topic Generating professional output.

To set up your printer or begin printing:

•	Click the [image] Print button on the Standard toolbar.

OR

•	Choose Print... from the File menu, or after right-clicking on the page or pasteboard.

The Print dialog appears.

To print:

1	If necessary, click the Properties... button to select a printer or set up the printer for the correct page size, etc.
Note: Depending on your printer driver, to print text with shading or custom slant settings, you may need to select the Fonts tab and check the option to "Download TrueType Fonts as bitmap soft fonts."

2	If necessary, click the Options... button to set special print options (see below).

3	Select the page range to be printed.

4	Select the number of copies.

5	Click OK.

The pages will be printed in color on a color printer or in shades of gray on a black and white printer.

Setting print options

Use the Options dialog to select from a range of printing choices. The Preview window shows a line view of your publication setup. Note: Print options are reset each time PagePlus is restarted. Changes you make during a session are "remembered" for the duration of the session. You can save settings as a custom scheme for use in later sessions.

•	Check the "Print as thumbnails" box and set the "per sheet" option to print multiple pages at a reduced size on each printed sheet. For details, see Printing special formats.

•	Check the "Color Separate" box to specify that color separations are to be printed. Click the Color Options... button to set further parameters. For details, see Printing color separations.

•	Click the Load... button select a saved printer scheme, or the Save... button to save the current scheme. For details, see Saving printer schemes.

Tiling

•	Check the "Tile" option to print large (or enlarged) pages using multiple sheets of paper.

Each section or tile is printed on a single sheet of paper; the various tiles can then be joined to form the complete page. Use this option for printing at larger sizes than the maximum paper size of your printer, typically for creating banners and posters. To simplify arrangement of the tiles and to allow for printer margins, you can specify an overlap value.

Scaling

•	Set the "Scale" option to specify a custom scaling percentage. The default is 100% or normal size.

•	To scale your work to be printed at a larger size, specify a larger value; to scale down, specify a smaller value. Select "Scale to fit printer paper size" to adjust artwork automatically to fit neatly on the printed page.

Printing Crop Marks

•	Check the "Print Crop Marks" box to generate small markers on the printed page, marking the page dimensions of the artwork.

The printer page size must be at least 1" x 1" larger than the actual artwork being printed, to ensure that the marks will be entirely visible on the final print. For PostScript printing, the Windows printer driver normally has some "extra" page sizes which can be used with standard artwork paper sizes.

Printing file information

•	Check the "Print File Information" box to include information such time, date, and publication name below the actual artwork of the page.

The printer page size must be at least 1" x 1" larger than the actual artwork being printed, to ensuer that the information is entirely visible on the final print. For PostScript printing, the Windows printer driver normally has some "extra" page sizes which can be used with standard artwork paper sizes.

Suppressing pictures

•	Check the "Suppress Pictures" box to print hairline place holder boxes in place of the pictures in the publication.

This has two uses: (1) to speed up printing of quick proofs, and (2) to leave markers for pictures to be added manually at a later stage of the production process.

Including OPI comments

The Open Prepress Interface (OPI) is a set of PostScript language comment conventions that allow PagePlus to pass layout information about imported bitmap images to an OPI-compatible system. OPI comments describe the placement, size, rotation and cropping of imported bitmap pictures so that the OPI server can insert high-quality pictures before printing the page(s).

•	Check the "Include OPI Comments" box to include these comments.

For more information...

For a discussion of desktop printing techniques, or if you are considering using commercial print services to reproduce your work, see the "Production Issues" chapter in the PagePlus Companion for a discussion of commercial and color printing.


Printing special formats

Using special PagePlus printing options, you can create a variety of publication types, such as thumbnails, booklets, posters, and banners. Click the Options... button in the Print dialog.

Printing thumbnails

Click the Options... button in the Print dialog and set the "Print as thumbnails" option to print multiple pages at a reduced size on each printed sheet. Specify the number of thumbnails per sheet in the value box. PagePlus will print each page of the publication at a reduced size, with the specified number of small pages or "thumbnails" neatly positioned on each printed sheet.

Printing booklets

PagePlus automatically performs imposition of folded publications (you no longer have to set a special "Print As Booklet" option). Use File/Page Setup... and select or define a Folded Publication type. The settings ensure that two or four pages of the publication are printed on each sheet of paper, with pages printed following the booklet sequence. This saves you from having to calculate how to position and collate pairs of pages on a single larger page, and lets you use automatic page numbering for the booklet pages.

To produce double-sided sheets, use your printer's double-sided option or run sheets through twice, printing first the front and then the back of the sheet (reverse top and bottom between runs). The sheets can then be collated and bound at their center to produce a booklet, with all the pages in the correct sequence. With complex setups, you may wish to use commercial printing.

Printing posters and banners

Posters and banners are large-format publications where the page size extends across multiple sheets of paper. To have PagePlus take care of the printing, set up your publication beforehand using File/Page Setup... (the "Large Publications" option) to preview and select a particular preset arrangement.

Even if the publication isn't set up as a poster or banner, you can use the "Tile" setting in the Print/Options... dialog to print onto multiple sheets from a standard size page. Each section or tile is printed on a single sheet of paper, and the various tiles can then be joined to form the complete page. To simplify arrangement of the tiles and to allow for printer margins, you can specify an overlap value.

To print a poster or banner from a standard page:

1	First create your standard (e.g. letter) sized page.

2	Set the Tile option for overlapped multiple sheets.

3	Set Scaling to print at a larger size (e.g. 300% ).


Printing color separations

Using PagePlus, you can print both spot-color and process-color separations. For further information on color separations, see the "Production Issues" chapter in the PagePlus Companion.

To set color separation options:

1	Click the Options... button in the Print dialog

2	Check the Color Separate... box.

3	Click the Color Options... button.

Choosing the color separation type

•	Select Process to select process color output.

This option is only available if the currently selected Windows printer is a PostScript printer.

Normally, process color output gives you four sheets or "separations" per publication page: one each for the Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and blacK (CMYK) ink components of the objects on the page.

If any PANTONE Spot Colors are used in your publication and the "Convert Pantone Spot Colors to Process" option is not checked, the PANTONE Spot colors used in the publication will also be shown in the "colors used" list and a separate "Spot Color Separation" sheet will be printed for each of the PANTONE Spot colors used.

Only the color separations that are selected in the "Colors used" list will be printed. You can select or deselect a color by clicking on it, or click the Print All button to choose all the colors.

•	Select Spot to select spot color output.

Spot color output gives you one sheet or "separation" for each color used on each publication page. The "Colors used" list shows how many separations will be produced for each page.

Only the color separations that are selected in the "Colors used" list will be printed. You can select or deselect a color by clicking on it, or choose all the colors using the Print All button.

Note that bitmaps cannot be color-separated in spot color.

Selecting other options

Convert Pantone Spot Colors to Process

Select this option if you create your publication using colors from the Pantone Spot color palette (see Specifying PANTONE colors) and want to print your page using the standard four-color (CMYK) process separation colors. This will cause the PANTONE colors to be converted to the best process color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black) equivalent.

Auto Trapping

Select this option to reduce the alignment problems that occur when printing using several color separations. In brief, if you have two different colored objects which overlap, they will appear on different printing plates. Because printing presses can never exactly align the multiple printing plates, a small "gap" can be left at the edge where the two objects overlap.

Auto trapping tries to reduce this error by making the edges where the objects overlap very slightly intersect. The auto-trapping values can be adjusted in the Settings... dialog, but typically the default values will suffice.

Overprint Black

Select this option (normally checked) to print the black component of objects being printed using color separations on top of the other colors. This may sound strange, but because black ink is very dark, it can be printed on top of other colors without affecting its own color. This reduces "trapping" errors as there is no "edge" between a black object and the object it overlaps. Because of this, the thin white "gaps" normally caused by trapping problems will not occur with black objects.

This is especially useful when printing fine black text on colored tint (shaded) backgrounds, as it is notoriously difficult to prevent trapping problems if the black is not overprinted.

Note that the overprint black setting does not affect how imported vector pictures are color separated.

Paper Type

Select the appropriate paper type on to which your printer will print your work. The associated "screen angle" and "screen frequency" settings are automatically set.

If you are a printing expert and require nonstandard settings, select the "Custom" paper type and adjust the values in the Settings dialog.

Adjusting Settings

•	Click the Settings... button to access the Settings dialog.

Trapping

The Trapping settings adjust the values used when the "Auto Trapping" option is checked. Generally, these values should be left unaltered. For details, right-click on any control in the dialog for context-sensitive help.

Paper Type Settings

These options let you view the screen angles and frequencies for process-color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom," the values can be modified.

Black Ink

These two settings affect the amount of black used when printing color bitmap pictures using process-color separations. The precise workings require a good technical knowledge of bitmap pictures and process color. Generally, these values should be left unaltered. For details, right-click on any control in the dialog for context-sensitive help.

Ink Correction

"Ink correction" is used to try and adjust ink colors to take account of ink impurities, and the difference between screen and output colors. Ink correction does not affect objects which have been recolored to a PANTONE color. PANTONE colors have already been pre-matched to make the screen reflect the final print as accurately as possible. Generally, these values should be left unaltered.


Generating professional output

Beyond printing your own copies on a desktop printer, or having copies photoreproduced at a quick print shop, you may wish to consider professional (offset) printing. For example, if you need to reproduce more than about 500 copies of a piece, photocopying begins to lose its economic advantages. Or you may need spot color or process color printing (see the previous topic) for a particular job.

A standard way of delivering a desktop publication to a commercial printer or service bureau is to generate one or more PostScript® files that can be passed along on disk or via modem to the bureau. (PostScript is a page description language developed by Adobe to handle communication between computers and printers.) Producing a PostScript file is a straightforward process. When printing your PagePlus publication, you specify a PostScript printer (or printer driver) as the target, and instead of printing out sheets of paper, you check the "Print to File" option. The driver takes care of generating the PostScript file(s), and you deliver the file(s) to the print firm.

In practice, there are so many options for setting up a PostScript driver, and so many different imagesetting systems in use by commercial print firms, that you'll need to fine-tune your system settings precisely to match the requirements of the printer with whom you're working. Good communication with your printing partner is really the key here, and cannot be overemphasized. Make sure you're using a satisfactory PostScript printer driver and have set it up exactly the way the firm has advised. For a comprehensive overview of commercial printing options, and lots of suggestions on how to get great results, see the "Production Issues" chapter in the PagePlus Companion.

The PagePlus Professional Print Wizard steps you through the series of choices you'll need to make in order to set up your system for successful PostScript output. You'll still need to set up your PostScript driver properly, following the print firm's instructions.

To install a PostScript printer driver and set properties:

1	Click the Windows Start button and choose Settings, then choose Printers from the submenu.

2	Double-click Add Printer and choose an appropriate printer option.

3	To access driver properties, right-click the printer's icon in the Printers folder.

Before running the Professional Print Wizard, you'll need to know:

•	What type of output your require: a single composite containing all colors, process (CMYK) color separations, or spot color.

•	What type of paper your document will be printed on.

•	Which installed PostScript printer driver you'll be using.

•	The publication's page size.

•	Whether you want to print each page to a separate file and/or print each separation to a separate file. (Smaller output files are more easily transferable to a service bureau.)

To run the Professional Print Wizard:

•	Choose Professional Print Wizard from the File menu.

The Wizard prompts you through a series of choice screens, and sets up printing options accordingly, checking to ensure your selections are consistent with the settings in your document. For example, if you opt for spot color but your publication has more than three colors (the usual limit for this method), you'll get a reminder.

Notes

•	Each time PagePlus restarts, the print options are reset to standard defaults. After you've run the Professional Print Wizard, some of the options may have changed. You can double-check the option settings from the Print dialog (click the Options... button) prior to actually printing to the PostScript file. Should you need to make further last-minute changes (for example, a custom setting required by your print bureau, or a limited set of spot color separations), you can do so at this point. Those changed settings will then be "remembered" for the duration of your session.

•	You're not required to run the Professional Print Wizard in order to generate PostScript output—nothing prevents you from using the existing PagePlus dialog boxes to set up your output "by hand" as needed. Again, any changes you make to print options are "remembered" for the duration of the session.

•	Another option for delivering files to a bureau or commercial printer is Adobe's PDF (Portable Document Format). PDF is being used increasingly to distribute documents as electronic "replicas" over the Web. Anyone using Adobe's Acrobat Reader, regardless of their computer platform, can view and/or print out your publication in its original form. To generate a PDF file, you'll need to "distill" your publication (or an existing PostScript file) using a utility such as Acrobat Distiller or PDFWriter.


Saving printer schemes

You can save the current combination of settings made in the Print dialog as one of three standard printer schemes:—Default, Process Color Separate, or Spot Color Separate—or as a custom scheme with a unique name.

Custom is selected when you've changed a setting to be different from the scheme last loaded. For example, you can create a "Poster" scheme which has scaling set to 300%, with the tiling option turned on.

To save current print settings as a scheme:

•	Click the Save As... button next to the Scheme box.

•	Select the type of scheme to save, or type in a new name, and click OK.


Applying colors and transparency

For an illustrated introduction to using colors in PagePlus, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Colors and Color Schemes.

Line and fill color and shading are standard properties of graphic objects (lines, boxes, or shapes), while color and shade are character properties of free text, frame text blocks, and selected text regions. Text frames can have a fill color, too, independent of the characters they contain. You can also colorize a paint-type (bitmap) picture—recolor it to another color and/or shade. If you recolor a full-color picture, the colors will convert to shades of the specified color. If you apply shading only to a full-color picture, you can produce a low-intensity picture (useful for backgrounds behind text).

The easiest way to apply colors and shading to an object is to use the Studio's Colors panel.

 The Normal Colors group provides samples of available colors from the PagePlus color palette.

 The Shades group is used to modify an applied color. The shade is a tint of the current color between 100% (solid color) and 10% (faint). For example, if black is the current color, the samples shown are shades of gray.

For details on using the Scheme Colors group, see the next topic.

To apply a color or shade to an object:

1	Select the object using the Pointer tool, or the Text tool to highlight a region of text.

2	Click Colors on the Studio toolbar to display the Colors panel.

3	Select the box and right-click a sample in the Normal Colors or Shades group, then choose either Apply to Line or Apply to Fill. (Left-clicking a sample applies the color or shade to the selected object's fill.)

Notes on applying colors

•	You can also drag fill colors from the Colors panel onto any object.

•	To modify a color or define a new color, right-click any color sample and choose Color Manager.... For details, see the topic Creating your own colors.

•	The first cell of the Normal Colors group shows either [image] (Clear, for objects with line/fill properties), which gives the object a transparent interior; or [image] (Original, for pictures only) which resets the object to its original colors.

•	 (Web Color, Web Publishing mode only) is a "placeholder color" for Web page text or graphics. For details on specifying colors in Web publications, see Choosing Web site colors.

•	The [Register] color shown in certain dialog lists is used to create custom registration marks for color separations. It will appear as black on all output sheets.

•	Graphics: For a full property dialog, including line or fill types, weights, colors, patterns, etc., right-click the object and choose Line... or Fill..., or select the object and choose Line... or Fill... from the Format menu.

•	Text: For a full property dialog, right-click and choose Character..., or select the text and choose Character... from the Format menu.
Depending on your printer driver, to print text with shading or custom slant settings, you may need to set the driver to download TrueType as soft fonts. Choose Print... from the File menu, click the Properties... button and select the Fonts tab. Check the option to "Download TrueType Fonts as bitmap soft fonts."

•	Pictures: For a full property dialog, right-click the object and choose Picture Properties..., or select the object and choose Picture from the Format menu, then Properties... from the submenu.

•	Draw-type images: Using the Color Mapper, you can make extensive color changes to draw-type (vector) images and vector-based OLE objects. See Changing or copying image colors.

Setting picture transparency

You can designate any one color of any paint-type (bitmap) image as a transparent color. The resulting image appears as transparent in PagePlus, allowing you to adjust position and scaling with precision. Transparency is especially useful if you're preparing a publication for the World Wide Web or some other non-paper format, and need to place an odd-shaped logo or graphic over some other element.

To set picture transparency:

1	Select the picture, right-click, and choose Picture Properties....

2	Check the "Use Transparency" box, then click the Color... button.

3	In the dialog, move the eye dropper tool around the preview image to see a readout of RGB values. Click when the readout shows the color you want to mark as transparent.

4	Click OK twice to close the dialogs.

For notes on the 256-color .GIF format, commonly used for transparent Web images, see Setting Web picture display options.


Using color schemes

For an illustrated introduction to using color schemes in PagePlus, take a moment now to view the QuickTour, Colors and Color Schemes.

A color scheme in PagePlus is a cluster of five complementary colors that you can apply to specific elements in one or more publications. The Studio's Color Schemes panel displays over 50 preset schemes from which to choose when you create a Page Wizard publication. Each publication can have just one color scheme at a time; the current scheme is highlighted in the Color Schemes panel. You can easily switch schemes, modify scheme colors, apply schemes to any publication, even create your own custom schemes. Color schemes are saved globally, so the full set of schemes is always available.

You'll probably first encounter color schemes after creating a Page Wizard publication. Quite often, you'll have chosen a particular scheme while completing the Wizard process, but now want try out a different set of colors.

To select a different color scheme:

1	Click Color Schemes on the Studio toolbar. (For Page Wizard publications, the Wizard panel also displays the color scheme samples; click Color Schemes in the Wizard Questions group.)
You'll see the current scheme highlighted in the list.

2	Click a different color scheme sample. Any regions in the publication that have been assigned one of the five color scheme numbers (see below) are updated with the corresponding color from the new scheme.

You can repeat this selection process indefinitely. When you save a publication, its current color scheme is saved along with the document.

How color schemes work

Imagine creating a paint-by-numbers layout, starting with a line drawing and using five colors of paint, stored in jars labeled 1 through 5. You'd write the numbers 1 through 5 on various regions of the drawing, depending on the effect you wanted. Swapping different colors into the paint jars, while keeping the numbers on the drawing the same, would produce quite a different painting. Color schemes in PagePlus work in much the same way.

	• In PagePlus, the "paint jars" are five numbers you can assign to objects in your publication. They're known as "Scheme Color 1," "Scheme Color 2," and so on. When you apply a scheme color number to an object, it's like saying, "Put the color from jar number one here."
•	The Color Schemes panel shows the various schemes, each with a different set of five colors in the five "jars." Whichever named color scheme you select—from Abacus down to Wildflower—that scheme's first color (as shown in its sample) will appear in regions defined as Scheme Color 1, its second color will map to Scheme Color 2, and so on throughout the publication.

The example below shows three different schemes applied to a design that's been marked with Scheme Colors 1 through 5 as in the example above.

Modifying and creating color schemes

If you've tried various color schemes but haven't found one that's quite right, you can modify any of the colors in an existing scheme, or create your own named scheme from scratch.

To modify or create a color scheme:

1	Right-click any color scheme sample (in the Color Schemes or Wizard panels) and choose Color Schemes.... You'll see the Color Schemes tab of the Color Manager.

2	To modify an existing scheme, select its name in the scrolling list and click Modify Scheme.... To create a new scheme, click New Scheme....

3	In the dialog that appears, each of the five scheme color numbers has its own drop-down list, showing available RGB colors in the PagePlus palette. To set or change the color assigned to a particular number, simply select an RGB color from the list. If defining a new color scheme, enter a name for the scheme at the top. When you're done, click OK.

The same dialog also lets you edit the special components associated with particular color schemes in Web publishing mode (see the topic Choosing Web site colors). The Color Manager's Colors tab lets you add custom colors to the PagePlus palette (see the next topic).

Applying scheme colors to new objects

If you create new elements in a Page Wizard publication, or start a publication from scratch, how can you extend a color scheme to the new objects? Although you'll have to spend some time working out which color combinations look best, the mechanics of the process are simple. Recalling the paint-by-numbers example above, all you need to do is assign one of the five scheme color numbers to an object's line and/or fill.

To assign a scheme color to an object:

1	Click Colors on the Studio toolbar to display the Colors panel. The five colors in the current scheme appear as numbered samples in the Scheme Colors group at the top of the panel.

2	Select the object and, in the Scheme Colors group, right-click the sample of the scheme color you want to apply. Choose either Apply to Line or Apply to Fill.

If an object's fill uses a scheme color, the corresponding sample will be highlighted in the Scheme Colors group whenever the object is selected—just as with fill colors from the Normal Colors group.

Notes:

•	If you copy an object using scheme colors to another publication, it will take on that publication's color scheme. Don't be surprised if the object's color(s) change—they're supposed to!

•	You can use the Color Mapper to apply scheme colors to draw-type (vector) images and vector-based OLE objects. See Changing or copying image colors.


Creating your own colors

The Color Manager lets you add, remove, or modify colors in the PagePlus color palette (color table). You can also use the Color Mapper to add selected colors from draw-type images to the palette (see the next topic).

Note: Normally, the contents of the PagePlus color palette are just saved locally, along with a publication's current defaults. That is, they don't carry over to new publications. If you've created new colors, you can use the Save Defaults command to record the color settings globally, so they will be available whenever you create a new publication. For details, see Updating and saving defaults.

To display the Color Manager:

•	Right-click any color sample in the Studio's Colors or Color Schemes panel and choose Color Manager....

OR

•	Choose Color Manager... from the Tools menu.

The Color Manager appears. Select the Colors tab if it's not in front.

To create a new color:

•	Click the New Color... button. The Custom Color Selector dialog appears. (See below.)

To modify a selected color:

•	Click the Modify Color... button. The Custom Color Selector dialog appears. (See below.)

To remove a selected color:

•	Click the Remove Color button.

To add a PANTONE® color to the palette:

•	Click the Add PANTONE® Color button.

PANTONE refers to Pantone, Inc.'s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials. For details, see Specifying PANTONE® colors.

Using the Custom Color Selector to create or modify a color

You can define or modify colors either graphically or manually. A continually updated "color swatch" appears at the lower right.

To define a color graphically:

•	With the left button down, move the mouse around the large color panel.

•	To change the brightness of the selected color, drag the triangle of the "Brightness bar" up and down.

Alternatively, you can define colors manually by typing in values for the components of a color. PagePlus supports three color models for manually defining colors. These are RGB (red, green blue), CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black) and HSL (hue, saturation, luminosity). For all color models, the values are in the range of 0 to 255.

To define a color manually:

•	Click to select a color model.

•	Type values into the appropriate entry boxes.

When you are satisfied with the color, enter a name for the color and press OK. The color will now appear in the color palette and can be used in your publication.

Colors in Web Publishing mode

When working in Web Publishing mode, it's a good idea to set your monitor to display 256 colors (rather than thousands or millions). Certain objects (such as those using 3D or transparency) may not look quite right, but you'll get a more accurate preview of how your graphics will display on the Web site. Some visitor's monitors are limited to 256 colors, as is the GIF image format which is standard for Web graphics. If there are problem objects, always test the page in a browser before finally publishing it.

Both Netscape and Microsoft browsers use the same safe palette of 216 colors to display images. PagePlus incorporates these colors into its own palette, which includes the basic PagePlus colors shown on the Studio's Colors panel. As long as you choose colors from within this safe palette, they won't appear "dithered" (i.e. not solid) in most Web browsers. If a given color looks solid on the PagePlus screen, it should be browser-safe. If it dithers in PagePlus, it's not safe—choose again!

When defining new colors for Web publications, either in PagePlus or in a separate paint program, use RGB values that match those in the safe palette. You can either utilize the safe palette file itself (included, along with swatch panel bitmaps, in the Samples folder on the PagePlus CD), or follow this simple rule: Choose RGB values that are either 0, or divisible by 51. Permissible values are in the series 0, 51, 102, 153, 204, 255. So, for example, the RGB definition "0,102,51" would be a safe Web color, while "0,102,52" would not.

•	For more information on using the safe palette, see the PagePlus Companion chapter on "Designing for the World Wide Web."


Changing or copying image colors

Using the Color Mapper, you can make extensive color changes to draw-type (vector) images and vector-based OLE objects, or add selected colors to the PagePlus palette. The Color Mapper works well with .WMF files. It does not work with paint-type (bitmap) images (for these, use Serif PhotoPlus or another paint editor) or line/box/oval graphics.

To open the Color Mapper:

•	Right-click the image and choose Color Mapper....

OR

•	Select the image, choose Picture from the Format menu, and select Color Mapper... from the submenu.

The large "Colors list" box shows two lists: on the left, all the original colors used in the picture; on the right, the new mapped colors. Initially, the two lists are the same. The PagePlus palette appears below.

To ensure consistent color usage in your publication, you can use the Color Mapper to remap image colors to existing PagePlus palette colors or scheme colors.

To remap colors in the picture:

•	Select a color from the left-hand list, then click a different color in the palette. The right-hand list updates.

•	If the Preview box is checked, the preview image also updates.

To undo color changes:

•	To undo a single color change, select the color from the colors list and click the Unmap button.

•	To undo all color changes, click the Unmap All button.

The Color Mapper lets you copy colors from one image to another by adding colors to the PagePlus palette. Once the color is included in the palette, you can apply it to other parts of the same picture, or to other objects in the publication. You can also use the Color Manager to modify the palette (see the previous topic).

To add a color used in the graphic to the PagePlus color palette:

•	Select the color from the colors list and click the Add Color button. The color is appended to the palette display.


Specifying PANTONE® colors

You can create virtually any color in PagePlus and add it to your color palette, and subsequently apply it to various objects. Unfortunately, color matching between your screen and printer will be poor. To overcome this, PagePlus includes PANTONE colors which can be added to your palette. When a PANTONE color is output, PagePlus is able to use printer-optimized color values to achieve a better color match.

In all cases, the screen displays an approximate color representation of the final printed color. You are cautioned not to use the screen for precise color matching, however; for accurate color reproduction, use official PANTONE color reference materials. In all cases, get a color proof of any color-separated work before you approve a print run. For details, see the "Production Issues" chapter in the PagePlus Companion.

To display the PANTONE Color Picker:

1	Choose Color Manager... from the Tools menu. The Color Manager appears.

2	On the Colors tab, click Add Pantone(r) Color.

Initially, the PANTONE Solid tab is displayed, showing solid (spot) colors. The Color Type box lets you adjust the screen display for different paper/printing situations. Coated Paper is the default; Uncoated Paper mutes the screen colors slightly. Convert to Process is applicable if you have the "Convert Pantone Spot Colors to Process" option set for CMYK separations in color printing.

To choose a process color, click the PANTONE Process tab.

Both tabs of the PANTONE Color Picker feature a central swatch window displaying color samples and their PANTONE numbers; scroll horizontally (or use the keyboard arrows) to view the full range. Click any portion of the color spectrum below the window to see that region's swatches. The small numbers above the spectrum bar represent page numbers in the corresponding PANTONE color guide. To find a specific color, type its number (or name) into the Find Color Name box and press Enter.

As you scroll in the swatch window, the currently selected color changes and appears as the "New" swatch in the small window at the lower left. To compare two colors in different parts of the spectrum, double-click the "New" swatch to display it as the adjacent "Original" color. Double-click the "Original" color to locate it again in the swatch window.

To add a PANTONE color to the palette:

1	In the PANTONE Color Picker, select the color to add.

2	Click OK (or double-click the color).

The newly selected PANTONE color appears as a new color in the Color Manager list.


Printing in color

PagePlus includes a host of features for preparing and printing high-quality color publications. Here's a quick summary, with cross-references to other help topics...

Preparing color publications

Unlimited color mixing. You can create virtually any color using the HSL or RGB color models, and specify custom CMYK colors. See Creating your own colors.

Industry standard PANTONE® Colors. Choose from the Process Color System or Spot Color System palettes, with automatic conversion of PANTONE Spot colors into process colors if required. See the previous topic Specifying PANTONE® colors.

Apply colors and shades to pictures, text, and graphic objects. See Applying colors and transparency.

"Colorize" pictures. This allows you to change full-color images to a single color or shade. You can adjust the intensity of the original colors to generate a low-intensity version for use as a background image. See Applying colors and transparency.

Color Mapper for vector images. The Color Mapper allows all imported vector images, and vector-based OLE objects, to have their included colors replaced by existing PagePlus palette colors (or standard PANTONE colors). The Color Mapper can also extract any required image color(s) to the PagePlus color palette. See Changing or copying image colors.

Photo Optimizer for printer calibration. For printing photographs, the Photo Optimizer lets you print test samples and choose the best settings, which are then applied when the publication is printed. See Optimizing pictures for printing.

Printing color separations

For details on printing in color, see the How To topics Basic printing and Printing color separations. For advanced information, see the "Production Issues" chapter in the PagePlus Companion.

Color-separate full-color images. PagePlus imports, displays and process-color separates 24-bit color images in virtually every industry standard format, including TIFF, PCX, JPEG, GIF and Kodak PhotoCD.

Import pre-separated CMYK TIFFs. PagePlus can generate the ultimate in picture separation quality by importing pre-separated TIFF files from Adobe PhotoShop and equivalent programs.

Spot-color separate vector files and vector-based OLE objects. PagePlus can produce spot-color separations from any vector-based imported image or OLE object. This includes LogoPlus and DrawPlus 4.0 as well as other Windows applications like CorelDRAW! and Microsoft Excel.

Standard and customizable screen angles and frequencies.

Support for the Adobe OPI specification.

Create custom registration marks using objects and the [Register] color.

Suppress picture output option to facilitate traditional picture stripping.

Automatic color trapping on output for both text and graphic elements.


Setting units

Ruler units

To select the basic measurement unit used by the rulers:

•	Choose Options... from the Tools menu and click the General tab.

You can select independent measurement units for the horizontal and vertical rulers. In Paper Publishing mode, the default unit is inches; in Web Publishing mode, the default is pixels.

The actual interval size of the ruler marks depends on the current zoom percentage. In zoomed-out view, for example at 50%, there's more distance between ruler marks than when zoomed-in to 150%. To handle work where you want finer control or smaller snapping increments, click a Zoom button to magnify the page.

The dot grid

The dot grid is a matrix of dots, based on ruler increments, covering the page and pasteboard areas. It's especially useful as an alignment and snapping aid.

The dots in the grid are spaced according to ruler marks, for example every 2 marks or every 4 marks. You can specify the interval.

To change the grid interval:

Double-click the [image] Snapping button on the HintLine toolbar (or choose Options... from the Tools menu and click the Layout tab). Enter a value in the "Grid dots every <n> ruler marks" box.


Updating defaults
Updating and saving defaults

Object defaults are the stored property settings PagePlus applies to newly created text, graphics, and frames. When you create text in your publication, it will have default properties for font, size, color, alignment, etc. New graphics will have default properties for line and fill color, shade, pattern etc. New frames will have default properties for margins, columns, etc. You can easily change the defaults for any type of object.

Default settings are always local—that is, any changed defaults apply to the current publication and are automatically saved with it, so they're in effect next time you open that publication. However, at any time you can use the Save Defaults command to record the current defaults as global settings that will be in effect for any new publication you subsequently create.

Whenever defaults are saved, whether locally or globally, the list of named styles (shown on the Studio's Text panel) and the PagePlus color palette (shown on the Colors panel) are also recorded. For information about modifying these settings, see Text styles and Creating your own colors.

To set local defaults for a particular type of object:

1	Create a single sample object and fine-tune its properties as desired—or use an existing object that already has the right properties. (For graphics, you can use a line, shape, or rectangle; all share the same set of defaults.)

2	Select the object that's the basis for the new defaults and choose Update Object Default from the Tools menu.
OR
Right-click the sample object and choose Update Object Default.

To save current defaults as global settings:

1	Choose Save Defaults... from the Tools menu.

2	Click OK to confirm that you want new publications to use the current publication's defaults.

Notes:

•	Saving the defaults as global settings only affects objects you create in new publications. Objects you create in any pre-existing publication will still use the local defaults in effect for that publication.

•	Color schemes are handled differently from the object defaults. They are automatically saved globally—so the full list of schemes is available in every publication.


Setting PagePlus options

The Options dialog lets you customize a wide range of PagePlus preference settings, including picture and layout options, ease-of-use features, and so on. As a rule, Options settings are global—that is, changing them affects all open publications, and when you close PagePlus, your current Options settings remain in effect the next time you open the program.

To set PagePlus options:

•	Double-click on the pasteboard area.

OR

•	Right-click on a blank area and select Options....

OR

•	Choose Options... from the Tools menu.

Click one of the five tabs and set your options. Settings include:

General tab: Autosave frequency, Number of undo's, PagePlus Web site display

Picture tab: Linking and embedding options, Display options

Ease of Use tab: Wizards, Tips, Help

Layout tab: Horizontal and vertical units, Grid settings, Guide and interface display options

Toolbars tab: Show/hide toolbars (Shortcut: Right-click on any tool region.)

Note: This is just a partial list of options. To explore the full range of options, access the Options dialog and right-click on any control for context-sensitive help.


Using shortcuts

Keypad shortcuts

•	Press Pg Up to display the previous page.

•	Press Pg Dn to display the next page.

Menu shortcuts

Every menu item has a keyboard shortcut (useful in the event your mouse stops working!).

To display a menu:

•	Press the Alt key followed by the underlined letter in the menu name. The menu appears. For example, pressing Alt+F displays the File menu.

To select an item from a displayed menu:

•	Press the key underlined in the menu item. For example, pressing Alt+F+S is the same as choosing Save from the File menu.

Certain commonly used menu items have their own shortcuts. Most people are familiar with Ctrl+C for Copy, Ctrl+V for paste, and so on. Ctrl+S accomplishes a Save operation. Inspect the PagePlus menus to see listed shortcuts.

Shift-key shortcuts

•	Moving: When moving an object in PagePlus, hold down the Shift key to constrain the movement to horizontal or vertical. To switch directions, release and then press the Shift key again.

•	Creating and resizing: In general, hold down the Shift key to constrain the operation. When drawing a line, the line angle will be a multiple of 45 degrees. With a box, you'll get a square; with an oval, a circle, and so on. For pictures, however, the behavior is opposite: with the Shift key up, the aspect ratio (proportion) of the original picture is preserved, while dragging with the Shift key down allows free resizing.

•	Selecting objects: To add or subtract an object from a multiple selection, hold down the Shift key and click on the object. The other objects in the multiple selection remain selected.

•	Selecting a region of text: To highlight a region of text in a text block, hold down the Shift key as you drag over the text.

•	Select All: Normally, choosing Select All from the Edit menu selects all objects on the page. If you have an object selected, press the Shift key as you choose Select All to select only objects of the same type as the selected object.

•	Graphic tools: Normally, the selected tool reverts to the Pointer after you draw a line, box, or oval. To retain the graphic tool after drawing a shape, hold down the Shift key when you first click the graphic tool button. This is useful, for example, if you want to draw a sequence of lines.

•	Use the Thesaurus: Press Shift+F7.

Ctrl (Control)-key shortcuts

•	Duplicating an object: To duplicate an object, select it, then press the Ctrl key. Drag the outline to a new location on the page. You can release the Ctrl key once you've started the drag.

•	Editing single text blocks: Normally, when you double-click on a frame text block, the entire story is loaded into WritePlus. To load a single text block, rather than the whole story to which it belongs, hold down the Ctrl key and double-click on the text block.

•	Importing a text file: Select the text frame and press Ctrl+T.

•	Importing a picture: To bring up the Import Picture Wizard, press Ctrl+G. If the Wizard is turned off, you'll see the Import Picture dialog.

•	Switching to a particular zoom view: Press Ctrl and then a number (1 = 100%, 2 = 200%, etc.). You'll find the complete list on the View/Zoom submenu.

•	Switching between Web and Paper publishing mode: Press Ctrl+W.

Esc (Escape)-key shortcuts

•	Cancelling operations: To cancel a sizing, moving or creation operation in the middle of the operation, press the Esc key.

•	Cancelling text import: To cancel the import of a text file, press the Esc key.

Function-key shortcuts

F1	Display the Help Contents screen.
F2	When moving or dropping text into a frame which already contains text, press F2 to switch between the text block dropping before or after the highlighted block.
F4	If you are dragging a block of frame text, press F4 to make it drop as free text. Similarly, when dragging free text over a frame, press F4 to drop the text as a block within that frame.

Character shortcuts

To insert a special character in a standard font, use the keyboard shortcut listed below. For other symbol options, see Inserting a symbol.

KEYBOARD	CHAR	CHAR NAME
Ctrl+Alt+8	•	Bullet
Ctrl+/	†	Dagger
Ctrl+Alt+/	‡	Double dagger
Ctrl+Alt+=	—	Em-rule or dash
Ctrl+Alt+c	©	Copyright symbol
Ctrl+Alt+r	®	Registered symbol
Ctrl+Alt+t	™	Trademark symbol
Ctrl+[	‘	Single open quote
Ctrl+]	'	Single close quote
Ctrl+Alt+[	"	Double open quote []
Ctrl+Alt+]	"	Double close quote []
Ctrl+Alt+,	' '	Comma space (width equal to that of comma in the typeface; for lining up columns of numbers with commas as separators)
Ctrl+Alt+1	'  '	Digit space (width equal to that of ‘0' in the typeface; for lining up columns of numbers)
Ctrl+Alt+m	'    '	Em space (equal to point size of typeface)
Ctrl+Alt+n	'   '	En space (equal to half of point size)
Ctrl+Alt+2	''	Inch mark
Ctrl+Alt+'	'	Foot mark


Using right-click menus

You can right-click on just about anything in PagePlus to select from menus of useful commands.

To cut/copy/paste, update object defaults, set layer position, lock/unlock, or edit object properties:

•	Right-click on the object.

To hide or lock rulers, or delete or lock ruler guides:

•	Right-click on a ruler.

To hide or show specific toolbars, including the ChangeBar and Studio:

•	Right-click on a tool region.

To save or print the publication, open and close files, paste an object, hide or show layout tools, or change page settings and program options:

•	Right-click on a blank area of the page or pasteboard.


Using PageHints

PageHints are like "sticky notes" that you can attach to your publication at any position on any page.

You can choose from four different icons to identify different types of PageHint.

To create a PageHint:

•	Choose PageHint... from the Insert menu. The PageHints dialog appears.

•	Type your text into the text window.

•	For a preview, click the View Hint button.

•	Select an icon for the PageHint.

•	When you're done, click OK, then click on the page or pasteboard to position the PageHint icon.

To read, edit, or delete a PageHint:

•	Click the PageHint icon. The PageHints dialog appears.

•	To edit the PageHint, click the Edit Hint button and type into the text window.

•	To delete the PageHint, click the Delete Hint button. To delete all PageHints in the publication, click Delete All.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Choose an item from the list.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Shows the size of the selected frame's left margin. To change the margin, enter a new value.


Shows the size of the selected frame's right margin. To change the margin, enter a new value.


Shows the size of the selected frame's top margin. To change the margin, enter a new value.


Shows the size of the selected frame's bottom margin. To change the margin, enter a new value.


Checked and available only if the column blinds (top and bottom margins) of one or more columns in the frame have been moved by dragging them individually with the Pointer tool. (To create custom column blinds, drag the margins in this fashion.) To reset all the frame's column margins to the values specified in the Top and Bottom boxes, uncheck the box and click OK.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Shows the number of columns in the selected frame. To change the number of columns, enter a new value.


Shows the gap between columns in the selected frame. To change the gap, enter a new value.


Shows the size of the border around text in a shaped frame. To change the border, enter a new value.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Type in a value for the zoom view you want. Initially, the current zoom percent is shown.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Lets you set the defaults based on properties of the currently selected object.


Lets you set the defaults from a list of the currently defined named text styles.


Lets you set the defaults by setting values using the Character, Spacing, or Tabs dialogs.


Click to use the Character dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Character dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Spacing dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Spacing dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Tabs & Indents dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Tabs & Indents dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Bullets and Numbering dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Bullets and Numbering dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Dropped Caps dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Dropped Caps dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Lines Above and Below dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Lines Above and Below dialog to specify default properties.


Click a style name to select it.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made. You must enter a name for the custom color to enable the OK button.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Shows a color matrix. To define a custom color, click anywhere in this matrix, and then use the slider at the right of the dialog box to adjust the color's attributes.


Displays the possible amounts of white and black in the color. The result of your choice is displayed in the Color|Solid box.


Click this button to make your choice.


On the left, shows the amount of white and black in the color you specified. On the right, shows how the color will look if you choose 100% of the color with no white or black.

To adjust the color, use the slider at the right of the dialog box. To specify that you want 100% of the color with no white or black, type Alt+O or double-click the solid color.


Specifies the hue of the selected custom color. A combination of hue, saturation, and luminosity can be used to define any color. Hue is the value of a color wheel, where 0 is red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 200 is magenta, and 240 is blue.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Specifies the saturation level of the selected custom color. A combination of hue, saturation, and luminosity can be used to define any color. Saturation is the amount of color in a specified hue, up to a maximum value of 240.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Specifies the luminosity of  the selected custom color. A combination of hue, saturation, and luminosity can be used to define any color. Luminosity is the brightness of the color.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Specifies the amount of red in the custom color. A combination of red, green, and blue levels can be used to define any color. You can see the effect of changing this value in the color matrix.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Specifies the amount of green in the custom color. A combination of red, green, and blue levels can be used to define any color. You can see the effect of changing this value in the color matrix.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Specifies the amount of blue in the custom color. A combination of red, green, and blue levels can be used to define any color. You can see the effect of changing this value in the color matrix.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Enter a name for your custom color.


Specifies the amount of cyan in the custom color. A combination of red, green, and blue levels can be used to define any color. You can see the effect of changing this value in the color matrix.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Specifies the amount of magenta in the custom color. A combination of red, green, and blue levels can be used to define any color. You can see the effect of changing this value in the color matrix.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Specifies the amount of yellow in the custom color. A combination of red, green, and blue levels can be used to define any color. You can see the effect of changing this value in the color matrix.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Specifies the amount of black in the custom color. A combination of red, green, and blue levels can be used to define any color. You can see the effect of changing this value in the color matrix.

The easiest way to experiment with different colors is to hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer around the color matrix above.


Select the RGB (red, green, blue) color model. PagePlus supports three color models: RGB, CMYK, and HSL.


Select the CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black) color model. PagePlus supports three color models: RGB, CMYK, and HSL.


Select the HSL (hue, saturation, luminosity) color model. PagePlus supports three color models: RGB, CMYK, and HSL.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Lets you set the defaults based on properties of the currently selected object.


Lets you set the defaults from a list of the currently defined named graphic styles.


Lets you set the defaults by setting values using the Line or Fill dialogs.


Click to use the Line dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Line dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Fill dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Fill dialog to specify default properties.


Click a style name to select it.


Check to save the publication as a PagePlus template (.PPX) file. When opening a saved template file, PagePlus automatically opens an untitled copy, leaving the original template intact.


Check to save the publication as a standard PagePlus publication (.PPP) file.


Check to save a preview thumbnail of the publication's first page. Later on, this will make it easier to identify the file you want to open.


Check to save the file in compressed form.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to have PagePlus automatically convert foot and inch marks (' and ") to true open and close quotation marks. The smart quotes setting affects all text typed, pasted from the clipboard, or imported from word-processor files.

If smart quotes are enabled, any inch or foot mark which is typed or imported, where the character to the left of the cursor is a space or a bracket symbol, is automatically converted to the true double or single open quote symbol. All other inch and foot symbols typed are converted to the appropriate double or single close quote symbol.

If you have smart quotes enabled and require true inch or foot symbols, use the character shortcuts described in the Using Shortcuts topic of online help.


Check to have PagePlus place a Windows MetaFile (Picture) version of objects being copied on the clipboard. Uncheck to disable the option, which reduces memory requirements when large bitmap pictures are being copied and pasted from the clipboard.


Check to have PagePlus automatically scroll the window if you drag an object outside its bounds. Uncheck to disable this feature.


Check to have PagePlus PagePlus "squeeze" single words into their text measure, resulting in the inter-letter spacing being reduced.


Only applicable on a 256-color display. Check to have PagePlus use solid colors when

possible, but dither colors if none of the 256 colors closely match the color required. Uncheck to have PagePlus approximate all colors to one of the solid 256 colors when displaying text and graphics.


Check to have PagePlus autosave the current publication to a temporary file at the specified interval. When autosave is enabled, you'll be able to recover your recent work in the event of a system crash or other interruption.


Enter the interval at which autosaves should occur.


Enter the number of levels of undo available, i.e. the number of operations you can undo using the Undo function.


Enter the number of levels of undo available, i.e. the number of operations you can undo using the Undo function.


Choose the language to use when spell checking, using the thesaurus, and performing automatic hyphenation with the current publication.


Check to have PagePlus automatically connect to the World Wide Web (at the specified interval) and display the PagePlus Web site in your Web browser. Uncheck to override automatic connection. You can still connect to the Web site using Help/Visit the PagePlus Web Site.


Enter the interval at which PagePlus will automatically connect to the World Wide Web and display the PagePlus Web site in your Web browser.


Choose the word processing application to use when importing text. Because PagePlus imports text directly, the word processing application itself must be present on your machine. If none of the applications are present, try the "Standard Converters" setting, which supports additional formats. If problems occur, try saving the source file as an .RTF file.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select Wrap Off to turn off text wrapping. Text and object will overlap.


Select Wrap Outside to wrap text around the object when the object overlaps a text frame.


Select Wrap Inside to flow text inside the object when the object overlaps a text frame. Text Will Wrap means the text object's text will respond to an overlaid object's wrap setting.


Select Wrap Inside to wrap text inside the object when the object overlaps a text frame.


Shows the value for the left standoff. The standoff is the distance between the object and its wrap outline. To change the standoff, type a new value. If wrapping is turned on for any object, the object appears with a dotted wrap outline that shows the boundary around which text will wrap.


Shows the value for the top standoff. The standoff is the distance between the object and its wrap outline. To change the standoff, type a new value. If wrapping is turned on for any object, the object appears with a dotted wrap outline that shows the boundary around which text will wrap.


Shows the value for the right standoff. The standoff is the distance between the object and its wrap outline. To change the standoff, type a new value. If wrapping is turned on for any object, the object appears with a dotted wrap outline that shows the boundary around which text will wrap.


Shows the value for the bottom standoff. The standoff is the distance between the object and its wrap outline. To change the standoff, type a new value. If wrapping is turned on for any object, the object appears with a dotted wrap outline that shows the boundary around which text will wrap.


Select to fit the object's text wrap outline to the object's actual contours, so text wraps more closely around the object.

To adjust the shape of the wrap outline: Select the Pointer tool and move the mouse over the wrap outline. The Wrap Adjust cursor appears. To add a new "node" or control point, dividing the outline into more sections, click on any part of the dotted line. To move a node, drag on the node. To move a line (between two nodes), drag on the line. To delete a node, drag another node to coincide with it.


Select to set the object's text wrap outline outside the object's rectangular frame, so text wraps around the frame.

To adjust the shape of the wrap outline: Select the Pointer tool and move the mouse over the wrap outline. The Wrap Adjust cursor appears. To add a new "node" or control point, dividing the outline into more sections, click on any part of the dotted line. To move a node, drag on the node. To move a line (between two nodes), drag on the line. To delete a node, drag another node to coincide with it.


Check  to use the object's wrap outline as a boundary. Portions of the object outside the wrap outline will not print. If unchecked, the entire object will appear.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Check your desired options.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Choose an item from the list.


Closes the dialog and accepts your changes.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click to print all the colors in the "colors used" list.


Click to display the Color Separation Settings dialog.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


This option selects "Process" as the color separation type and is only available if the currently selected Windows printer is a PostScript printer. Normally, process color output gives you four sheets or "separations" per publication page, one each for the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black ink components of the objects on the page.

If any PANTONE Spot Colors are used in your publication and the "Convert Pantone Spot Colors to Process" option is not checked, the PANTONE Spot colors used in the publication will also shown in the "colors used" list and a separate "Spot Color Separation" sheet will be printed for each of the PANTONE Spot colors used.


This option selects "Spot" as the color separation type. Spot color output gives you one sheet or "separation" for each color used on each publication page. The "Colors used" list shows how many separations will be produced for each page.


Lists the colors used. Only the color separations that are selected in the "Colors used" list will be printed. You can select or deselect a color by clicking on it, or choose all the colors using the Print all button.


Check this if you create your publication using colors from the Pantone Spot color palette and want to print your page using the standard four color (CMYK) process separation colors. This will cause the Pantone colors to be converted to the best process color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black) equivalent.


Auto trapping is used to reduce the alignment problems that occur when printing using several color separations. In brief, if you have two different colored objects which overlap, they will appear on different printing plates. Because printing presses can never exactly align the multiple printing plates, a small "gap" can be left at the edge where the two objects

overlap.

Auto trapping tries to reduce this error by making the edges where the objects overlap very slightly intersect. The auto-trapping values can be adjusted in the Settings... dialog, but typically the default values will suffice.


This option causes the black component of objects being printed using color separations to be printed on top of the other colors. Because black ink is very dark, it can be printed on top of other colors without affecting its own color. This reduces "trapping" errors as there is no "edge" between a black object and the object it overlaps. Because of this, the thin white "gaps" normally caused by trapping problems will not occur with black objects.

This is especially useful when printing fine black text on colored tint backgrounds, as it is notoriously difficult to prevent trapping problems if the black is not overprinted.

Overprint Black is normally checked unless specifically instructed otherwise.

Note that the overprint black setting does not affect how imported vector pictures are color separated.


The "Paper Type" list box provides a quick and easy way for selecting the "technical" settings associated with process color separation printing. By selecting the appropriate paper type on to which your printer will print your work, the complicated "screen angle" and "screen frequency"

settings are automatically set.

If you are a printing expert and require different settings to any of the standard paper type settings we supply, select the "Custom" paper type and adjust the values in the Settings dialog.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


These settings adjust the trapping values used when the "Auto Trapping" option is checked. Generally, these values should be left unaltered unless specifically instructed otherwise. Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Controls the maximum trapping adjustment that can be applied to a graphic (lines and boxes) as a percentage of the smallest dimension of the graphic. For example, it would be incorrect to apply a large trap value to a very thin line; this option prevents this.


Controls the maximum trapping adjustment that can be applied to a graphic (lines and boxes) in points.


Controls the maximum trapping adjustment that can be applied to text which is larger than the "Text Threshold" in points.


Controls the minimum size of text to which trapping adjustments will be made. Due to the "fine detail" of small text, only larger text should have trapping adjustments applied.


These options allow you to view the screen angles and frequencies for process color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom", the values can be modified.


These options allow you to view the screen angles and frequencies for process color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom", the values can be modified.


These options allow you to view the screen angles and frequencies for process color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom", the values can be modified.


These options allow you to view the screen angles and frequencies for process color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom", the values can be modified.


These options allow you to view the screen angles and frequencies for process color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom", the values can be modified.


These options allow you to view the screen angles and frequencies for process color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom", the values can be modified.


These options allow you to view the screen angles and frequencies for process color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom", the values can be modified.


These options allow you to view the screen angles and frequencies for process color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom", the values can be modified.


These options allow you to view the screen angles and frequencies for process color separations. If the "Paper Type" has been set to "Custom", the values can be modified.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


To change the left margin, enter a new value.


To change the right margin, enter a new value.


To change the top margin, enter a new value.


To change the bottom margin, enter a new value.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


To change the number of columns, enter a new value.


To change the gap, enter a new value.


Shows the size of the border around text in a shaped frame. To change the border, enter a new value.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


The tab ruler displays the positions and types of all defined tabs, default tabs and the positions of the left, right, and first line indents. The right indent value is normally left at zero, and so the right indent marker also serves to display the text measure of the selected text block. If the right indent marker, or some of the tab positions are not visible, the ruler can be scrolled left or right using the arrows at either end.

The indents are marked by small triangles, the defined tabs by vertical arrows and the default tabs by small dots. To adjust the positions of the indents and defined tabs, click and drag the markers. To add tabs, click on the ruler bar. To delete a tab, drag its marker downwards so that it is no longer over the ruler and release the mouse.


Click to scroll the ruler left.


Click to scroll the ruler right.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click to skip this instance of the word.


Click to change this instance of the word to the text shown in the Change To box.


Click to skip all instances of the word.


Click to change all instances of the word to the text shown in the Change To box.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click to request alternative spelling suggestions.


Click to add the word to your personal dictionary.


Click this button to make your choice.


Choose an item from the list.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select the page numbering style to use.


Select the page numbering style to use.


Select the page numbering style to use.


Select the page numbering style to use.


Select the page numbering style to use.


Select the page numbering style to use.


Enter the starting page number in the sequence. For example, Chapter Two of a long publication might be in a separate file and begin numbering with page 33. So you'd enter 33.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Check to exclude this tip from the list of tips to be displayed.


Check to disable automatic hints and tips. Uncheck to re-enable the feature.


Check to display a daily tip will be displayed each time PagePlus is started. Daily Tips are a variety of useful tips on PagePlus, DTP and life in general. Uncheck to turn off daily tips.


Click to close the Hints and Tips dialog.


Closes this dialog and replaces the original word (selected in your text) with the word in the "Replace/Look Up" box.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


 The "Synonyms" box lists synonyms for the definition selected in the "Senses/Meanings" box. Initially, the first synonym appears in the "Replace/Look Up" box.

You can navigate through the thesaurus by selecting the specific meaning, followed by the specific synonym you are interested in and then clicking on the Look Up button to get a new range of meanings and synonyms for the new word.


Click this button to make your choice.


 The "Synonyms" box lists synonyms for the definition selected in the "Senses/Meanings" box. Initially, the first synonym appears in the "Replace/Look Up" box.


 The "Synonyms" box lists synonyms for the definition selected in the "Senses/Meanings" box. Initially, the first synonym appears in the "Replace/Look Up" box.


 The "Synonyms" box lists synonyms for the definition selected in the "Senses/Meanings" box. Initially, the first synonym appears in the "Replace/Look Up" box.

To pop a new word into the "Replace/Look Up" box, click the in the Synonyms list.


 The "Synonyms" box lists synonyms for the definition selected in the "Senses/Meanings" box. Initially, the first synonym appears in the "Replace/Look Up" box.

To pop a new word into the "Replace/Look Up" box, click the in the Synonyms list.


Shows a full description of the selected definition.


Closes this dialog and accepts changes you've made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click to display the next PageHint.


Click to edit the text of the PageHint.


Click to view the PageHint as it will appear on the page.


Click to delete the current PageHint.


Click to delete all PageHints.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter or edit the text of the PageHint.


Select a PageHint symbol.


Select a PageHint symbol.


Select a PageHint symbol.


Select a PageHint symbol.


Select a PageHint symbol.


Select a PageHint symbol.


Select a PageHint symbol.


Select a PageHint symbol.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click to find the next instance of the found text.


Click to replace this instance of the found text with the replacement text.


Click to replace all instances of the found text with the replacement text.


Click to close the dialog.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter the text to find.


Enter the text to replace the found text.


Select Whole Story to search in the entire text of the story.


Select to search only the text from the current insertion point to the end of the story.


Select to search only the currently text.


Select to search all stories in the publication.


Select to search only the text of the selected story.


Select to search all stories in the publication.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image] button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to locate only instances using just the word(s) in the Find box. Uncheck to locate any occurrences of the Find word(s) within text, e.g. "cat" will be found within "catalog."


Check to locate only instances that match the case of the word(s) in the Find box, e.g. if you typed "cat", then "Cat" would not be found. Uncheck to locate any occurrences of the Find word(s), regardless of case.


Click to continue checking the layout.


Click to discontinue checking the layout.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select the number of colors in the imported picture.


Select the number of colors in the imported picture.


Select the number of colors in the imported picture.


Select the number of colors in the imported picture.


Select the number of colors in the imported picture.


Select the resolution (pixel dimensions) of the imported picture.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click to display the previous set of 12 thumbnails.


Click to display the next set of 12 thumbnails.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Click a thumbnail to select the image.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


To undo a single color change, select the color from the colors list and click this button.


Click to undo all color changes.


To add a color used in the graphic to the PagePlus color palette, select the color from the colors list and click this button. The color is appended to the palette display


Click this button to make your choice.


Shows two lists: on the left, all the original colors used in the picture; on the right, the new mapped colors. Initially, the two lists are the same. To remap colors in the picture, click to select a color from the left-hand list, then click a different color in the palette. The right-hand list updates.


Shows the PagePlus color palette.


Check if you want the picture to update immediately as you map new colors. Uncheck to disable updating.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Choose an item from the list.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Check to specify that color separations are to be printed.


Click to display the Color Separations dialog to set additional parameters.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Enter the overlap value to simplify arrangement of the tiles and to allow for printer margins. The default value of 0.5" is generally sufficient.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select to specify a custom scaling percentage. The default is 100% or normal size. To scale your work to be printed at a larger size, specify a larger value; to scale down, specify a smaller value. Select Reduce to fit to reduce artwork automatically to fit neatly on the printed page.


Enter a scaling percentage. To scale your work to be printed at a larger size, specify a larger value; to scale down, specify a smaller value.


Select to reduce artwork automatically to fit neatly on the printed page.


Enter the number of thumbnails per sheet.


Click to save current print settings as a scheme. Select the type of scheme to save, or type in a new name, and click OK.


Click to delete the selected printer scheme from the list.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select to create a "half-size" booklet. Two pages of the publication are printed on each sheet of paper, with pages printed following the booklet sequence.


Select to print large (or enlarged) pages using multiple sheets of paper. Each section or tile is printed on a single sheet of paper; the various tiles can then be joined to form the complete page. Use this option for printing at larger sizes than the maximum paper size of your printer, typically for creating banners and posters. To simplify arrangement of the tiles and to allow for printer margins, you can specify an overlap value (the default value of 0.5" is generally sufficient).


Select to print multiple pages at a reduced size on each printed sheet. Specify the number of thumbnails per sheet in the value box. PagePlus will print each page of the publication at a reduced size, with the specified number of small pages or "thumbnails" neatly positioned on each printed sheet.


Check to generate small markers on the printed page, marking the page dimensions of the artwork. The printer page size must be at least 1" x 1" larger than the actual artwork being printed, to ensure that the marks will be entirely visible on the final print. For PostScript printing, the Windows printer driver normally has some "extra" page sizes which can be used with standard artwork paper sizes.


Check to print hairline place holder boxes in place of the pictures in the publication. This has two uses: (1) to speed up printing of quick proofs, and (2) to leave markers for pictures to be added manually at a later stage of the production process.


Check to include Open Prepress Interface comments. OPI is a set of PostScript language comment conventions that allow PagePlus to pass layout information about imported bitmap images to an OPI-compatible system. OPI comments describe the placement, size, rotation and cropping of imported bitmap pictures so that the OPI server can insert high-quality pictures before printing the page(s).


Check to include information such time, date, and publication name below the actual artwork of the page. The printer page size must be at least 1" x 1" larger than the actual artwork being printed, to ensuer that the information is entirely visible on the final print. For PostScript printing, the Windows printer driver normally has some "extra" page sizes which can be used with standard artwork paper sizes.


Choose an item from the list.


Check your desired options.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image] button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to use the Startup Wizard each time you launch PagePlus. Uncheck to bypass the Startup Wizard and have PagePlus open directly to an Untitled document.


Check to use the Text Import Wizard each time you select Import Text... from the File menu. Uncheck to bypass the Text Import Wizard; in this case, when you choose Import Text..., the Import Text file selection dialog will appear immediately.


Check to use the Picture Import Wizard each time you click the Import Picture button or select Picture... from the Insert menu. Uncheck to bypass the Picture Import Wizard. With the Wizard off, when you click the Import Picture button, you'll immediately see a file selection dialog; when you choose Picture..., you'll see a flyout menu with various import options.


Check to use the Frame Wizard each time you use one of the Frame tools to define a new frame. Uncheck to bypass the Frame Wizard; in this case, the new frame will use the default settings.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to display event tips, which appear when you first perform a specific operation, e.g. the first time more than one object is selected as a multiple selection. Uncheck to turn off event tips.


Click to reset all event tips, so they appear when the specific operations are performed even if they've been displayed previously.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check your desired options.


Check to turn on the ToolTips displayed when you move the mouse pointer around the interface. Uncheck to turn off ToolTips.


Check to show any PageHints which have been placed within the publication. To create a PageHint, choose PageHint... from the Insert menu. Uncheck to hide any PageHints in the publication.


Check to turn on helpful cursors, which provide additional cues during certain operations. Uncheck to turn them off.


Click to close the dialog.


Click to close the dialog and display the selected font or resource in the publication.


Shows fonts used in your publication. Click to select a font and display its font type (TrueType, printer, or system). If you are copying a publication to take to a different computer, check that the fonts used in your publication are available on the new computer. Take particular care with printer-dependent fonts, as the new machine may be using a different printer driver.


Shows resources (such as pictures or media) used in your publication, and whether each resource is linked to an external file or embedded within the publication. Click to select a resource and display its path name (if linked). When you import a resource, PagePlus either embeds the resource data or links it to the source file. When you copy a publication, you should also copy any linked source files so they will be available in the new location.

You can control whether pictures are linked or embedded using the Picture tab of the Tools/Options dialog. To embed sound or video files in Web Publishing mode, check the "Embed in publication" box when importing via Insert/Web Object.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Check to show a given  toolbar. Uncheck to hide it. Shortcut: Right-click on any visible toolbar.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click to enter the current Replace/With text into the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click to delete the selected pair from the list.


Check to turn AutoCorrect on. Uncheck to turn it off.


Enter text you want to replace.


Enter text to be substituted for the Replace text.


Contains the list of Replace/With pairs. Click a line to place a pair into the Replace/With boxes.


Check to set a ruled line above the text in the text block.


Enter a value for the gap between the ruled line and the first line of text.


Click to display a dialog to define the attributes of the ruled line.


The length of the ruled line will match the length of the top line of text.


The ruled line will extend from the left margin to the right margin.


The ruled line will be left aligned, using the specified length.


The ruled line will be centered, using the specified length.


The ruled line will be right aligned, using the specified length.


Specify the length of a left-, center-, or right-aligned ruled line.


Check to set a ruled line below the text in the text block.


Enter a value for the gap between the last line of text and the ruled line.


Click to display a dialog to define the attributes of the ruled line.


The length of the ruled line will match the length of the bottom line of text.


The ruled line will extend from the left margin to the right margin.


The ruled line will be left aligned, using the specified length.


The ruled line will be centered, using the specified length.


The ruled line will be right aligned, using the specified length.


Specify the length of a left-, center-, or right-aligned ruled line.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Check your desired options.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click to create a new address record after this one.


Click to delete this address record.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Type into a field to edit the information. Scroll to view additional fields.


Type into a field to edit the information. Scroll to view additional fields.


Type into a field to edit the information. Scroll to view additional fields.


Type into a field to edit the information. Scroll to view additional fields.


Type into a field to edit the information. Scroll to view additional fields.


Type into a field to edit the information. Scroll to view additional fields.


Click to view the first address record.


Click to view the previous address record.


Click to display the Find dialog, which lets you go to a specific address record or search in a field for a particular value.


Click to view the next address record.


Click to view the last address record.


Click to display the Find dialog, which lets you go to a specific address record or search in a field for a particular value.


Enter your input in this field.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select to go to the address record with the number shown.


Enter the number of the address record to go to.


Select to search in a particular field for a specific value.


Shows the standard names of the fields used in the address list. To search in a particular field, click its name in the drop-down list.


Lists the specific values for the selected field in all the address records of the address list. To go to a record, click its value, then click OK.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Click to print the publication using every address.


Click to view each address and choose which ones to print.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click to print the publication using this address.


Click to skip this address.


Closes the dialog and stops Merge and Print.


Scroll to view additional fields.


Scroll to view additional fields.


Scroll to view additional fields.


Scroll to view additional fields.


Scroll to view additional fields.


Scroll to view additional fields.


Scroll to view additional fields.


Closes the dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click to close the dialog and display the selected hyperlink in the publication.


Click to display the Hyperlinks dialog in order to modify the selected hyperlink.


Click to remove the selected hyperlink. The underlying object (text or graphic) is not affected.


Shows the hyperlinks and hotspots used in your publication. Click a line in the list to select the link. When you select a text-based hyperlink, its linked text appears below the list.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


To unmap a pair of fields, select it on the left and click this button.


To start over, click this button.


To map fields, click a PagePlus (*.SDB) field name on the left, then one of the outside file's field names on the right. The list of mapped fields builds on the left side of the dialog.


To map fields, click a PagePlus (*.SDB) field name on the left, then one of the outside file's field names on the right. The list of mapped fields builds on the left side of the dialog.


Enter a folder and file name for the mapped address list file.


Click this button to display a file selection dialog.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Close the dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Clicking this type of link will display the target page in the visitor's browser.


Clicking this type of link will display the target page in the visitor's browser.


Clicking this type of link will display an e-mail window preset to send to a target address.


Click to remove an existing hyperlink. The underlying object is not affected.


Select or enter the link destination.


Click to display a file selection dialog.


Clicking this type of link will open a file, for example a text or media file.


Choose an item from the list.


Enter your input in this field.


Check to embed the file in your PagePlus publication.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


To specify a file name, type it into the box.


To select a file name, click it in the list.


To select a directory, click it in the list.


To select a particular drive, click the box and select the drive in the drop-down list.


To show only files of a particular format, select the type from the list.


Check to open the file as Untitled.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


To specify a file name, type it into the box.


To select a file name, click it in the list.


To select a directory, click it in the list.


Choose an item from the list.


To show only files of a particular format, select the type from the list.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to save the publication as a PagePlus template (.PPX) file. When opening a saved template file, PagePlus automatically opens an untitled copy, leaving the original template intact.


Check to save the publication as a standard PagePlus publication (.PPP) file.


Check to save a preview thumbnail of the publication's first page. Later on, this will make it easier to identify the file you want to open.


Check to save as a read-only file (normally unchecked).


Check to save as a compressed files. Compressed files save disk space but may take slightly longer to open.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


To specify a file name, type it into the box.


To select a file name, click it in the list.


To select a directory, click it in the list.


Choose an item from the list.


To show only files of a particular format, select the type from the list.


Check to retain the source file's formatting styles, i.e. if you've defined and applied text styles (including font, point size, leading, or color) in the word processor, and want PagePlus to import and convert as much of this formatting as possible. Uncheck to discard this information. In either case, PagePlus does preserve basic character properties like italic, bold, and underline, and paragraph alignment (left, center, right).


Check to ignore returns in the source text, i.e. only if the file has been saved with a carriage return at the end of every line, and you want to strip off these extra returns.


Check to open the file as Untitled.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


To specify a file name, type it into the box.


To select a file name, click it in the list.


To select a directory, click it in the list.


To select a particular drive, click the box and select the drive in the drop-down list.


To show only files of a particular format, select the type from the list.


Check to export just the selected object(s). Uncheck to export all the objects on the pasteboard and page.


Check to save as a read-only file (normally unchecked).


Check to display a dialog of options relating to the export, if the export format has options which can be set. For example, bitmap formats let you specify the resolution, color format, compression type, and any format-specific settings. Uncheck to bypass this dialog.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


To specify a file name, type it into the box.


To select a file name, click it in the list.


To select a directory, click it in the list.


Choose an item from the list.


To show only files of a particular format, select the type from the list.


Check to save as a read-only file (normally unchecked).


Check your desired options.


Click to close the dialog.


Click to run WritePlus on the selected text.


Click to display the selected text.


Click this button to make your choice.


The Stories box displays stories, arranged alphabetically by story title (or source file name) as shown in the Frame Info box. The list includes the first line (if any) of each text block.


The Free Text window lists free text arranged by page number. The list includes the first line (if any) of each text block.


Choose an item from the list.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Loads the selected scheme.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Shows a list of defined options files. Choose an existing file, or type a new name in the box below.


Deletes the selected options file from the list.


Shows the options file that will be opened. You can type the name in directly or click one in the list above.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select the date/time format you want from the list.


Check to have PagePlus automatically update the date/time field each time the publication is accessed. Uncheck to leave the date/time field showing its initial value.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select the particular document information to insert as a "power field." The power field will be automatically updated if the document information changes.


Check to have PagePlus automatically update the information field each time the publication is accessed. Uncheck to leave the information field showing its initial value.


Closes the dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click to insert the selected field at the insertion point.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select the address field  to insert. During mail merge printing, the contents of the specified field from the current address list will be substituted into the field.


Click to enter the selected entry.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select the particular user detail entry to insert as a "power field."


If checked, the user detail entry you inserted will be updated if the information entered in the User Details database changes. This database, in turn, normally gets its information from what you type in response to Page Wizard questions. You can change this option using Tools/Set User Details.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image] button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select to publish all the pages in the publication.


Select to publish one or more pages in a range.


Enter the starting page number.


Enter the ending page number. If you are publishing just one page, this value should be the same as the "from:" value.


Check to create a separate HTML file for each page in the publication. Uncheck only if you wish to combine elements from the specified pages into a single file.


Select to ensure that pages appear left aligned when viewed in a Web browser. This option is recommended for most layouts.


Click to ensure that pages appear centered when viewed in a Web browser. This option is appropriate if you have used a centered layout style throughout your site.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Check this box to automatically update stored user details if you subsequently enter different information while creating a Page Wizard publication. Uncheck to leave stored user details intact, regardless of Page Wizard entries.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Click to display a dialog that lets you rename this user detail field.


Enter your input in this field.


Click to display a dialog that lets you rename this user detail field.


Enter your input in this field.


Click to display a dialog that lets you rename this user detail field.


Enter your input in this field.


Click to display a dialog that lets you rename this user detail field.


Enter your input in this field.


Click to display a dialog that lets you rename this user detail field.


Enter your input in this field.


Click to display a dialog that lets you rename this user detail field.


Click to apply the name shown to this user detail field.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Enter a different name for this user detail field.


Click to continue checking the layout.


Click to discontinue checking the layout.


Select to have PagePlus apply default formatting to fix the problem.


Select to output the problem region as text.


Select to ignore the problem.


Select to output the problem region as a button.


Select your preferred option.


Check to assign entries in the first line of the file as the field names used in the PagePlus address list. If unchecked, the first line is assumed to contain data, just like other lines.


Enter (or use the Browse button to locate) the name of a sound file you would like to play as a background sound when the page is viewed in a Web browser.


Enter a title of your choice for the Web page. The title will be displayed in the title bar of the user's Web browser when the page is viewed. Often the page title identifies the Web site as well as the specific page within the site.


Check the instructions from your Web service provider as to their naming conventions for Home Pages and file extensions. Typically, Home Pages are named INDEX.HTML. Depending on the particular server in use, however, some other name may be required. Likewise, the extension .HTM is sometimes used for pages.


Check the instructions from your Web service provider as to their naming conventions for Home Pages and file extensions. Typically, Home Pages are named INDEX.HTML. Depending on the particular server in use, however, some other name may be required. Likewise, the extension .HTM is sometimes used for pages.


Click to locate the sound file you want to include.


Check to embed the background sound file in the publication. Although embedding any file adds to the size of the publication, it is the default option because you'll no longer have to worry about juggling separate files or the chance of accidentally deleting one of them.


Check to have the sound play back as a continuous loop. Otherwise, it will play just once.


The box will be checked in older PagePlus Web publications, where the Web colors are not considered part of the current color scheme and body text is marked using the [Web] color variable. You can keep the colors detached and use this dialog to set them independently. If you wish to switch to the Web colors associated with one of the PagePlus 6 color schemes, uncheck the box. The Web color values will immediately update to those for the current color scheme, and body text previously marked with the [Web] color will become marked with Scheme Color 1. Click Cancel (if you change your mind at the last minute) to restore the detached colors.


Shows the color used for the body text marked with the [Web] color in older PagePlus Web publications. In PagePlus 6 Web publications, body text is normally marked with Scheme Color 1. See the help note for the Detach Web Colors checkbox.


Shows the color used for hyperlinks. Normally (with the Detach box unchecked), the color is associated with the publication's color scheme. See the help note for the Detach box.


Shows the color used for followed hyperlinks (those the user has already clicked on). Normally (with the Detach box unchecked), the color is associated with the publication's color scheme. See the help note for the Detach box.


Shows the color used for the page background. Normally (with the Detach box unchecked), the color is associated with the publication's color scheme. See the help note for the Detach box.


Check to select a picture file to be tiled in the background, rather than using a solid color. Brings up a file selection dialog.


Click this button to display a file selection dialog.


Although they're optional, if you want to increase the likelihood that your Web site will be "noticed" by the major Web search services, you should enter search engine descriptors. By including descriptive information and keywords, you'll assist these engines in properly categorizing your site. Note that you generally need to register your site's URL with a search provider before it can be included for data collection.

Type in a brief description of your site. Although the description can be any length, the first ten words or so are the most important.


Although they're optional, if you want to increase the likelihood that your Web site will be "noticed" by the major Web search services, you should enter search engine descriptors. By including descriptive information and keywords, you'll assist these engines in properly categorizing your site. Note that you generally need to register your site's URL with a search provider before it can be included for data collection.

Enter any number of keywords (separated by commas) that you think fairly categorize your site.


Select to publish the Web site using HTML 3.2.


Select to publish the Web site using HTML 4.0.


Select to publish the Web site using HTML 3.2.


Select to publish the Web site using HTML 4.0.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Choose the page size from the list of standard sizes.


Shows the page width. To change the width, enter a new value. Defaults allow for best browser display on standard monitors.


Shows the page height. To change the height, enter a new value. Defaults allow for best browser display on standard monitors.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Shows the number of columns on the page. Page columns serve only as guides and do not control the flow of story text. To change the number of columns, enter a new value.


Shows the gap between page columns. To change the gap, enter a new value.


Check to remove any ruler guides you have placed. Guides will be cleared when you click OK.


Check your desired options.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


To select a folder, click it in the list.


Choose an item from the list.


To select a drive, click it in the list.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click to create a new folder inside the currently selected folder.


Click this button to make your choice.


Check your desired options.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select to publish all the pages in the publication.


Select to publish one or more pages in a range.


Enter the starting page number.


Enter the ending page number. If you are publishing just one page, this value should be the same as the "from:" value.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to create a separate HTML file for each page in the publication. Uncheck only if you wish to combine elements from the specified pages into a single file.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select to ensure that pages appear left aligned when viewed in a Web browser. This option is recommended for most layouts.


Click to ensure that pages appear centered when viewed in a Web browser. This option is appropriate if you have used a centered layout style throughout your site.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter the name you want for the selected design.


Check to display this dialog each time you add a new design to the Portfolio. Uncheck to bypass the dialog; in this case, each new item will be labeled as "Unnamed Design." To rename a design later, right-click on its name or its preview thumbnail and choose Rename Design.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter (or use the Browse button to locate) the name of the sound file to insert.


Click to locate the sound file to insert.


Check to embed the sound file in the publication. Although embedding any file adds to the size of the publication, it is the default option because you'll no longer have to worry about juggling separate files or the chance of accidentally deleting one of them.


Select this icon as the display style. PagePlus provides the icon pre-linked to the sound file, and you then position the icon on your page.


Select this option to use a picture as the display style for the sound file. Then enter (or use the Browse button to locate) the name of the picture file.


Select this option to display an inline player on your Web page to play the sound file. You'll see a marker on your PagePlus page, which you can reposition as needed.


Select this icon as the display style. PagePlus provides the icon pre-linked to the sound file, and you then position the icon on your page.


Select this icon as the display style. PagePlus provides the icon pre-linked to the sound file, and you then position the icon on your page.


Select this icon as the display style. PagePlus provides the icon pre-linked to the sound file, and you then position the icon on your page.


Enter (or use the Browse button to locate) the name of a picture to use as the display style. PagePlus then imports the picture and links it to the video file.


Click to locate the picture that will link to the sound file.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


To specify a file name, type it into the box.


To select a file name, click it in the list.


To select a directory, click it in the list.


To select a particular drive, click the box and select the drive in the drop-down list.


To show only files of a particular format, select the type from the list.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Click to find the next instance of the found text.


Click to close the dialog.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter all or part of the design's name.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Choose an item from the list.


Click to delete the selected design.


Click to cancel deletion.


Check to show this dialog each time you're about to delete a design. Uncheck to delete without confirmation.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter (or use the Browse button to locate) the name of the video file to insert.


Click to locate the video file to insert.


Check to embed the video file in the publication. Although embedding any file adds to the size of the publication, it is the default option because you'll no longer have to worry about juggling separate files or the chance of accidentally deleting one of them.


Select this icon as the display style. PagePlus provides the icon pre-linked to the video file, and you then position the icon on your page.


Select this option to use a picture as the display style for the video file. Then enter (or use the Browse button to locate) the name of the picture file.


Select this option to display an inline player on your Web page to play the video file. You'll see a marker on your PagePlus page, which you can reposition as needed.


Select this icon as the display style. PagePlus provides the icon pre-linked to the video file, and you then position the icon on your page.


Select this icon as the display style. PagePlus provides the icon pre-linked to the video file, and you then position the icon on your page.


Select this icon as the display style. PagePlus provides the icon pre-linked to the video file, and you then position the icon on your page.


Enter (or use the Browse button to locate) the name of a picture to use as the display style. PagePlus then imports the picture and links it to the video file.


Click to locate the picture that will link to the video file.


Check to begin loading and playing the video as soon as the page loads. Otherwise, the video won't play until the user clicks it.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Select this option to remove any text background effect.


Select this option to add lines above and/or below the text block.


Select this option to add a background box to the text block.


Check to set a ruled line above the text in the text block.


Enter a value for the gap between the ruled line and the first line of text.


Click to display a dialog to define the attributes of the ruled line.


The length of the ruled line will match the length of the top line of text.


The ruled line will extend from the left margin to the right margin.


The ruled line will be left aligned, using the specified length.


Enter a custom value for the line length.


Check to set a ruled line below the text in the text block.


Enter a value for the gap between the last line of text and the ruled line.


Click this button to make your choice.


The length of the ruled line will match the length of the top line of text.


The ruled line will extend from the left margin to the right margin.


The ruled line will be left aligned, using the specified length.


Enter a custom value for the line length.


Select the color of the background rectangle.


Select the shade (tint) of the background rectangle. The lower the percentage, the fainter the color.


Choose a type of corner.


Choose a type of corner.


Choose a type of corner.


Choose a type of corner.


Check to set all corners to match the current setting for top left.


The higher the value, the more pronounced the rounding of corners. (The setting has no effect on square corners.)


Select this option to fit the background box to the visible text -- that is, the column edges within the block -- regardless of where the block's edges (handles) are.


Select this option to run the background box out to the handles of the text block, regardless of the column width or leading settings of the block's text.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Use the Browse button to locate the name of the applet's main ".class" file.


Click to locate the ".class file" name to insert.


Use the Add... and Delete buttons to create a list of each supporting file required by the applet.


Click to locate each supporting file required by the applet and add it to the list.


Click to delete one or more files from the list. You can hold down the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple files in the dialog.


Check to embed the applet file(s) in the publication. Although embedding any file adds to the size of the publication, it is the default option because you'll no longer have to worry about juggling separate files or the chance of accidentally deleting one of them.


Use the Add..., Delete, Up, and Down buttons to create a list of parameters required by the applet.


Click to display a dialog that lets you enter a parameter and add it to the list.


Click to delete the selected parameter from the list. Use the Up and Down buttons to select individual parameters.


Click to select the preceding parameter in the list.


Click to select the next parameter in the list.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Enter the parameter name according to the documentation supplied with the applet.


Enter the parameter value according to the documentation supplied with the applet.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Check your desired options.


Choose an item from the list.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and records your transparency settings for this image.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


As you move the eye dropper over the image, the RGB value of the point below the cursor appears at the right. Click the image color you wish to appear transparent, or enter an RGB value in the fields.


As you move the eye dropper over the image, the RGB value of the point below the cursor appears at the right. Click the image color you wish to appear transparent, or enter an RGB value in the fields.


As you move the eye dropper over the image, the RGB value of the point below the cursor appears at the right. Click the image color you wish to appear transparent, or enter an RGB value in the fields.


As you move the eye dropper over the image, the RGB value of the point below the cursor appears at the right. Click the image color you wish to appear transparent, or enter an RGB value in the fields.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Choose an item from the list.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Enter the HTML code fragment using correct syntax. Press Ctrl+Tab to insert a tab (indent the line). You can also use Ctrl+C to copy, Ctrl+X to cut, and Ctrl+V to paste via the Clipboard.


Choose an item from the list.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Check your desired options.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Data for the current publication.


Data for the current publication.


Data for the current publication.


Data for the current publication.


Data for the current publication.


Data for the current publication.


Enter a title to use when searching for a specific file. It can be different from the actual file name.


Enter a subject to use when searching for a specific file. Use this property to group similar files together so that you can search for all files that have the same subject.


To enter a different author's name, delete or type over the existing one.


Enter keywords to use when searching for a specific file.


Enter comments to use when searching for a specific file.


Select units of measure for rulers and values such as page dimensions and margins.


Select a unit of horizontal measure for rulers and values such as page dimensions and margins.


Select a unit of vertical measure for rulers and values such as page dimensions and margins.


Check to lock rulers, to prevent accidental changes; uncheck to allow changes.


Check to lock ruler guides (if any), and page margin and column guides, to prevent accidental changes; uncheck to allow changes.


Check to frame column and margin guides, to prevent accidental changes; uncheck to allow changes.


Check to turn the snapping feature on; uncheck to turn if off. When snapping is on, objects you create, move, or resize will jump to align with nearby, visible alignment elements, including ruler guides, page margin and column guides, frame margin and column guides, and/or the dot grid.


Check to show rulers; uncheck to hide them. Shortcut: Choose Display from the Layout menu and check or uncheck Rulers on the submenu.


Check to show ruler guides (if any), and page margin and column guides; uncheck to hide them. To prevent objects from snapping to these elements, hide the guides. Shortcut: Choose Display from the Layout menu and check or uncheck Guides on the submenu.


Check to show frame column and margin guides; uncheck to hide them. To prevent objects from snapping to these elements, hide the frames. Shortcut: Choose Display from the Layout menu and check or uncheck Frames on the submenu.


Check to show window scrollbars; uncheck to hide them.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to show the dot grid, which helps you place objects precisely; uncheck to hide it.


Specify the number of ruler marks between dots in the dot grid.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Check to align objects with the page edge. If only one object is selected, page-edge alignment is automatic.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to leave objects' vertical alignment unchanged.


Check to align the top edges of selected objects.


Check to align the vertical centers of selected objects.


Check to align the bottom edges of selected objects.


Check to "stack" the objects vertically.


Check to leave objects' horizontal alignment unchanged.


Check to align the left edges of selected objects.


Check to align the horizontal centers of selected objects.


Check to align the right edges of selected objects.


Check to "stack" the objects horizontally.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Shows the left (or inside, when mirrored) margin value. To change the margin, enter a new value.


Shows the right (or outside, when mirrored) margin value. To change the margin, enter a new value.


Shows the top margin value. To change the margin, enter a new value.


Shows the bottom margin value. To change the margin, enter a new value.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Shows the number of columns on the page. Page columns serve only as guides and do not control the flow of story text. To change the number of columns, enter a new value.


Shows the gap between page columns. To change the gap, enter a new value.


Check to remove any ruler guides you have placed. Guides will be cleared when you click OK.


Two master pages with mirrored margins are useful if your publication will use left and right pages. "Mirrored margins" means that the "left" margin setting becomes the "inside," and the "right" margin becomes the "outside."


Check to apply balanced margins (inside matching outside, top matching bottom) to your publication.


Click this button to derive the page margin settings from the current printer settings.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select to add one or more copies of a specified page. Enter the page values below.


Select to delete one or more pages in a range. Enter the page values below.


Select to go to a specific page in the publication. Enter the page number below.


Enter the page number.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Check your desired options.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Select this option to set up a publication with a standard-size format (for example, letter or half-letter size).


Select this option to set up a publication with a small format (for example, a sheet of labels or business cards).


Select this option to set up a publication with a large format (for example, a banner or poster).


Select this option to set up a publication with a folded format (for example, a greeting card or booklet).


Select your preferred option.


Choose a publication size from the list. You'll see a preview on the right.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Click to display a dialog that lets you define a new publication type.


Click to display a dialog that lets you modify the selected publication type.


Click to remove the selected publication type from the list.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click to display the Print Setup dialog.


Enter the publication name.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter the publication name.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter the publication name.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select to left align text.


Select to center text.


Select to right align text.


Select to justify text (lines up at both left and right margins).


Select to justify all lines of text, including the last line.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image] button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Controls the spacing between letters. Negative values move letters closer together; positive values move them further apart.


Controls the distance between the baseline of one line of text and the baseline of the next line of text. Unless Absolute is checked, specified as a percentage of text size.


Check to specify Leading in points.


Controls the extra space, in addition to the leading and paragraph values, between the first line of the current text block and the last line of the previous text block. Expressed as a percentage, unless Absolute is checked.


Check to specify Space Above in points.


Controls the extra space, in addition to the leading and paragraph values, between the last line of the current text block and the first line of the next text block. Expressed as a percentage, unless Absolute is checked.


Check to specify Space Below in points.


Shows a sample of text with these settings applied.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image] button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Minimum number of characters that a word must have before it is considered valid to hyphenate the word at the end of a line.


Number of letters that the first part of a hyphenated word must contain when a word is split by auto hyphenation.


Number of letters that the second part of a hyphenated word must contain when a word is split by auto hyphenation.


Amount of spare space at the end of each line which is considered acceptable. If the amount of spare space exceeds this value, then auto hyphenation will try to split words, to reduce the spare space. Only affects the hyphenation of left, right and center aligned text.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


How small inter-word spaces can be made before a word must be placed on the next line.


Ideal size of inter-word spaces. Word spaces will be made as close as possible to the optimum, but ensuring that the line is ended within the "hot zone" area. Used when text is aligned left, right, or center.


How large inter-word spaces can be made before the line is considered to have overly large inter-word spaces. If a line will end with over large spaces then hyphenation will be used if enabled and a valid hyphenation position is found.


Inter-word spacing minimum for the last line of text.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to automatically kern adjacent letters larger than the specified pointsize. This corrects over- or under-spacing due to the shape of the characters.


Enter the starting pointsize for automatic kerning.


Check to turn on automatic hyphenation. This corrects the formatting of overly ragged lines, or those with overly large word spacing.


Check to make the selected block of story text always begin a new frame.  If there are no more frames available in the story, text from this point on will go into the overflow buffer.


Check to make the selected block of story text always begin a new column. If there are no more columns available, text from this point on will go into the overflow buffer.


Check to make the selected block of story text never split between one column and another. For example, if the next text block is four lines long but the bottom of the column has room for only three lines, the next block will go at the start of the next column, leaving three blank lines at the bottom of the first.


Check to keep the selected text block as free text when repositioning it. Uncheck to allow the block to be inserted into story text when dragged and dropped over a text frame. To override this setting, hold down the F4 key when dragging the block over a text frame.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


To change the font of the selected text, select a font name from the list.


To change the font style of the selected text, select a style from the list.


To change the case of the selected text, select a style from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


To change the point size of the selected text, select a size from the list or type in a value.


To change the width of the selected text, select a value from the list or type one in.


Check to use points, rather than a percent value, for the width of the selected text.


To change the pattern of the selected text, select one in the list.


To change the shade (percent of solid color) of the selected text, select a shade from the list.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image] button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to apply a strikethrough effect to the selected text.


Check to apply an underline effect to the selected text.


Check to apply an outline effect to the selected text.


To slant the selected text, select a value from the list or type one in. Positive values slant right (forward); negative values slant left (back).


Shows a sample of text with these settings applied.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


To change the color of the selected text, select a color from the list.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made. Click Apply if you also want to apply the selected style to the currently selected object.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Click to reveal the dialog's attribute buttons, which let you specify properties for a new style.


Click to reveal the dialog's attribute buttons, which let you specify properties for a new style.


Click to reveal the dialog's attribute buttons, which let you modify the properties of the selected style.


Click to reveal the dialog's attribute buttons, which let you modify the properties of the selected style.


Click to remove the selected style(s) from the publication.


Click to remove the selected style(s) from the publication.


Click to import the named styles from another PagePlus publication (.PPP) or PagePlus template (.PPX) file. Displays a file selection dialog which lets you choose the source file.


Click to import the named styles from another PagePlus publication (.PPP) or PagePlus template (.PPX) file. Displays a file selection dialog which lets you choose the source file.


Shows a list of named styles in the publication. Click a style name to select it. To select more than one style, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking. To select a range of styles, hold down the Shift key and click the first and the last names in the range.


Click to hide the attribute buttons and accept any changes. To enable this button, enter a style name.


Click to hide the attributes buttons and abandon any changed settings.


Enter a name for the style.


Click to use the Character dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Character dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Line dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Character dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Fill dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Spacing dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Fill dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Spacing dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Tabs and Indents dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Tabs and Indents dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Bullets and Numbering dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Bullets and Numbering dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Dropped Caps dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Dropped Caps dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Text Background dialog to specify properties for the style.


Click to use the Lines Above and Below dialog to specify properties for the style.


Closes this dialog, accepts any changes you have made, and applies the selected style to the currently selected object.


Click to define a new color using the Custom Color Selector.


Click to define the selected color using the Custom Color Selector


Click to remove the selected color from the PagePlus palette.


Click to display the PANTONE® Color Picker dialog, which lets you add Pantone colors to the PagePlus color palette. When a Pantone color is output, PagePlus is able to use printer-optimized color values to achieve a better color match.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Click to define a new color scheme.


Click to modify the selected color scheme.


Click to remove the selected color scheme from the list.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter the name of the color scheme.


Shows the color that will be applied to regions marked with Scheme Color 1. To use a different color as Scheme Color 1, select it from the list of PagePlus palette colors.


Shows the color that will be applied to regions marked with Scheme Color 2. To use a different color as Scheme Color 2, select it from the list of PagePlus palette colors.


Shows the color that will be applied to regions marked with Scheme Color 3. To use a different color as Scheme Color 3, select it from the list of PagePlus palette colors.


Shows the color that will be applied to regions marked with Scheme Color 4. To use a different color as Scheme Color 4, select it from the list of PagePlus palette colors.


Shows the color that will be applied to regions marked with Scheme Color 5. To use a different color as Scheme Color 5, select it from the list of PagePlus palette colors.


Shows the color used for the page background. To choose a different color, select it from the list of PagePlus palette colors. To display a picture instead of a solid color, check Display picture background.


Shows the color used for hyperlinks. To choose a different color, select it from the list of PagePlus palette colors.


Shows the color used for followed hyperlinks (those the user has already clicked on). To choose a different color, select it from the list of PagePlus palette colors.


Check to select a picture file to be tiled in the background, rather than using a solid color. Click Browse... to bring up a file selection dialog.


Shows the picture file to be tiled in the background.


Click to display a file selection dialog.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select a line pattern from the list.


Select a line color from the list of colors in the PagePlus color palette.


Select (or type in) a value for the line's shade (tint) percentage. Setting the shade below 100% reduces the intensity of the line.


Choose a line type from the list.


Select the line's weight (thickness) in points.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select a fill pattern from the list.


Select a fill color from the list of colors in the PagePlus color palette.


Select (or type in) a value for the fill's shade (tint) percentage. Setting the shade below 100% reduces the brightness or intensity of the fill.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select a line pattern from the list.


Select a line color from the list of colors in the PagePlus color palette.


Select (or type in) a value for the line's shade (tint) percentage. Setting the shade below 100% reduces the intensity of the line.


Choose a line type from the list.


Select the line's weight (thickness) in points.


Select the radius of the object's corners. A value of zero gives square corners.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image] button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select a corner style. You can select different corner styles or click the "Keep all corners the same" box to set them all to the Top-Left style.


Select a corner style. You can select different corner styles or click the "Keep all corners the same" box to set them all to the Top-Left style.


Select a corner style. You can select different corner styles or click the "Keep all corners the same" box to set them all to the Top-Left style.


Select a corner style. You can select different corner styles or click the "Keep all corners the same" box to set them all to the Top-Left style.


Check to set all the corners to the Top-Left style.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Set the color of the picture from the list of colors in the PagePlus color palette. When a picture is re-colored, the original colors are mapped to varying intensities of the selected color.


Select (or type in) a value for the picture shade (tint) percentage. Setting the shade below 100% reduces the intensity of the picture.


Select (or type in) the size of the picture's border, expressed as a percentage of the smallest dimension of the picture. The picture shrinks as its border expands. Used when the graphic box background of a picture has been given a non-clear line or fill, forming a colored frame or background to the picture.


Enter a value by which to scale the picture horizontally. 100% is the picture's original width.


Enter a value by which to scale the picture vertically. 100% is the picture's original height.


Check to restore the picture to its original size (100% of both width and height).


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Check to flip the picture horizontally.


Check to flip the picture vertically.


Check to designate any one color of the image as a transparent color. The resulting image appears as transparent in PagePlus, allowing you to adjust position and scaling with precision. Click the Color... button to preview the image and set the transparent color.


Click to preview the image and set the transparent color.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select a kern percentage from the list, or type in a value. The kern value is specified as a percentage of the text size. The higher the percentage, the less space between letters.


Check to retain the source file's formatting styles, i.e. if you've defined and applied text styles (including font, point size, leading, or color) in the word processor, and want PagePlus to import and convert as much of this formatting as possible. Uncheck to discard this information. In either case, PagePlus does preserve basic character properties like italic, bold, and underline, and paragraph alignment (left, center, right).


Check to ignore returns in the source text, i.e. only if the file has been saved with a carriage return at the end of every line, and you want to strip off these extra returns.


Check to link any imported pictures to the original picture file. When you import a picture, PagePlus can either embed or link (insert a reference to) the picture data. If a picture is linked, then the original picture file must be present for the publication to be printed. The Fonts & Pictures Manager on the Tools menu provides an overview of pictures in the publication, showing whether each is linked or embedded.


Click to embed pictures with file sizes smaller than the specified value and link those that are larger. When you import a picture, PagePlus can either embed or link (insert a reference to) the picture data. If a picture is linked, then the original picture file must be present for the publication to be printed. The Fonts & Pictures Manager on the Tools menu provides an overview of pictures in the publication, showing whether each is linked or embedded.


Select to embed all imported pictures inside the publication file. This can make publication files very large and cumbersome, especially if large pictures are being used. The Fonts & Pictures Manager on the Tools menu provides an overview of pictures in the publication, showing whether each is linked or embedded.


If the option is selected, pictures smaller than this value will be embedded. To change the value, type a new one.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select to have PagePlus cause display pictures using the full amount of original picture data. This gives the most accurate representation of the picture but can slow display speed considerably, especially when large pictures are being used.


Select to have PagePlus display pictures will be displayed using partial data in order to speed up the display. The lower the value for the maximum graphic size, the faster, but less accurate, the display.


Shows the maximum size for imported bitmap display. The lower the value for the maximum graphic size, the faster, but less accurate, the display. To change the value, type a new one.


Check to have PagePlus store the smaller, fast-display form of the picture in the publication file when it is saved to disk. Checking this option will provide faster display when loading, but publication files will occupy a larger amount of disk space.


Check to display all unrotated pictures using a very fast outline box display.


Check to display all rotated pictures using a very fast outline box display.


Check to have PagePlus treat the resolution of all imported paint-type (bitmap) pictures as 96dpi (screen resolution). Some bitmaps may have a different resolution installed internally. Uncheck the box to force PagePlus to check for internal bitmap settings.


Check to constrain aspect ratio (keep the height-to-width proportion constant) when a picture is resized. Uncheck to allow free resizing. In either case, you can hold down the Shift key while dragging to toggle between free and constrained resizing.


Metafiles that use transparency must be printed as bitmaps, so a particular dpi setting must be applied. The default value of 150 dpi looks acceptable on a 600 dpi inkjet printer, but you may wish to experiment with other values, depending on your printer. Keep in mind that increasing the dpi setting will require more memory, which can lead to printing problems.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click to skip this instance of the possible error.


Click to apply a correction to the selected text in the Sentence box. If there is more than one choice in the Alternatives box, select the replacement item you prefer.


Click to continue proofreading with the next sentence.


Click for a more detailed explanation of the error message.


Click to skip all instances of this type of possible error.


Click to add the instance (of a word flagged as misspelled) to your dictionary, so future spell-checking in this language will not flag it as a misspelling. This button is only enabled if you have turned on the Proof Reader Wizard's Spell Checking feature.


Click this button to make your choice.


Selected text shows the location of the possible error. Click Correct to apply a correction. (If the button is not available, type in your own correction, then click Correct.)


Provides a brief description of the possible error.


Shows proposed alternatives for the selected text. To replace selected text in the Sentence box, click a replacement item from this list, then click Correct.


Click to close the Explanation dialog.


Provides a more detailed explanation of the possible error.


Enter your input in this field.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select to choose from a list of alternative characters.


Choose a typeface from the list.


Enter the point size for the bullet character.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select the gap between the bullet character and the start of each line.


Select the gap between the bullet character and the start of the first line only.


Shows a sample of text with these settings applied.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Select to remove bullets and numbering.


Select to apply a bulleted format to the text.


Select to apply numbering to the text.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter punctuation symbol(s) you wish to follow the number.


Check to place the capital as a margin element; the width of the cap will be used to create a left indent for all the text in the text block. Uncheck to use the cap as a "corner" element; text below the cap will run out to the block's margin.


Select a typeface from the list. Automatically defaults to the font of the text block.


Select the number of lines the cap should drop/raise.


Select an offset between the cap and the adjacent text.


Shows a sample of text with these settings applied.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select to remove dropped caps.


Select to apply dropped caps to the text.


Select to apply raised caps to the text.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


This option checks for text with formatting that cannot be reproduced correctly on the Web. The Layout Checker will offer automatic solutions to these problems.


This option warns if your Web site will be slow to download from the Web for the average user.


This option checks for miscellaneous problems in your Web site.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Click to close the dialog.


Click this button to make your choice.


Type the word whose spelling you want to check, then click Spell.


In the event of a misspelling, correction(s) and suggested variants appear here.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


This option shows the gallery for a Kodak PhotoCD.


This option lets you import an image directly from a scanner or other TWAIN source, such as a digital camera.


This option lets you import any image.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Choose an item from the list.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Choose an item from the list.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Choose an item from the list.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Check your desired options.


Enter your input in this field.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Check your desired options.


Enter your input in this field.


Check your desired options.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Enter your input in this field.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Identifies the active printer. Click to select a different printer.


Click to change the properties of the selected printer. The settings you specify apply to the current publication, and may also affect print settings in other applications you use.


Click to set various print options, such as color separations or special formatting.


Describes the state of the selected printer—for example, busy or idle.


Identifies the active printer.


Identifies the active printer.


Identifies the active printer.


Check to print your publication to a file rather than a printer.


Printer setting for paper.


Printer setting for artwork.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Select to print the entire publication.


Select to print the page that contains the insertion point.


Select to print specific pages.


Enter the page numbers to print.


Choose an item from the list.


Check your desired options.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Enter the number of copies to print.


Check to organize the pages when you print multiple copies of a publication. A complete copy of the document is printed before the first page of the second set is printed.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check to export just the selected object(s). Uncheck to export all the objects on the pasteboard and page.


Check to display a dialog of options relating to the export, if the export format has options which can be set. For example, bitmap formats let you specify the resolution, color format, compression type, and any format-specific settings. Uncheck to bypass this dialog.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Lets you set the defaults from a list of the currently defined named text styles.


Lets you set the defaults by setting values using specific dialogs.


Click to use the Character dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Character dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Spacing dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Spacing dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Tabs & Indents dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Tabs & Indents dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Bullets & Numbering dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Bullets & Numbering dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Dropped Caps dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Dropped Caps dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Lines Above and Below dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Lines Above and Below dialog to specify default properties.


Click a style name to select it.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and abandons any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Help is available for each item in this group. Click the [image]  button at the top of the dialog box, then click a specific item for information.


Lets you set the defaults from a list of the currently defined named graphic styles.


Lets you set the defaults from a list of the currently defined named text styles.


Click to use the Line dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Line dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Fill dialog to specify default properties.


Click to use the Fill dialog to specify default properties.


Click a style name to select it.


Enter the Username exactly as supplied to you by the provider. For details, choose Index from the Help menu and search for "Publishing to the World Wide Web."


Enter the Password exactly as supplied to you by the provider. Observe upper- and lower-case spelling, or the host server will not recognize the password. Don't let others see your password! For details, choose Index from the Help menu and search for "Publishing to the World Wide Web."


If publishing to VisualCities, leave the Folder box blank. VisualCities automatically assigns your Username as your publishing folder. (Alternate Web servers, however, may require this information.) For details, choose Index from the Help menu and search for "Publishing to the World Wide Web."


Check to have PagePlus "remember" your password the next time you publish to this address. If unchecked, you will need to re-enter your password next time.


Closes this dialog and searches for the FTP address you entered.


Closes this dialog and cancels publishing without saving any changes you have made.


To publish to your VisualCities account, leave the FTP Address as "ftp.visualcities.com". Alternatively, enter the address of another Web server. For details, choose Index from the Help menu and search for "Publishing to the World Wide Web."


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.